What do you do for a living?

I’m a journalist. Currently I work as the overnight editor for The Huffington Post.

How would you describe what you do?

I write and produce news stories. In other words, I cover the history of now.

What does your work entail?

Researching and reporting current events. Writing compelling headlines, stories and news alerts. Creating slideshows. Answering reader questions. Sharing news on social media. Editing content. Producing the front page of the website. And dealing with a ton of of email (on average, more than 400 messages a day).

What’s a typical work week like?

I work from 9 p.m. to 7 a.m., Sunday through Thursday. Each shift is different. And if news breaks over the weekend, I’m basically on call.

How did you get started?

I wrote a letter to the editor that was published in a local newspaper in 1989. That fall, I joined my school newspaper as a cub reporter. The following year, I was named editor-in-chief and landed an internship at a local weekly. The weekly hired me three months later.

What do you like about what you do?

I love keeping the public updated about current events, particularly during troubling times. If readers have solid, factual information about the world around them, they are better prepared to act in service of themselves and others.

What do you dislike?

Journalism is stressful. The hours are rough, the pay isn’t great, the industry is in flux (no one’s job is considered “safe”)… and then there’s the fact that I spend several hours a day dealing with death and destruction.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

How much do you make?

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         _X___

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

 How much money did/do you make starting out?

When I started out, I worked for free as an intern. Once I became a general assignment reporter, I made about $7/hour.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

No schooling is required, though a bachelor’s degree is often preferred. This means you will be poor for a very long time (hell, I’m still paying off student loans and I’ve been in the business for over 20 years). That said, I believe journalism is a career that’s best learned on-the-job. For this, having a great and patient editor is key.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Learning how to leave work at work, particularly when news is still breaking. I have, in the past, worked myself into a state of exhaustion (hospitalization was required).

Of course, news is always breaking, and many journalists get burned out if they don’t step away sometimes.

What is most rewarding?

Serving the readers. Affecting change. Keeping powerful forces/governments/individuals in check. Inspiring conversations.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Be curious. Pay attention to what’s happening all over the world, not just in your immediate vicinity. Read a wide variety of news sources and develop a critical eye for bullshit/lies. Become a good observer and a caring listener. And when you write, aim for a clear and compelling narrative, but fact-check everything. Most importantly, don’t go into journalism for the money.

How much time off do you get/take?

About 2 weeks a year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That all journalists are biased and heartless bottom feeders willing to sell our souls or screw over anyone for a story. Most reporters work very hard to keep their biases in check. I had friend once say to me, “I’ve seen you write stories about Republicans doing stupid things, and I’ve seen you write stories about Democrats doing or saying stupid things. Which are you: a Republican or a Democrat?” I responded, “Neither, I’m anti-stupid.”

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’d like to write more books, move overseas and launch an obituary wire service.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Although journalism is incredibly rewarding, it can be very hard on relationships. I’ve had more than one ex-boyfriend become upset when I needed to leave a romantic dinner to deal with breaking news. Thankfully, the man I married is completely understanding and supportive. Being able to work on deadline and raise a family at the same time is also quite difficult. Sacrifices will have to be made. However, if you love the work, your life will never be boring.

The post Journalist and Editor – Jade Walker appeared first on Job Shadow.

I am a Board Certified Behavior Analyst (BCBA) and I work as a Behavior Consultant with children with autism.  I also wrote a book called The Verbal Behavior Approach:  How to teach children with autism and related disorders in 2007.  In addition to working with several children on a weekly basis, I also conduct training workshops on techniques outlined in my book.

To work as a BCBA, you need excellent people skills.  You need to be good at tasks such as assessment, data/record keeping, graphing and analyzing results and also need to be an excellent communicator and problem solver.

I work with 1 to 3 young children per day in their homes or in pre-schools.  I work about 20 hours per week.  Occasionally I also conduct full day assessments in schools with older students or do full day trainings in different States or Countries.  

I “fell into the autism world” in 1999 when my first born son, Lucas, was diagnosed with autism.  I was the Founding President of the local autism society and began to coordinate Lucas’ in-home 40-hour/wk ABA program when he was three.  In 2000, someone recommended I look into becoming a BCBA which I did a few years later.

I love seeing progress and helping children with autism either directly or through my efforts to train parents and professionals around the world.  I also like the flexibility I have as I work alone through my own Limited Liability Company.  Most BCBAs, however, work for schools or agencies.

What do you dislike?

The thing I like least is billing each month for my services.  If I owned a large company, billing would be done by someone else or by an entire department.  Since I work alone, it is easier for me to do the billing but it does take a lot of time and is my least favorite activity.

I work for an hourly rate which may be slightly different depending on the contract.  Sometimes I am hired for a day or two to speak or do an evaluation and this is usually paid at a fixed daily rate.

Since BCBAs need a Master’s degree and certification, most salaries start over $50,000/year.   Some BCBAs who work privately are compensated by insurance companies or organizations between $75-$150/hour.  The pay range is wide and heavily dependent on where you are employed and what State you live in.

A Master’s degree in ABA or a related field is required.  If the Master’s degree is in a related field, additional post Master’s ABA courses are required.  In addition, a supervision period is required (1500 hours directly with children/clients and 75 hours with a BCBA supervisor).  Finally passing a certification exam is necessary.  To maintain certification BCBAs need on-going continuing education credits.

Every child, parent, and professional is different so each situation requires careful analysis and intervention.  If everyone is not on the same page, the child does not make the maximum progress.  Most of my time is spent on training, analyzing data, and giving constant feedback to adults who work with the child to get the interventions as consistent as possible so the child makes progress.

What is most rewarding?

I love to see graphs/data showing that our interventions are working to reduce problem behavior and increase language.  I love to see a child who progresses from not talking to speaking in phrases or a child who is not potty trained master this important life skill or a picky eater learn to eat a wide range of foods because of the ABA intervention programs I put in place.

Check www.bacb.com for more information about becoming a BCBA.  Check my web site:  www.BarberaBehaviorConsulting.com for info about my work.   Read my book (The Verbal Behavior Approach) as well as another (How to Think Like a Behavior Analyst by Bailey and Burch published in 2006)

ABA is the science of changing behavior and works with everyone.  Not all BCBAs work with children with autism.  Some BCBAs work as dolphin trainers at Sea World, some work with people with brain injuries, and others work with companies to improve organizational processes.  If more people knew about the power of ABA and had BCBAs to help them make data-based decisions, the world would be a better place!

The post Behavior Analyst – Mary Barbera appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a professional coach, author, educator and speaker on the topics of Positive Psychology, goal-setting, and addiction recovery.

How would you describe what you do?

I work on the phone with individuals all over the world as a coach in helping them to set and accomplish meaningful goals.  I have a Master’s degree in Applied Positive Psychology from the University of Pennsylvania, so I’m an expert on the science of happiness, and particularly how it relates to goal-setting theory.  I use this knowledge to teach in the University of Texas-Dallas School of Management in their coaching certificate program, and I keynote at management and motivational conferences periodically.  I have published six books and I speak about them and do media appearances frequently, which can all be seen at http://www.youtube.com/channel/UCnCz-KBRtSEGVcQ0Q77RFzQ

What does your work entail?

I work on the phone, travel to speeches, teach via webcam or on person, keep up to date at conferences by attending and presenting, and I write books/blog/contribute chapters to anthologies.

What’s a typical work week like?

I work from 7:45 am on Monday morning until about 4 pm or 5, and that’s how I usually spend Monday through Thursday.  Friday is a day I try to save for writing, networking and catching up with colleagues.

How did you get started?

I have been writing books and giving interviews/speeches since my first book, “My Name is Caroline” (Doubleday 1988) was published.  In the intervening decades, I became a trained and accredited professional coach, and when I returned to the University of Pennsylvania in 2005 to get a Master’s degree in Applied Positive Psychology, I developed an expertise in Positive Psychology at that time and have been teaching, writing and speaking about that since that time.

What do you like about what you do?

My work is meaningful and fulfilling because I work with motivated individuals who want to pursue goals that will leave behind a legacy they are proud of, and will also leave them with no regrets.  I also love to touch large groups of people so writing books and being in the media allows me to have a bigger impact on people who are hungry for this new knowledge.  I’ve created a flexible and rewarding career that has allowed me to juggle raising three children with advancing my education and career in my own time and on my own terms.

What do you dislike?

I often work alone, and have to compensate by getting together with people in-person at the beginning or end of each day, and from Friday through Sunday.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? (salaried, hourly, commission, bonuses, etc)

Speech fees, book royalties, coaching clients, licensing course materials, and book advances.

How much do you make?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         ____

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  _x__

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

How much money did/do you make starting out?  

It varied but was always healthy.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Having a coach education and a Master’s degree in Applied Positive Psychology separated me from my peers in the coaching world in a unique way.

What is most challenging about what you do? 

Juggling the constant demands of running a business that requires accounting, scheduling logistics, lots of writing, traveling and continuing education makes the day far too short and my inbox always full.  I have a virtual assistant and a bookkeeper, but it’s still a lot of paperwork and logistics that can eat up precious time.

What is most rewarding?

Knowing that I am making a positive difference in people’s lives.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Get the best education you can get, and then hire an established coach who will mentor you into the practice you went – whether you are a solopreneur or joining a practice within a company or with other professionals.

How much time off do you get/take?

It’s completely up to me.  About a month a year in the most recent year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That anyone can coach.  It’s a skill that needs to be finely honed, and you need to really care about people to make the right connection.  Coaching is also not therapy, and all coaches need to know the line and be able to refer when appropriate.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’m hoping that one of my books becomes a TV movie, that I continue to write more books that make an impact around the world, that I give a TED talk, and I continue to grow and improve in my skills.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

This is a wonderful career, but it requires focus, discipline, hard work and attention to detail.  It’s not “easy,” but once you have the right training and tools, the job can begin to feel effortless!

The post Addiction Recovery Coach – Caroline Adams Miller appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Senior Political Columnist for NJ Press Media.

How would you describe what you do?

I write a column syndicated in the Gannett-owned newspapers in New Jersey which also runs on the papers’ web sites. I also write a blog read in all 50 states and about 70 countries as well as Twitter feeds @bobingle99.  I am a New York Times Best Seller author and have two books out now, “The Soprano State” and “Chris Christie: The Inside Story Of His Rise To Power.” I am frequently a guest on national radio and TV programs. I also do two radio programs of my own weekly.

What does your work entail?

I gather information that I think the readers or listeners would like to know about and present it in a way that is easy to understand and is enjoyable. The idea is to tell people frankly and clearly about what’s going on with their money and in their name so they can make informed decisions.

What’s a typical work week like?

My days usually start around 6 am when I start reading the overnight correspondence and checking news organizations for what has happened in the hours since I last checked, usually around 11:30 pm. This is a 7-day week task. Some of the information is bound for the columns and additional insight is sought from people close to the situation. The idea is to give a well balanced view of what’s really happening. Other times the information becomes blogs or Tweets. There are also meetings with sources in general and press conferences. The reading task just to keep up is enormous and it never ends. There are more requests for speeches and appearances and book-signings than I can accept.

How did you get started?

In college I needed money for school and a second local daily newspaper was starting up and offered me a job. Did not plan to make it a career, I was planning to be in marketing/advertising. Like John Lennon said, “Life is what happens while you’re busy making plans.” I left graduate school on a Saturday and went to work for The Associated Press the next day, expecting it to be about two years with what was considered the Marine Corps of journalism. After 12 years I left that to write a column for The Atlanta Constitution, my hometown paper. Up until then all my work was strictly objective with no subjective editorial comment. Eventually I came to New Jersey where I am based in the Statehouse in Trenton.

What do you like about what you do?

I like being where the action is, being able to tell it like it is no matter who is involved. There are no sacred cows, no one tells me what to write.  l am gratified when college students studying journalism say that they have been reading me all their lives and I influenced their career choice. I have met international leaders and been on the front of world events. I have traveled around the globe. My fingertips touched history.

What do you dislike?

The job is 7-day a week and many times 18-hour days. There is just no way to predict what will happen. You have to be able to change plans quickly and sometimes are pressed into service on holidays or vacations.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I am paid a salary. For people interested in the business, that will vary from place to place and company to company. No one starts out as a columnist without paying dues by covering breaking news or sports. Columnists are usually chosen for their experience and their writing style – people may not like what you say but they like the way you say it. No one gets into journalism for money, it’s more of a calling. But there are far more rewards in life than financial ones.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

Hard to remember but I think it was $60 weekly and that was usually seven days and I went to college full time.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Major in something you like and get to know the subject. Learn as much as you can. Writing and reporting is one of those things that gets better the more you do it. So work for a school paper, community papers, whatever to get the experience, even for free. And read a lot. I know no good writers who aren’t voracious readers. You have to be able to research, reading is key. Know how to communicate with people.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Getting it accurate. It stays around for a long time. Things are never black and white.

What is most rewarding?

Knowing you helped people understand what is going on.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Read a lot and don’t bother if you don’t have a natural curiosity about things or are afraid of offending people. A journalism comforts the afflicted and afflicts the comfortable. It can be a lonely life sometimes.

How much time off do you get/take?

That varies from company to company and with experience. I get about 20 days off a year. Take it but many time work while I am “off.”

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

They think someone tells me what I have to say.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Keep on trucking. Maybe a few more books.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

It can be rewarding in some many ways but it is hard work, no glamour. Hard work. Lots of shoe leather.

The post Columnist – Bob Ingle appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a writer of horror and crime novels, although I’m still not at the point yet where I can do it as a full time job.

How would you describe what you do?

I formulate a blueprint or outline from an idea and then proceed writing the novel. Then there’s editing, marketing, interviews and a whole host of other matters that must be handled outside of the actual writing itself.

What does your work entail?

A lot of solitude and quiet. A lot of planning and promoting. To be a writer today you must be familiar with social media. And with a busy schedule, I utilize my iPad and write whenever I can.

What’s a typical workweek like?

That’s one thing about writing; you can choose your hours and so no week is exactly like the last one. As I previously mentioned, I use using an iPad and so I try to write at every opportunity possible.

How did you get started?

I’ve been writing since I was a kid. I wrote short stories when I was younger and then transitioned to the novel. My first horror novel THE REAWAKENING won the 2013 Maine Literary Award and became an Amazon bestseller. Then I wrote two more books in the series, Darpocalypse and Darmageddon, which will be published in early 2014.

 What do you like about what you do?

I enjoy creating my own worlds and characters and see them play out on the page. Then to see the final product is quite rewarding. Winning awards and making money are also nice rewards too.

What do you dislike?

I find the marketing aspect of selling the books the most arduous. That includes promotions, blogging, Facebooking, Twitter and all the other social media. You have to shut off your creative side and transition into business mode.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

As far as writing goes, I’m compensated by the sales of the book as well as the advance given to me by the publisher. The more hardcover and ebooks you sell, the more you make. Writing a series of books also helps propel sales.

How much do you make?

$0-25,000 but with more books coming in the future I’m hoping to improve on this figure and grow my writing business as time goes on.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

You make nothing starting out until you have a book published. Then you have to find a publisher or publish it yourself, which means spending money on a cover artist and editor. So in the beginning, if you are self-publishing, you must actually invest money out of pocket in order to hope to make a profit down the road. So in that respect it’s like a lot of other businesses. And you need a quality cover and good editor.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

You don’t need any formal schooling but it certainly helps to have an understanding of literature and writing techniques. But a person can self educate and write their own novel if they study the works of other writers and hone their craft. And everyone has a novel in them waiting to come out. But not everyone is willing to do all the hard work it takes to pull it out of their brain.

What is most challenging thing about what you do?

It’s very challenging to come up with a good plot and then execute the writing. There are so many minor details involved in writing a novel that it becomes a challenge to juggle them all at one time.

What is most rewarding?

It is very rewarding to be recognized by one’s peers. As I previously mentioned, my novel THE REAWAKENING, The living Dead Series, book 1 won the Maine Literary Award for Speculative Fiction. I’ve also won the Andres Dubus Award for short fiction, as well as some other awards. It’s also very rewarding to get feedback from readers who love your book. I think nice feedback and great sales are probably the most rewarding aspects about writing.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Read, read, read. Know the market out there and see what author is selling well in the type of writing you do. Then write and don’t give up. Keep honing your craft and don’t get discouraged about what you write. Usually, I’m not satisfied with my manuscript until the fourth or fifth pass through it. You need to get something down on paper to edit, and a lot of time people get too discouraged and quit before they finish their story.

How much time off do you get/take?

Not much. There’s always something to do and because I love doing I could do it even on vacation. When you love something as much as that, you want to do it all the time.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Some people think it’s a waste of time to write and that you should be pursuing more lucrative career. Others think you’re making lots of money or that you have movie deals. But most writers work at their craft every day like everyone else because they love creating stories. Very few make the big dollars like James Patterson and Lee Child. Writing itself is an end for many writers.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’d love to be able to write full time and get better in my craft. I’d like to be able to write different types of novels and increase my sales every year and grow my fan base. Also, to become a better marketer/promoter. Modest goals.

What else would you like people to know about you job/career?

Just to let people know that now is a great time to be a writer. The arrival of Amazon has given beginning writers the opportunity to write books and sell them on their website. The best way to sell books right now is to choose a genre and write a series of them. Make sure you know your craft before you start to market your novel and make it’s the best it can be. Too many times amateurs try to sell work that is not polished or ready for market. Find a writer’s group or mentor that can guide you along the way. Understand plotting and the need to make your story interesting to a reader. But more than anything have fun and the entire process will reward you in the end.

The post Horror and Crime Novel Writer – Joseph Souza appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a journalist, specifically a multimedia editor at the Duluth (Minn.) News Tribune, focusing on its digital (duluthnewstribune.com) and print products.

How would you describe what you do?

My job involves anything and everything a newsroom employee can do: social media, assigning stories, writing, editing, photography, shooting and editing video. The main duties of my job are to manage the content on duluthnewstribune.com and its social media accounts.

What does your work entail?

Collaboration, daily deadlines, multitasking, a variety of hours.

What’s a typical work week like?

I work Monday through Friday, usually from morning until mid-afternoon. But the business never stops, so you have to be available during all hours and on weekends for breaking news. I arrive and leave with something to do; it doesn’t stop. There are daily news budget meetings to attend (morning and afternoon) with editors and copy editors. Stories get posted on the website and to social media each day. E-mails get answered, phone calls are taken. My job involves talking with the public, too: answering questions, getting story ideas, helping people troubleshoot the website. I assign stories to reporters, edit a number of stories for the website and print edition.

How did you get started?

I became interested in journalism in high school. I wrote for the school newspaper and decided to pursue it once I got to college. I had an internship at a weekly newspaper when I was in college. I was hired as a sportswriter at a daily newspaper around the time I graduated.

What do you like about what you do?

I enjoy the variety. My job is what I make it. I get to meet people and learn about a number of topics each day. I feel smarter at the end of the day because I’ve learned something new.

What do you dislike?

There’s always a story out there to do; it’s impossible to get to everything.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

I’m a salaried employee.

How much do you make?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         ____

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments: Compensation for this position is negotiable.

How much money did/do you make starting out?  

As a journalist: $27,000

Starting out in my current position: $41,000

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

A background in journalism and communication. Strong writing and editing skills and an understanding of media ethics are a must. Versatility is huge. The more you can do, the more valuable you become.

What is most challenging about what you do?

The lack of specialization. Being versatile is great, but it can be a burden if not managed properly.

What is most rewarding?

Getting a story ahead of everyone else. Better than that is credibility, being a person or place that people come to when big news is happening.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

With anything, be passionate about it. Love what you do and do it well.

How much time off do you get/take?

I get five weeks of vacation per year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

People hear “multimedia editor” and think I’m an IT guy.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I want to travel and live comfortably while remaining active and healthy.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

It’s a position that allows an employee freedom to make decisions about the direction it goes.

The post Journalist and Digital News Editor – Jimmy Bellamy appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a coach for magic people and with that comes being a speaker, author, and teacher. Also, I play dress-up and dance and sing and laugh a lot.  I only believe in growing up as little as it takes to pass in the muggle world when I need to.

How would you describe what you do? 

I battle the Big Boring Nothing of conventional, alienated society by lighting up and empowering magic people.  In other words, I work with people who are especially sensitive, imaginative, and creative (i.e., magic) to help them feel liberated and happy, realize their desires, and move through any blocks or fears they may have as they work towards their goals.

What does your work entail?

My work entails doing a lot of outreach to find and connect with the people who want and need my help.  I maintain a blog (www.awesomeyourlife.com), I run a giant (over 7000 members) free Facebook group for magic people (The Dreamer’s Tantra – feel free to visit us and hit “request to join” if you self-identify as magical), I write for online magazines like Elephant Journal, Reality Sandwich, Shareable, and Rebelle Society.

I’ve also authored a book based on my work with my students and my clients called Awaken Your Genius: A Seven-Step Path for Freeing Your Creativity and Manifesting Your Dreams.  The book came out in September 2013 from North Atlantic / Random House and it’s available now on Amazon and at bookstores everywhere. It’s seriously good book with rave reviews –  so I highly recommend checking it out if you want your level of joy and inspiration to explode through the roof.  My work also entails talking to people from all over the world on the phone (that’s how I do my coaching), listening with deep attention and intuition, and asking them the kind of penetrating questions that can move them forward towards their desires and freedom.

I also give folks assignments and meditations to do inbetween our talking sessions together.

I’m constantly researching, learning, seeking out training for myself, and working on my own issues.  In order to be of benefit to other magic people, I have to keep my own magic bright and strong. The help that I share with other people comes directly from the transformations I’ve learned to do in my own life.

What’s a typical work week like?

These days: I wake up around 9 am, meditate and set my intentions for the day, check my schedule (usually I have two or three client calls or Exploratory Sessions [sales conversations with potential clients] in a day. In between calls I might spend some time interacting with folks in the Dreamer’s Tantra Facebook group, work on an essay for my blog or for another magazine, make a video for the Dreamer’s Tantra, answer emails, and plan the next steps for my business.

Most of the time what I do doesn’t feel like “work” at all – it feels like exactly the kind of play I want to be doing.

How did you get started?

I got started just by realizing that folks in my life were constantly asking me for advice and valuing that advice. And then I gradually acknowledged that probably a lot of people could benefit from working with me, that I had a ton to give – and that in order to make offering such help sustainable, I would need to earn a living from it.

So I started out by researching how other coaches operate – reading other blogs, just learning as much as I could. Folks like Martha Beck and Havi Brooks inspired me a lot. Then I started my own blog, and through my own blog (Awesome Your Life) I got ideas for writing a book.  Along the way I’ve had to learn to do a ton of technical interweb stuff that isn’t always my favorite, but hey – it’s got to be done.

What do you like about what you do?

I love connecting with people and seeing them blossom.

What do you dislike?

Sometimes it can be overwhelming, the amount of people that I interact with online. I have to set clear and strong boundaries with folks, which can be tough.  Also the technical stuff (setting up payment buttons and sales pages) can be a teeny bit of a drag.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? (salaried, hourly, commission, bonuses, etc)

My coaching clients pay me by the hour – I currently ask for them to commit to doing 6 sessions with me over 6 weeks, at a rate of $100 per session.  I also ask that to solidify their commitment, they pay for the sessions in advance.  I use PayPal invoice to accept payments.

How much do you make?  

Right now I’m just learning how to really do all of the outreach and sales stuff that needs to happen, and I’m making about $2000 this month.  I anticipate that I’ll earn more soon as I refine some of my approaches and launch a new subscription group that I’m starting for magic people who want support in working on their creative projects.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Coaching is a non-regulated field, so really all it takes is gumption.  I happen to have a PhD in Critical and Cultural Studies. The biggest skills that coaching work requires are intuition, compassion, communication, self-knowledge, and courage.  It’s all about learning to deeply see the potential that lies in people, get them turned on about it, and being fully present with them beyond your own judgments and fears. Also to make it a business you’ve got to hone your writing, video-making, marketing and sales skills.

What is most challenging about what you do?

For me the biggest challenge is the sales process and learning to charge what I’m worth. I’ve been gradually raising my rates over the past year and will likely raise them more soon. I’m a naturally generous person and my impulse is just to give away everything I have for free.  I’ve learned though that that kind of giving is just unsustainable – I end up depleted.  And I’ve also found that there’s a beautiful energetic exchange that can happen when I let people invest money in their work with me – often the process then becomes more real to them, and they get willing to do more work for their part in the transformation.

What is most rewarding?

The most rewarding thing is hearing a client tell me that their life is completely turning around and becoming way more thrilling and fun and fulfilling through the work that we’re doing together.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Start a blog. Write essays or create videos designed to help the kind of people you want to work with. Create a place where the kind of people you want to work with can find you and play with you on the internet – Facebook groups are pretty great for that.  Twitter can work, too.  Show people simple, brilliant ideas that they can use today to immediately improve how they’re feeling and living – and they’ll begin to be willing to trust your insight on deeper topics in their lives.

How much time off do you get/take?

Since I’m self-employed, I can take off whenever I want – it just means I might miss out on business that I would otherwise gather if I worked that day. I usually do stuff related to my business 7 days a week – but I’m quite leisurely  about it and most of it is just fun.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

I haven’t encountered any misconceptions – mostly folks are just curious when I tell them what I do – so I get to tell them all about it.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Soon, I’m going to start a smaller, more focused subscription group for magic people.  My Dreamer’s Tantra group is fabulous, but it’s a bit non-intimate now that it’s swelled to thousands of members.  I’m excited about the prospect of creating resources and classes and coaching circles for the folks in the new subscription group.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Basically that it’s just awesome – and if you’re a wise, compassionate person you don’t have to go to school to become a therapist or a counselor in order to be empowered to help people.  You don’t need an outside authority to tell you your work with others is valuable. You can claim that value for yourself  – your own experience is your authority.  Just share it and you’ll free other people.

The post Creative Person Coach – Carolyn Elliot appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

The short answer is “whatever it takes,” but the semi-boring truth is that what I actually do tends to be primarily focused on information technology (“IT”).  That covers a lot of general areas, and for me, that’s something that I have tried to do: gain broad knowledge while developing areas of deep expertise.

My role has at various times involved anything required to run a business, from the very fundamental areas of construction and facilities, telecommunications, data center migrations – right up to helping design PowerPoint slides for executives with ideas in preparation for IPOs.

For most of my professional career I have managed small-to-midsize teams tasked with implementing and maintaining technology, and/or with supporting it.  I’ve had the chance to work with a lot of really smart, driven people.  With all that intelligence and drive – and this is true for any vocation – often comes strong personalities.  I to my best to try to let people be who they are and manage their interactions to help everyone have as much freedom and job satisfaction as possible as long as goals are met.

That said, I’m not a professional manager; I am a technical professional who manages.  The distinction is that while I have always had managerial responsibilities ranging from basic supervision (signing time cards, filling shifts for people out sick), to reporting status to both internal and customer executives, I am very hands on.  Think of me as a “player-coach” who knows what every team member does, and can probably do everyone’s job, but not as well as they can.  And, at the same time, I am the lead in one or more areas that I try to train others on.

As a manager, my job is to help my team understand organizational priorities, and then to help them accomplish what they are tasked with doing.  I strive to provide them with the tools and resources they need, and then help remove obstacles that may get in the way of them accomplishing those tasks.  If I’m doing my job well, I am able to prevent potential obstacles from ever becoming actual obstacles.  That involves a lot of listening both to my team and to others in the company who we are either delivering things to, relying upon for things, or both.

My career has mostly been a LOT of fun and very rewarding, though at times it has been incredibly frustrating and demoralizing.  At the end of the day, honest introspection helps me dismiss the bad stuff and focus on the good stuff.  In job situations where that hasn’t been possible, it becomes time to move on.  It’s important to routinely assess where you are in your career and what’s going on in your life and take action to guide things as you want them to be.

How would you describe what you do?

I tell people that I fix things.  That usually leads to questions to which I add that my job is to find out what people need and to try to help them.  Usually that involves finding out what they really need, not what they say they need.  It’s my job to help figure out the best way to get people what they need given resources available.  As is true in many areas, solutions to problems are usually governed by three general attributes: Good, fast and cheap – pick any two.

My occupational choices have also meant that my work life is woven 24×7 into my non-work life.  The only time that is not true is once in a great while when I truly unplug for a serious vacation or extra-long weekend.  If my smartphone (pager in the old days) isn’t parked on my bed-side table right by my glasses, things just aren’t right.  If someone calls, I answer and try to help.

What does your work entail?

My work entails talking with people to constantly adapt to changing priorities and deadlines, and trying to manage the commitment of resources (people, machines, etc.) to trying to meet them.  I spend a lot of time helping to either translate between technical and non-technical talk, or between different domains of technical talk.  Remember how I said I’ve been able to work with some really smart, driven people?  Well that often means there are those who think they know how to do everyone’s job, even if they really don’t have any experience.  Some software engineers don’t understand why a network or server isn’t configured in a way that makes sense to them, and some data center operations staff [on my team] wonder why the software engineers are doing things that make no sense to them.

Often someone outside your domain of expertise can ask really good questions that, if you’re open-minded, will help you learn and grow, because you question assumptions rather than just do what you’ve always done.  Patience is really important in my work, as is the ability to be both a good listener and teacher and guide.

On any given day I might be opening boxes and sticking asset tags on things, or perhaps sitting at my desk intently focused on writing a script to parse data and into something useful.  Sometimes I’m pulled into meeting with executives to explain things or to listen to a problem and propose a solution and a timeline.  At other times, I’m getting on an airplane to make sure things are working and people are on the same page.  It’s really varied – which I love.

Then there are the days I have to work on PowerPoint presentations.  If I know that I know the audience will be interested and ask questions, it’s still a little fun.  If I know, or later find out, that people won’t actually be paying attention because they don’t care or they don’t understand the content and aren’t interested enough to ask questions, then it’s not so fun; that happens internally and with customers sometimes.

What’s a typical work week like?

I’ve never seen a typical work week in my life.  Part of that is because I choose jobs where there is often no typical work week, and part of that is because things change quickly in the world today.  I’ve heard it said that the rate of change in the world is faster now than it ever has been.  I think that’s driven by the flow of information, and information is at the very core of my work, so it seems like everything is constantly changing.

But there are some patterns that recur.  There are short-term tasks and projects that we try to set dates on and stick to, and so sometimes I’m managing outside distractions and interruptions for my team and myself to keep us focused on the immediate task at hand.  IT people are routinely approached anywhere and everyone in the office (yes, including the restrooms) with questions, requests, etc.  Being generally helpful by nature, we try to remember what someone asked about and help them when we get back to our desk, but more often than not, we are derailed or distracted by someone else, so things get forgotten for a while.  It’s a daily thing to ask people to please “email the helpdesk” or “put in a ticket” and they don’t get it because they see you standing in front of them and they don’t understand why you can’t just deal with their issue right now.

Larger projects and initiatives often require planning things into chunks or phases, and then trying to balance the short-term tasks and immediate interruptions with periods of working on the larger stuff.  There are rarely enough resources to get everything done when everyone wants them done.  The challenges typically are money and/or staff time, but sometimes it’s because of unclear or changing requirements that cause a lot of rework, which can be very frustrating.

I’ve mostly worked for start-ups and smaller companies since early in my career, and compared to large enterprises where there seems to be less change and more predictability, these more dynamic work places don’t have time for “typical.”

With the rare exception of when I’m truly away on vacation and unplugged, I’m reading and responding to email 7 days a week, starting around 7:00 AM when I get to my PC at home with a cup of coffee, right through when I go to bed and check my smartphone for one last time to see if anything needs dealing with.

How did you get started?

My father worked in high-tech when I was growing up.  He often brought home things for work, and I got to play with them.  At a very early age I got hooked on computers – mostly for play, but also to discover the coolness of writing little programs.  Both my brothers also went to work in high-tech, so it was an ecosystem I grew increasingly familiar with.

When I had graduated from high school and begun taking college classes, I had also trained to be an Emergency Medical Technician and was doing that for a living.  I loved that work, but it didn’t pay much in those days and I missed computers, so I decided to pursue a job in computer operations.  My first couple of jobs involved being a temporary contract employee for low wages and with no benefits, but I was able to get experience on my resume and begin building my professional network.

As with most jobs, if you’re likable and reasonably good at what you do, it’s not that hard to work your way up if you’re motivated and focused on doing so.  It’s important to not burn bridges – that’s a lesson it took me some years to learn.  If I had to give one piece of advice to people starting out in their careers, it would be: “If you’re upset about something take a deep breath, save that flaming email as a draft and walk away for a little while before you send it. In addition to letting yourself cool off, you also have to remember that email is probably the worst vehicle on earth for conveying emotion, intentional or not.”

What do you like about what you do?

I love being able to learn things, and not just technical things.  One thing I enjoy a lot is introducing myself to people in other departments and trying to understand what they do, and why.  It’s easy to be an armchair quarterback and just judge others or not think about those who are not in your own group.

If I am not challenged, learning and growing in some ways, I get frustrated and bored.  So while not everyday is fun and exciting, I keep working at places where I have constant opportunities to stretch, and also to bring to bear my years of experience to help solve problems.  I often get to collaborate with people who bring different things to the table, and that is truly rewarding.

It’s nice to be seen as a technical expert and consulted on matters, too.

What do you dislike?

There’s nothing about my specific career or job that I dislike.  What I dislike is what anyone in most any profession at any company could dislike if and when these things happen: Office politics, short-term thinking that causes long-term harm, lack of recognition and respect for people regardless of their title or role, and things like that.

Those are things one may put up with for short periods of time (or longer, depending on one’s tolerance and/or needs), but often you do so because you are still gaining other things that, at least for the time-being, offset the bad things.  That may be because you need the experience, or you need the money.  Unfortunately, sometimes with economic downturns, you have to work somewhere you’re not happy about – it happens.  Remember when I said “whatever it takes?”

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

My compensation package has varied throughout my career.  Mostly as a senior manager, I have a base salary and there is a potential for a bonus if the company meets certain targets.  Not being in sales, my total compensation has been less leveraged, so more often than not I have not seen bonus payouts.

Stock options have also often been granted to me, and more often than not, they have ended up not been worth anything.  But to be fair, there have been some positive outcomes for me from stock options, and you always seem to know someone who did well with their options, so you hope…and dream.

How much do you make as an IT Manager?

$100-$200k

How much money did/do you make starting out?  

My first computer operations job paid around $9/hour, but thankfully I could work plenty of overtime as an hourly employee.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

That’s a contentious topic.  I never completed my bachelor’s degree, and that’s true for many people I’ve work with.  Then again, I’ve also worked with some amazing people who did have undergraduate and graduate degrees.  In hiring, I’ve found that the adage “hire for for attitude, train for skill” applies as much to technical professionals as it does to, say, hiring waitstaff at a restaurant or retail workers.  Technical skills can be learned on the job as well as they can in the classroom, and neither is necessarily better than the other.  We need people with both backgrounds and experiences.  They key is to always try to think and understand what’s happening, and find a way to have a sandbox where you can learn and practice different things.

So the short answer here is “whatever it takes.”  (sorry!)

What is most challenging about what you do?

The most challenging thing for me is managing time and resources, since we are typically over-committed on things people want us to deliver in a given period of time.  That is usually because our internal customers think they need certain things when they don’t, or they have unrealistic timelines such that they may press us to deliver by a certain date, and then they’re not ready to use what we have delivered.  Or worse, we do things that aren’t necessary.

So I think if I had to boil it down even more, my biggest challenge is in ferreting-out requirements and getting people to be clear on what they actually need and when.  It’s too easy for them to ask for something right away and me wanting to deliver, rather than pushing back or even saying “no.”

What is most rewarding?

The most rewarding thing for me are the sincere thank-you’s and being appreciated.  This is at all levels.  Pushing my team and myself really hard for a time to deliver on something critical and visible, and then being publicly recognized is generally more valuable than getting a raise.  That may be because of the level I’m at, where more money is nice, but a sense of worth is more valuable.

Strange as it may sound though, if I can help someone with something seemingly simple, or small in the big picture, when you can see that they are happy and feel important enough to get help – that’s probably even more rewarding for me than public recognition.  Sometimes in comes as a a genuine “thank you!” and sometimes it’s just a look on their face of being relieved of pain and worry.  Often, the little things matter a lot, and to someone – they may not be so little.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

If you’re considering an IT career, first figure out if you want to work more on the customer side of things, or in the back office or data center.  While most organizations run lean enough these days that it’s hard to avoid dealing directly with people who are your customers (internal or external), there is still a general distinction between those who people recognize as “not being a people person” and those who are.  If you’re not really a people person, and especially if you aren’t patient, you probably want to focus on learning the behind-the-scenes technical stuff and try to avoid more public roles.  This will end up being better for everyone, because if you don’t like dealing with people, both you and your customers will feel uncomfortable.

Perhaps more than most parts of a company, IT tends to see big change in the way things are done.  That’s not unreasonable since technology changes rapidly.  As such, it’s important to learn what’s being done today, and the directions things are headed.  There is some value in knowing the history of things, but it’s too easy to get stuck in “this is how we’ve always done things” and you risk becoming stale or obsolete.  IT is also subject to outsourcing at different levels.  Smaller organizations may bring on service providers for hosted systems that don’t require much internal support; larger organizations may choose to replace a large chunk of internal IT with a provider, and only some people will remain.  But, if you’re open-minded, forward-looking and perceived as either really helpful or mission-critical, you’re likely not only safe, but you’ll be well taken care of.

If you’re complacent, IT is not the career for you.

How much time off do you get/take?

I’ve generally been given 3-4 weeks of paid time off per year, usually in the form of vacation.  Some companies make a distinction between personal time off (PTO) and vacation.  There are no companies I’ve worked at in my career where there was a “results only” work environment where there were no fixed amounts of paid time off.

Because there are times of really long days, working nights and weekends, etc. I often have had a good boss who recognizes that and will make accommodations for “comp time” – which is off the books and doesn’t officially exist.  Sometimes my boss and I track it if I’ve racked up a bunch (and I do the same for my team), other times if there’s a lull between crunch times, people are told “hey, you’ve been working hard – why don’t you take a day off this week or next week before things get crazy again.”

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

The most common misconception I’ve run across is people who think that IT people actually like to fix computers that got broken because of physical abuse of the machine, or unsafe computing practices.  This is especially true for people who think they can bring in their home computer, or their kid’s computer.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I often joke with my team members and with colleagues that our job is to try to make ourselves unnecessary by automating everything and making it so that computers, systems and network either can’t be broken or can fix themselves.  With 30 years of advancements in personal computing, you’d think things would be so easy and reliable that might happen.  I still dream of a time when people’s computers and all the things they need “just work,” and I’ll keep working to make that happen so I can work on more interesting challenges.

Given my lengthy career, and other non-work interests, I am now trying to develop a plan to apply my technical and managerial skills to other endeavors.  Specifically, I have begun small-scale farming, and am looking to marry the best of traditional methods with cutting-edge technology to make local, small-scale farming viable, at least here in the northeastern US.  I also want to do similar work in energy, education and other things at a local level.

One thing I tell people that I am, aside from being an IT geek, is that I am an efficiency expert.  That’s true – I’ve always done more with less while making things work better.  An area where I am trying to lend my expertise to is government, where they generally don’t operate with the challenges of efficiency and the bottom line.  Sure, there may be budget challenges, but for the most part it’s well-known how inefficient government it, and there’s no reason for it to be in this day and age where we have access to data and knowledge that can make things work better.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Most people think of IT jobs as being desk-bound, and where one spends a lot of time sitting indoors under fluorescent light, or in the data center, standing….under fluorescent light.  It seems a bit boring and lethargic, and it certainly can be.  But, if you want, a career in IT can actually be physically demanding, mentally stimulating, and even dangerous.  Yes, some people are drawn to danger.  And there can be glamour, too.

In my career I’ve had the chance to literally hang upside down by my knees while trying to run Ethernet cabling inside trade show booths and office buildings. I’ve been interviewed in magazines and spoken at conferences, and I’ve ended up in the emergency room twice while on the job.  If these kinds of things scare you, don’t worry – you can easily avoid all that.  But, if you want some excitement, [15 minutes of] fame and risk – you can have that, too.

The post IT Manager – Kamal Jain appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am the Head Football Coach at Wyoming High School. I am also a Physical Education Teacher at Wyoming High School located in Cincinnati, Ohio.

How would you describe what you do?

I am in charge of organizing and operating the grades 9-12 High School Football program.

What does your work entail?

A Head Football Coach has many responsibilities to run a successful program. First and for most you must be organized with defined goals for yourself and your team. The thought process of a head coach should always be about what is best for the team. Every decision is an unselfish decision based on what is best for the team. I am in charge of practice schedules, monitoring 60 players throughout the school day on their grades, behavior in school and after school activities. We start practice at 3:00pm and go to 6:00pm four days a week. I am in charge of putting a competitive football team on the field every Friday night, as well as every Saturday for the Junior Varsity games. The weekends are filled with inputting stats and game planning for the next opponent.

What’s a typical work week like?

We practice Monday through Thursday, 3-6pm, with films and weight lifting from 3-4pm and on field practice from 4-6pm. Friday we have games that start at 7pm. After the game, I upload our video to an online video service we use to watch our game tapes. On Saturday, the varsity team comes in to lift weights at 8am and we then go and watch last night’s game. We focus on getting better after a win or loss. We watch and breakdown the tape to help us get a better understanding of what we can do to get better as individual players and as a team.

After the team is done watching tape, the coaches then meet for a quick meeting and then we go home and watch the opponent breaking down the opponent using our online video program. Saturday night the coaches are off. On Sunday, the coaches meet to discuss and gameplan for the upcoming opponent we meet for two hours. Coaches have responsibilities of drawing up playcards and scouting reports for their positions. We then have a scouting report meeting with the players on Monday before practice. The head coach must watch tape of the opponent for the offense, defense and special teams and just the opponent as a whole.

How did you get started?

I started coaching football my senior year in college during my student teaching semester. I played college football for four years at a small Division 3 school here in Cincinnati.

What do you like about what you do?

I like to see the players experience success. I like to challenge student-athletes to get better everyday in anything they do. I enjoy the process of bringing so many people from different backgrounds together for a common goal.

What do you dislike?

Losing, I hate losing. But with every loss you learn more about yourself and your team. You have to push through adversity because it is guaranteed, everything will not go as you wish.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Salaried

How much do you make?

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         _X_

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

How much money did/do you make starting out?

$30,000

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Bachelor’s Degree in Education

Ohio Teaching Certificate

CPR/First Aid Certification

Foundations of Coaching Course

Ohio Pupil Validation Certificate

What is most challenging about what you do?

Dealing with parents and athletes that don’t buy into the “Team” philosophy. Players who don’t work hard.

What is most rewarding?

Seeing players succeed both on the field and in the classroom.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

It is a full time job with no set work hours. You have to be willing to sacrifice for betterment of the team. There will be adversity and you have to stay focused on the long term goals of your program. Coaching is a lifestyle you have to know that it is a year round job. You are an example to young people 24/7.

How much time off do you get/take?

I take a week off in the summer to go in vacation with my family.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Sometimes people don’t realize how much time and effort is put into coaching a team and coaches really care about what happens to the team.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

My goal for my program besides consistently winning our league and competing for a state championship is that I want to create a program where student-athletes work hard for a common goal and can see the benefit of their hard work. I want to guide students down the right track to start their secondary education on the right track. I want my players to be positive citizens in our community and understand they are positive role models to the young children in our community.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I absolutely love my job! Coaching is very time consuming, but can be very rewarding. Adversity will occur but there is always light at the end of the tunnel if you do what is right. Focus on the process of getting better every day and you will be a great example to every person you come in contact with. You must have a positive attitude and great work ethic to be successful and enjoy this job.

The post High School Football Coach – Aaron Hancock appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Previously I was the President & Founder of a search engine marketing agency based in Portland, Oregon.  We’re now a part of Add3 based out of Seattle where I’m the principal.

How would you describe what you do?

We help companies “get found” for what they do or sell. We work with our clients to find out how their target audience uses search engines and social media, and then help them get in front of the target audience at the right place and time.

What does your work entail?

As president – management, operations, finances, hr

As a search marketer – data analysis, consulting with clients, developing optimization & content strategies, developing keyword targeting strategies, online advertising strategies & management.

What’s a typical work week like?

Monday is a boat race and it tends to taper as the week goes on. The upside of our line of work is – vs other marketing/advertising agencies – there’s very few fire drills. We don’t have to answer panicked client phone calls very often, or get calls on weekends or late at night etc.

How did you get started?

I got my start way back in 1999. I worked for a very successful serial entrepreneur who had started a website (that eventually got acquired for 8 figures) and he asked me to figure out how to get people to the website. A career was born… and this is before Google was a thing really.

What do you like about what you do?

Search marketing is very measurable and drives real results. It’s awesome to see things spring to life for our clients (visitors, sales, etc).

What do you dislike?

The stress of being the boss. Dealing with the ebb & flow of client & employee churn… So I do everything I can to minimize that.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I pay myself a pretty modest salary, then my income fluctuates with the net profit of my business.

How much do you make?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         ____

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

Honestly – my income can vary wildly from month to month and year to year. But to a large degree, I’m in control of it.

How much money did/do you make starting out?  

When I first started working in this field – I think it was in the high 20’s? But that was nearly 15 years ago. The entry level salary range has come up, and compensation can increase fairly rapidly if you stick with it. If you’re really good – you can make a nice living in search marketing.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Schools haven’t really caught up with the search marketing disciplines yet. They’re scratching the surface but we’re not picking people up out of school who are ready to just dive right in. So we have to look for people with a good analytical background (search marketing is very numbers heavy) but who also ‘get’ the marketing aspect of it.

What is most challenging about what you do?

In search marketing – it’s difficult to stay educated on the latest. It takes time & commitment.

What is most rewarding?

Seeing campaigns & strategies work and drive results. There’s nothing better than showing a client the actual impact the changes you’ve recommended or the campaigns you’ve launched are having… and improving.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

the best advice – start a blog, maintain it, try to get your posts to show up in search engines for certain keywords, promote it with social media… Learn a little HTML and PHP coding. Get your hands dirty.

How much time off do you get/take?

Standard holidays (10/yr) + 3 weeks or so paid time off… and we do half-day fridays and have a telecommuting allowance as well.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

SEO (search engine optimization) has kind of a bad rap – but it’s based on a pretty dated view of what search engine marketers actually do.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’d like to live abroad at some point.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Search marketing is constantly changing. It’s an excellent training ground for where the broader advertising & marketing industry is going. You learn how to analyze & use data and you develop technical skills. You also learn how to learn and evolve. These traits are going to be a big part of the marketer’s toolbox in the future (it already is)

The post Add3 Principal – Ben Lloyd appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I run my own business called Shrieking Tree, which focuses on web site creation, print design, and film production.

How would you describe what you do?

It changes every day. A lot of the time I’m designing and writing code for web sites. Other days I’m creating posters or taking photos for book layouts. I’ve been doing a lot of film work lately, and that’s been very interesting because we generally have a small crew, which means I’ve learned how to do a lot of different jobs in that process — everything from writing and directing to editing and composing music. Sometimes I get to do a bit of acting and have found myself more than once covered in (and swallowing) buckets of fake blood. So, my work varies wildly from day to day.

What does your work entail?

For web work, it entails every step of the process, from discussing ideas with clients via email or phone, to pitching concepts for designs, to writing the actual code that makes up the finished site. For print projects, the process is similar, except sometimes I’m also running around taking photos. For film projects, it varies more. Depending on the project, I’m either the one in charge, pitching ideas and directing the process, or I’m working with existing ideas alongside a larger team, and adapting to whatever role they need me to fill.

What’s a typical work week like?

There is no typical work week! One of the things I like best about my job is that it’s often incredibly varied. I enjoy creating web sites, but it can get a bit dull when I’ve been writing pages worth of code for hours and hours. Thankfully just around the time one type of work is becoming tedious, I’ll be off to another type of project for a change of pace. I enjoy the time I get to spend outdoors working with people (and cameras) the best.

How did you get started?

When I was younger, I was homeschooled by my mom, who often encouraged me to teach myself the subjects she wasn’t very familiar with by reading the textbooks on my own. So I kind of developed a confidence from doing that which led me toward learning how to write code for web sites when I was 13. I really loved creative writing when I was younger (much as I do now), so I made a site to showcase all of my short stories. As I got older, I then took those skills and began using them on work projects with a friend of my mom’s. Eventually, I volunteered to revamp web sites for two of my favorite bands — Unwed Sailor and the Books — which led to my work being viewed by a larger audience. With the Books, I was very fortunate for a number of reasons. First, Nick Zammuto and Paul de Jong are two of the most creative people I’ve ever met, so their idea of what the site should be was really wild and open for collaborative input. I got to do a lot of fun animation for that project. Second, the Books were becoming very popular at that time, so a lot of eyes were on that site, and I was able to get a lot of jobs from that.

What do you like about what you do?

I love being able to work on a wide variety of creative projects. With the Books’ site, for example, I was able to work with Nick and Paul to create this really unique experience where visitors could jump around to several rooms in a virtual house and interact with objects in those rooms. Likewise, with film projects, I enjoy getting to create worlds where characters act much differently than they do in ours. I don’t want to spend 40 hours a week doing something I hate, so I try to integrate the things I love into my work. That way I can make money and have fun at the same time, and I can (hopefully) create something beautiful and entertaining for an audience — whether that’s on the web, or in a book, or in a video.

What do you dislike?

As with all jobs, there are times when it can be sort of a grind. You hit roadblocks or you make a mistake, and you have to figure out how to resolve those issues. Sometimes deadlines are incredibly tight and I have to work faster and for longer hours than I normally would. The disadvantage to this sort of work, unlike a 9-5 job, is that it’s more difficult to leave work behind (mentally) when your hours are over. Sometimes it’s tough to feel truly done for the day when you know you’ve got work problems that you could be trying to resolve.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

I’m paid on a per-job basis. Prospective clients tell us about their projects, and then we’ll write them a pitch with a list of features, and a price. If they like the price and features combination, we’ll move forward with the project.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Well, I never went to college for any of the work that I do now, so I’d say most of it was teaching myself through experience and learning as I worked. I’m much better at talking to clients and running meetings than I was originally. And obviously, there are a lot of web sites that offer free lessons on how to write code. Having an eye for design helps — and not just design in general, but for what’s currently popular. So much of what makes “good design” is a matter of taste, but if you can keep an eye on what sort of designs are being praised at present, you can use those ideas to help you with your pitches. Nearly everything I currently do for work, I learned from the Internet or just from trial and error as I’ve hammered away on different projects.

What is most challenging about what you do?

It can be very difficult to juggle a bunch of projects at once. Probably the most challenging thing I run into is making decisions about which projects to take, and which ones to leave behind. I have to draw the line somewhere in order to not drown in projects, and sometimes it’s really difficult to say “no”.

What is most rewarding?

It’s most rewarding when I feel like I’ve fully brought someone’s vision to life and surpassed their expectations. It’s really a wonderful thing to know that customers are fully satisfied — especially when my idea of what’s good for the project meshes with theirs.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Learn as much as you can from the massive amount of resources online. Invest in good, reliable equipment up front, and then just start creating things. Whether it’s for work or fun, in the beginning stages I can’t think of a better way to learn than by trying to create a bunch of stuff for show — whether that’s a web site, or a poster for a local event, or a short film. Get your hands dirty quickly, and put the abstract knowledge you’ve learned from tutorials to use.

How much time off do you get/take?

Very little!  Haha. Because my business is pretty small, I kind of have to be ready for work at any time. But sometimes there are dry periods where a job gets finished early or something, and I get to relax a bit on those days.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

People who aren’t familiar with the work often tend to think certain things are easier than they actually are. While this often happens in web projects, it happens far more frequently with film projects. I have a lot of short films online (about 20 at this point), and it’s amusing that some people think it’s a process of taking the camera out and just shooting whatever random stuff pops into our heads, and it’s done in a couple of hours. Of course, anyone who’s done that sort of work understands the detailed work involved in writing, scheduling actors and locations, capturing sound, shooting things from multiple angles, editing, and composing music. People will will assume something complicated can be done with little time and effort (and therefore cheaply), which can sometimes be frustrating.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’d like to be able to produce more film projects, because each one involves a wide range of skills that really keeps my work nice and varied. Now that we’ve made several short films, people are starting to see the quality of the work and more jobs are coming in. I hope I get to continue pushing into that field, because it can be a lot of fun.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Beyond trying to construct something of high quality in every project I’ve handed, I’m particularly interested in projects that are done for important causes. I’ve worked on raising money for homeless teens through a book called “From a Growing Community, Iowa’s Homeless Youth”, helping kids learn about different cultures with the book, “Zakery’s Bridge”, and educating people about the horrible issue of modern-day torture through an organization called Witness Against Torture. I feel like art (and work) is at its best when it’s married to something deeply important.

The post ShriekingTree.com Owner – Justin Norman appeared first on Job Shadow.

Justin Vacula gets JobShadowed about his role as a teacher’s assistant for a non-profit. You can find Justin on his website www.justinvacula.com and on his Twitter feed in the sidebar of this interview.  

What do you do for a living?

I work as a teacher’s assistant for a non-profit organization which hosts a program for adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities. The program teaches job readiness skills and includes sections on customer service, work/life balance, understanding rules and regulations in employee handbooks, job searching, and more. The program combines experience at internship sites and interactive learning in a classroom setting.

How would you describe what you do?

While in the classroom, I help students stay on task, assist with coursework, individually coach students when needed, and work to reduce or prevent any conflict which may occur. I also keep track of attendance, work with the classroom instructor, communicate with the program director, and encourage students to succeed. While at the internship site, I supervise students; I provide advice to accomplish tasks efficiently, address any concerns or problems, motivate students, and help students work through problems and concerns.

What’s a typical work week like?

I arrive at the internship site or the classroom early in the day before students arrive and the day’s activities begin. Before it is time to start the day’s activities, I check-in with students and talk about current events, daily life activities, and more. In class, the instructor sets an agenda which I facilitate. At the internship site, I work alongside students in my supervisor position. The work week includes – at this time – three days at the internship site and two days in the classroom for a total of about 36 hours a week.

How did you get started?

The non-profit organization which I currently work for posted a job offer and I responded. I became aware of this job offer through a person I had met from a community organization of which I am the co-organizer and spokesperson.

What do you like about what you do?

My job is meaningful in that I help adult students learn real-world skills which translate to success not only in the workplace, but also everyday life activities. I see significant progress within students as their self-esteem increases, they learn to resolve and prevent conflicts, and they cultivate a passion for learning and working.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

I have a bachelor’s degree in Psychology and Philosophy and am currently attending graduate studies in Mental Health Counseling. I had also worked as an internship in a Behavioral Health Facility. Some of my co-workers have experience working with populations of adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities.

What is most challenging about what you do?

This job requires a great deal of patience and understanding. Working with a population of adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities requires me to consider challenges others may face and not become frustrated or angry.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

I would advise others considering working in a classroom setting or with adults with intellectual and developmental disabilities to consider work/life balance and ‘leave work at work.’ After working with these students for over a year – and even after a few months – trusting relationships have been established and students have confided concerns not only related to the learning experience, but also in their personal lives.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

People may think that working with adult learners is a trivial task, but it is not. This job requires a high level of dedication, patience, tolerance, and vigilance. I act proactively in the classroom and on the internship site to prevent conflict and properly address conflict should it arise. I have to also understand that learners face special challenges and be aware of this in order to facilitate students in achieving success.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I hope to continue to work with this organization and future iterations of classes. As I progress in my graduate studies I can use information and techniques I learn to bolster my performance at work and help students.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Working with students, although it has its challenging moments (as may any job), is very rewarding and meaningful.

The post Teacher’s assistant/Graduate Student – Justin Vacula appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a Life Coach, Speaker & Licensed Professional Counselor/Marriage & Family Therapist.

How would you describe what you do?

I speak about matters of the heart, recovery after loss, & how to get along with other humans! I work with people to achieve their  life’s goals & to embrace their life to Enjoy Life Moore! I sit with people in their heartache & pain. I facilitate growth & transformation.

What does your work entail?

Speech writing & presentations, scheduling appointments, collecting money, talking with people about their life, active listening, giving feedback. Caring enough to confront! Saying no. Setting good boundaries. Modeling how to live a healthy & happ(ier) life. Encouragement. Insight. Processing. Getting peer input. Continuing education. Note taking/chart-keeping.

What’s a typical work week like?

I do a good amount of distance counseling via Skype, Viber & FaceTime or phone calls. I try to do all of those on a Tuesday. I go into the office Wednesdays & Thursdays. I use Monday as a flex day & always take Friday off. I see clients for 60, 75 or 90 min sessions. I take notes as we meet. Follow up to ensure payments. Reschedule apps that change. I spend lunch breaks everyday (at least 75 mins) either with a good friend or being quiet somewhere nearby to eat. I take breaks to walk, get outside, rest.

How did you get started?

I started in a psychiatric hospital & also under supervision in 2 private practices. After licensed, I relocated & worked for a ministry & a non profit. Then slowly opened my private office while I worked full time in a partial day program.

What do you like about what you do?

After 24 years in mental health I enjoy life coaching appointments, writing & speaking the most. Therapy is becoming g more & more taxing.

What do you dislike?

Arguing married couples. Chasing down a payment. Holding fast to my standards of business when someone asks for special favors. (Wearing all the hats.)

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I charge in increments of 60, 75 & 90 minutes – set fees. Pay by cash/check or credit card. I charge packaged fees for coaching and set fees for speaking. I require those packages paid upfront.

How much do you make?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         ____

$75k-100k       _x_

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:  things fluctuate on the economy. When it’s good, I’m where I’ve marked. When it’s leaner, it’s 50K- 75K.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

In the hospitals at first it was 10$/hr. Then in ministry 35K/yr. In private practice: started at less than 12K/year part time. It grew every year.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Masters degree, then licensed by the States.

What is most challenging about what you do?

The constant giving nature of the work. And I don’t really get to talk about myself. I feel alone often even though I’m seeing people all day. (I’m an extrovert.)

What is most rewarding?

Watching true transformation happen on a sustainable level for people or groups. Watching the lightbulb go on for someone. Laughing with a client over a funny story- we are all just people after all longing for connection.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Are you more interested in getting your own problems solved or in facilitating someone solving theirs. If the former, choose a different path. Are you willing to pay your dues? It would be the smartest thing you could do to spend at least 2 years working units in a psychiatric hospital.

How much time off do you get/take?

I choose the days off I take now that the business is self sustaining. I also go away on vacation 1 week in the fall & 10 days at Christmas. I take Fridays off & often most of Monday. This is all possible because I am self-employed.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That we fix people. That I’m getting rich because we charge so much. – (I’m just one person- so my time is very valuable)

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

To counsel less, coach more, speak & write even more than that.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

That it takes a lot of skill, wisdom & continued training to do this job. It’s worth what you are paid & you have to be comfortable asking for what you both need & want. If you are looking for a therapist: You need to choose your therapist after having met them at least twice & if you don’t trust them…ask for another referral. That who I am when I’m in my therapist role isn’t the totality of my existence.

The post Life Coach/Counselor – Kyna Moore appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a real estate agent (Realtor®) in the city of Los Angeles.

How would you describe what you do?

This is a mixture of sales, marketing, being internet savvy and  a social media guru, psychologist.  And you need the patience of Job.

What does your work entail?

In the old days agents used to start out by knocking on doors in a neighborhood they selected. They would drop off some kind of marketing material, usually a market report of some kind, a calendar or some other piece. They used to work their sphere of influence to see if someone was ready to buy or sell or knew of someone who was. Some used to advertise in the papers.  Now it is mostly online marketing and social networking.  People find me online.

The idea is to find people who want to sell or who want to buy.  Also, we are getting more into rentals, which can be a lucrative business in a city like Los Angeles.

What’s a typical work week like?

There is no typical work week in real estate. You may be extremely busy with listings or buyers and your week is taken up with those two activities.  However, you must not ignore your online presence because that is what is going to keep you in business.

I spend a lot of time blogging on my own website and networking on others.  Social networking is huge in this business.  You need to be found by people entering a particular search term.  That in itself can be a full time activity.

If I have buyers then I am making appointments to show them properties.  If I have a listing I am arranging for people to view the properties, and until the home is sold I will be holding an open house each Sunday.  If the properties go under contract then there is a lot of work to do.  Inspections have to be arranged for buyers. Negotiations continue between buyer and seller over repairs. There are certain requirements to be met by sellers, etc.  Again, all this while keeping up the blogging.

How did you get started?

Generally an agent will start out at a large brokerage with good training, which is what I did.  That is most important, and they will be mentored through the first few deals before going out on their own. I was heavy into door knocking each month and cold calling on the phone and that’s what got me going.  Nowadays, most of my business comes from my online presence.  Many agents in business for a while do get referrals.

What do you like about what you do?

I love the freedom and the social aspect of this business.  You meet so many people and it can be an exciting lifestyle.  And there is nothing like seeing a deal through from start to closing.  The buying and selling of a home is sometimes the largest transaction a person will make in their lives.

What do you dislike?

Living for the next deal.  This is an up and down business and it can be nerve wracking when you are in-between.  Also, you do meet some extremely difficult personalities which can make for some stressful situations.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

This is totally a commission-based business. Once you are established you need to shop around and find the best situation for your needs.  If you don’t need the office environment then find a brokerage that offers the best commission split. In most cases it does not matter whom you work for in this day and age.  You clients will hire YOU for what YOU can do for them.

How much do you make?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         ____

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

Every year varies.  Your salary is limitless.  You really should not be making less than $100,000 a year when the market is good.  Make sure you save for the years when it isn’t.

How much money did/do you make starting out?  

Not that much.  My best year was $130,000 and I am just an average agent.  The good ones make a ton more, and the not so good a lot less.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Just a real estate license.  You can attend a school or do an online course.  Then you take the exam which you have to renew every four years.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Being motivated and disciplined.  You are working for yourself, and often out of your home. This is not a 9:00 to 5:00 job and you really have to be available for your clients, especially on weekend when they are available.

What is most rewarding?

The fact that you are your own boss.  And there is nothing like finding a buyer their dream home or getting a home sold for a seller at a price they want.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Have some kind of cushion to keep you going for at least six months.  This is a commission-based industry.  Learn the business inside and out.  Be a social media expert and website/blog guru.  People are online looking for homes.  You need to be found.

How much time off do you get/take?

You can take as much time off as you like if you can find coverage.  I don’t like to take more than a couple of weeks off at a time, but you certainly can, especially when you are connected to the internet.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Our industry has a bad reputation, and there are certainly bad agents.  But overall we work hard for our money.  It is a very stressful business and people don’t know what goes on in the background.  We don’t just show homes, we live the entire process, sometimes for months on end and it can take a lot out of us.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I am at the end of my career, so would just like to continue on with the business I have had over the past few years and be able to remain in it as long as possible.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I think if you are an A-type personality, self-motivated and disciplined, then there is nothing like the rewards of a career in real estate.

The post Los Angeles Real Estate Agent – Jane Peters appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am the President and Founder of ‘Arizona Model and Actor Management, a Sag/Aftra licensed model and talent agency located in Scottsdale, Arizona.

How would you describe what you do?

We are a full service model and talent agency that covers all forms of film, television, modeling and voice overs for talent ages 1 and up.

What does your work entail?

My work is really two fold: there is the client end which includes consistently networking to expand my client base and add more clients to my agency in order to bring in additional projects and work for my talent. Then there is the talent side of my work which entails scouting talent and always being on the look out to search and bring on the best quality talent who are able to book the projects for the agency.

What’s a typical work week like?

In our industry, there is never a ‘typical’ work week!! If you like change and ‘going with the flow’ and you crave jobs with variety where every day is different, you’ll likely love the entertainment industry!  Although there are many ‘typical’ jobs that one may find (i.e.. an actor, a model, a voice over artist- within those jobs, there is so much variety in the environment with which you can work. For instance, you may work on a movie set, you can work on a television show or a web video, etc.., etc…).. Jobs often pop up at the last minute and many of our talent work flexible job schedules in order to accommodate being available to attend auditions, callbacks and shoots.

How did you get started?

I owned my own freelance writing business for 12 years and learned how to market myself as a writer. I’ve always done a lot of networking with every job that I had. While I was a freelance writer, I also taught fashion marketing at a local community college, where I learned about a position from a college that was available to run a small talent agency. I had NO experience in this area, except with running my own business as a writer. I interviewed and got the job!  I worked there 4 years, then decided to start my own model and talent agency.

What do you like about what you do?

I LOVE what I do!  Have you ever heard the expression, ‘If you love what you do, you’ll never work a day in your life?’ That is ‘my’ mantra!!!  I’ve had several ‘jobs’ before I hit on this career and never ‘loved’ any. One thing led to another and there were areas of each job that I liked but for some reason I knew it wasn’t ‘the’ job.  When I started working in this industry, I ‘knew’ this was it!  I LIVE, EAT and SLEEP this job!!!  That’s how you know that you like what you do!!!  When you don’t keep track of how many hours you work… you just do it!  You are doing it for the love of it:)

What do you dislike?

That’s an easy one. I am not a math person. I have always struggled with the ‘numbers’ part of my businesses. I know that’s my weak spot. So from the beginning I hired a book keeper who comes in to my business at regular intervals and checks my books.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Our agency is either compensated percentage wise (from our talent, as part of their contractual agreement), or we are also compensated by are clients, where we can bill them either a flat rate or an hourly rate.

How much do you make? (optional)

How much money did/do you make starting out? (optional)

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

I have a Bachelor’s Degree in Marketing (Fashion) and I do feel that a person in my area of expertise should be educated in order to deal not only with the talent, but also with the clients. A model and talent agency owner comes into contact daily with so many people coming from so many backgrounds, from all over the world. It is pivotal to be someone who can handle the public arena.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Most challenging.. An easy one… Dealing with people… People of all backgrounds, all types, all ages.  You never know who or what you will find in a person and you need to treat people fairly and well- basically treat people the way you want to be treated. I try to never forget that, no matter how challenging a person may be (and there are always challenging people in any business).

What is most rewarding?

The most rewarding thing about my business is when someone simply says, ‘Thank you’ to me. That’s it… just a thank you. Period. Thank you for doing a good job for me. I opted to open a small, ’boutique’ agency so that I would ‘know’ the talent that I work with better and be able to refer them to clients easier, and hopefully book more gigs. If that helps to book more work and fulfill a few dreams along the way, great! That’s what it’s all about!!  When one of my agency’s talent auditions, gets the callback and then books the gig… then they email me and say: ‘ Thank you Gail for supporting me and helping me through this process. I’m glad you were my agent’. That really makes my day!

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Don’t do it unless you plan on working nights, weekends, possibly holidays and having an EXTREMELY flexible schedule. Yes, it is most exciting and it can be glamorous (depending upon the area of the country where you live- you may be able to work occasionally with celebrities)… but don’t do it for that! Do it for the love of the industry!

How much time off do you get/take?

I’ve had the business 3 1/2 years and I’ve never taken more than 6 days in a row off together at one time. Typically its 3 days in a row kind of a time off. I carry my lap top EVERYWHERE and am ALWAYS on call for my casting directors when a last minute casting comes in. I simply cannot miss anything.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That it is always glamorous. Some of the jobs are simply not. Sometimes we book promotional gigs like contests and give aways at discount stores, etc… Not all jobs are glamorous and they don’t all pay a ton of money. Extra work also pays very little.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I would like to expand my agency into additional states.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

It is a 24/7 job if you want to do it effectively and successfully. Be honest with your clients and your talent. They will all respect you and you will grow as an agency, despite what the economic circumstances are. Our agency did and we are now the newest Sag/Aftra agency in the state of Arizona.

The post Model Agency President – Gail McCauley appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living? 

I teach literature and creative writing at Boston College.  And I write, mostly short stories and novels but also the occasional essay, book review, and poem.  My fourth novel was published in March 2013.  I’m in the early stages of a new project now.

How would you describe what you do?

I sit around and invent people and places.  I talk to myself in lots of different voices and travel to distant lands (sometimes for real, mostly in my head). And I help young people—my students—learn how to talk in different voices, as well as how to use language as a precise, elegant, powerful tool.  As a child, I spent as much time as I could immersed in elaborate imaginary worlds.  My “work” as an adult (often, happily, it feels more like play) allows me to drop down into rich, lush, peculiar worlds of my own invention.

What does your work entail?

Lots of sitting in front of a screen.  Some standing in front of a group of people.  Many pages turned.  Neck aches.  Pens.  Doubt.  Stubbornness.  Faith.  An unhealthy attachment to my laptop.  Asking questions of strangers.  Taking commas out and putting them back in.  Reading student work.  Reading classics.  Reading contemporary literature.  More sitting in front of a screen.

What’s a typical workweek like?  

During the semester, I usually go to campus (at Boston College, where I’ve taught for 21 years) three days a week.  I teach two courses a semester, serve on committees, contribute to the running of the department, and direct Honors Projects in creative writing.  That portion of my work life is full of people, conversation, deadlines, and a fair amount of structure.   I have a mailbox in the mailroom, my name on an office door, a weekly paycheck, health benefits.  Lively, smart colleagues and students.  It’s a social and intellectually stimulating job.

In an interview in the Paris Review (No. 94), the writer EL Doctorow said that writing is “like driving a car at night: you never see further than your headlights?, but you can make the whole trip that way.” That just about sums it up for me.

On the days that I don’t teach, I inhabit a much quieter world.   Usually on those days, I work at home.  Sometimes I spend my time preparing class for the next day.  Other times, I write, revise or do research for whatever project I’m working on at the time.  I have a study filled with books, with a view of the farm fields. After my daughters get on the school bus, I usually walk around the field with my dog, then come in and make a cup of tea.  In my study, the dog settled near my feet, I sit, mull, write, procrastinate, write some more.  I get up to snack, stretch, put laundry in the dryer.  Write.  Get the mail.  Pull a few weeks from the garden on way back in.  Read.  Check e-mail.  Write.  The kids come home from school, and we gobble down a snack, talk about our days, and venture forth.   In the summer or when I’m on sabbatical, every workday is a home day except for when I’m traveling for research or book tour.  I love to travel to far flung places almost as much as I love to come home and have gone, over the past few years, to India (where I taught a course called “Writing Out of Place” and brought my family along), Scotland (where I went alone to do research on a character) and Nicaragua (where I took a seminar with colleagues from Boston College).   I’m hoping Spain is next.

How did you get started?

I’ve been writing since I was a young child.  I majored in English and French in college, wrote short stories for my senior project, and interned during the summer at a few newspapers.  After college, I worked as a freelance journalist and temporary secretary for a year and then spent a year in France teaching high school.  I then got my MFA in creative writing at Washington University in St. Louis.  After that, I enrolled in a PhD program in literary studies at Cornell. When my first book, a short story collection, got accepted, I dropped out of the PhD program.  A year later, I got my first full-time teaching job, at Boston College. I’ve been there ever since.

What do you like about what you do?

I love how both writing and teaching are about getting under the surface of things, about finding or making meaning and looking closely at the world.  I love getting to work with words.  I’m grateful that my work is not tied to a time clock, even as sometimes the tasks seem to have no boundaries–and thus no end. I often work at night or on weekends, but I never work just to fill in hours or because someone else expects me to log time.  As long as I show up to teach and at meetings on campus, my time is my own.  There’s a lot of freedom in what I do.

What do you dislike?

Sometimes I dislike that same never-ending feeling—the sense that I could always be doing more. I feel, at times, as if I need to hoard and protect my time, though I try to resist that feeling.  I sometimes wish my work took me further afield into worlds I knew less about. I’ve tried to remedy this by figuring out ways to travel—teaching in India, for example—and by writing about things I didn’t initially know much about.  Time is sometimes a struggle—balancing writing, teaching, book publicity, raising kids—but as jobs go, I have both a writer-friendly and a family-friendly job, so I really can’t complain.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

I receive a salary for my work as a professor.  When a book is published, I receive an advance from the publisher, though I could not support myself on these advances and have purposefully set up my life so that I don’t depend on them, as I want to give the books the time they need and not be hemmed in by commercial or financial imperatives.  I write for the occasional magazine. Some of them pay reasonably well.  I also make little bits of money giving readings at universities or teaching at summer writers’ conferences.  I have gotten fellowships from the National Endowment for the Arts, the Massachusetts Cultural Council, and the Guggenheim Foundation.  These have allowed me to take off time from teaching to write.

How much do you make?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         ____

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ___X_

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

How much money did/do you make starting out?

I started out making just enough to scrape by, teaching part-time, being a freelance journalist, and working temporary secretarial jobs. When I started teaching full time, in 1993, my salary was around 30k, plus benefits.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

To teach on the tenure track as a creative writer at most universities, you need a Masters in Fine Arts (MFA) and/or a PhD.   Most full-time, tenure-line jobs teaching creative writing at the college level require you to have an MFA plus a published book.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Committing to a project over the long haul without knowing if it will work or not.  Working in the dark.  Keeping faith in a project over the course of years.  Starting again when you need to. Dismantling.  Letting go of a “finished” book can also be hard for me; the book is never quite like my vision of it.  Being a writer also means dealing with rejection. My first novel got turned down something like twenty times before it was published. You need to develop a thick skin and not spend too much time worrying about the opinions of outside world, even as you remain open to suggestions from the readers and editors you trust.

What is most rewarding?

The dream-state of being inside my own imagination, making things. I also find it rewarding to hear from readers who have really connected to the work.   As a teacher, the rewards are many: Helping students learn about their own creative processes; watching them grow as readers and writers; introducing them to books and authors who will nurture them and shape the way they see the world.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

I advise my own students who want to be writers to read, read read, and to develop a writing routine. I also talk to them about find paying work that engages them and feeds them, both literally and as writers.  In general, I don’t think it’s a good idea to go straight from college to graduate school. You need to get out in to the world, see things, travel, move through different worlds.  You also need to see if you’ll continue to write without someone giving you deadlines or a grade—if you have that internal engine, that doggedness, for it’s doggedness more than talent that makes people build their lives around the quite difficult, sometimes lonely practice of making up worlds through words.  I advise young writers to find community wherever they can—through joining a writers’ group, taking adult education classes, exchanging work over e-mail with friends.  I encourage them to take risks in their lives and in their writing.  Writing, like much art, demands a mix of fearless play and deep discipline.  There are lots of ways besides teaching that writers can support themselves, so if you have other interests, stay open to them.  I know writers who are also psychologists, doctors, computer programmers, goat farmers, grant writers. Teaching suits me well, but there are many other paths.

How much time off do you get/take?

My vacations from teaching are the same as my students’, which leaves the summers wide open.  But because I am usually working on a book, summer is when I really dive into writing, so I rarely have pure “time off,” though I do carve out a few weeks to just be with my family and relax. I also am lucky to have the occasional sabbatical or leave from teaching. I use these to write.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

People are often surprised by how long it takes to write a book (my last novel, The End of the Point, took me over seven years to write), as well by how little I know about where the story is going when I start out.  People are also sometimes surprised by how much I make up and how much research I do.  If I only wrote about myself and my own experience, I’d have run out of stories long ago.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I want to be able to keep doing what I love, to keep taking risks, to dare to write about things that feel hard for me either formally or in terms of subject matter (or both).   So too, in my teaching; I hope to keep inventing new courses, teaching abroad, venturing forth, changing.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

In an interview in the Paris Review (No. 94), the writer EL Doctorow said that writing is  “like driving a car at night: you never see further than your headlights?, but you can make the whole trip that way.”   That just about sums it up for me.

The post Author and Creative Writing Professor – Elizabeth Graver appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Freelance writer, editor, publisher for newspapers, magazines, websites, news services.

How would you describe what you do?

Independent reporter. I thrive on news.

What does your work entail?

Contributing to online and print publications in the areas of sports, business, travel and human interest.

What’s a typical work week like?

Home office, most days. I travel to sporting events and automotive events about 50 days per year.

How did you get started?

After working for three newspapers, the Contra Costa Times, Sacramento Bee and Monterey County Herald, I began to follow endurance sports, cycling, running and triathlon and mainstream sports, as a freelancer for USA Today, Associated Press and Reuters . . . as well as hometown newspapers, in 1987.

What do you like about what you do?

Independence. I travel the world .(more than 20 countries on assignment)

What do you dislike?

Asking editors for money when payment is late. Hustling for work.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

Per word, per day, per feature. It works in many different ways.

How much do you make?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ___x_ (depending upon year)

$50k-75K         __x__ (depending upon year)

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

The freelance world is changing rapidly and largely not for the better. Markets are tight and it takes an incredible amount of discipline to make a living.

How much money did/do you make starting out? 

Very little, less than $10,00 per year.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Journalism degree, the ability to write on deadline. Versatility.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Doing several jobs simultaneously . . . writing, editing, publishing, bookkeeping, etc.

What is most rewarding?

Self-employment.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Feast or famine is the reality of freelancing.

How much time off do you get/take?

Mostly working vacations.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Writing is easy.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

One good “anchor client.”

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I enjoy teaching about writing and freelancing and have done so via an e-book and at UC Davis Extension.

The post Freelance Writer – James Raia appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m currently working as the Operations Officer for the United Methodist Foundation of Indiana. In my role with the Foundation, my responsibilities have been focused within the organization’s Loan & Savings Ministry which works to provide churches with a reliable and affordable source of funding through stable investments made by individuals, churches, and agencies.

How would you describe what you do?

It’s difficult to grasp what I really do based off of my title, so it always helps to describe my position in more detail. My responsibilities are divided into three key areas: customer service, accounting/reporting, and administrative tasks. I would say that on average I spend fifty percent of my time on accounting and reporting, thirty-five percent on administrative tasks, and fifteen percent on customer service.

What does your work entail?

As I mentioned in the previous answer, most of my time is spent on accounting and reporting responsibilities. This involves processing customer transactions in our banking software, posting accounting entries in our accounting software, performing reconciliations between these software, and generating and analyzing various financial and operational reports. The time I spend on administrative tasks includes scanning files into our document management software and mailings statements and correspondence to our customers. The time I spend on customer service involves communicating with our customers by email or phone to assist in setting up accounts, answering any questions, and resolving other issues that may arise.

What’s a typical work week like?

In a typical week, I will be working at the office from 8:30am to 5:00pm each day. On occasion my hours will be longer due to meetings or time-sensitive projects, but this is a rare occurrence. Most of my time in the office is spent at my desk either completing work on my computer or speaking with customers over the phone.

How did you get started?

When I completed my undergraduate degree at the end of 2010, the job market in finance-related fields was still very limited due to the recession. I had always wanted to go into either banking or corporate finance, but there simply wasn’t any entry-level positions available at the time. I spent the first few months after graduation working in a call center while keeping an eye open on the fields that interested me. Looking back, it’s ironic that I ended up in the nonprofit sector because when I was in college that was the last place I would’ve wanted to end up. While working in the call center position, I was made aware of the opening for my position. It wasn’t exactly what I wanted, but my options were still very limited at the time, so I decided to give this position a try and see where it led me.

What do you like about what you do?

The most enjoyable part of my position is the financial analysis. I love working with numbers and having the opportunity to work on complex problems, and as a result really enjoy having the opportunity to develop and analyze various financial and operational reports for the organization.

What do you dislike?

Customer service is the only aspect of my position that I dislike. I’m often required to answer the same questions over and over and walk customers through basic transactions. As an introvert, this aspect of my position is mentally draining and can be very frustrating at times.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I started as hourly, but I was transitioned to salaried when I began to acquire more responsibilities. The total compensation package also includes a retirement match, vacation, insurance, and HSA contributions.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

My education is a Bachelor’s degree in Finance and a Master of Business Administration degree. However, only a Bachelor’s degree in either finance or accounting is required for this position.

What is most challenging about what you do?

The most challenging aspect of this position is the variety of tasks I’m responsible for on a daily basis. Communicating effectively with customers and then performing accounting and analyzation tasks requires two very different mindsets which can be near impossible to switch between.

What is most rewarding?

The most rewarding part of my position is knowing the good that is happening as a result. Thanks to our ministry and my work, churches are able to acquire the financing they need to improve their facilities and better further their mission. It’s gratifying to know that I’m playing a small part in this process.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

If anyone is interested in working within the nonprofit sector, I would highly recommend working for an organization with a mission you can support and that aligns with your values. It’s very rewarding to know that your work has a purpose and that it’s playing a part in furthering something that you support.

How much time off do you get/take?

I get two weeks of vacation each year and one personal day each month. It would be completely acceptable to take all of these days off, but I seldom use all of my days.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

I don’t recall coming across any misconceptions about my specific position, but I think there are some misconceptions about the nonprofit sector in general. One that I often hear is about the working conditions in nonprofits. Many people assume that nonprofits are terrible to work for because they are focused on their mission and not on their employees, but I have found this to not be true in my experience.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

At this point in my career, I don’t have any concrete goals in my mind for the future. This sector, and the workplace in general, is constantly changing, and I’d hate to lock myself into a predetermined career path. In the short to intermediate future my goal is to be in a position that maximizes my strengths, minimizes my weaknesses, and gives me the opportunity to work for an organization I support. I have enjoyed my time in the nonprofit sector and would like to continue on that path if possible, but at the same time, there are plenty of for-profit organizations doing great work as well.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

One final thing I would share is that working for a nonprofit can be a great learning opportunity. Both my undergraduate and graduate studies focused heavily on a for-profit perspective, so learning business from a nonprofit perspective first-hand has been a great way to round out my education and become more knowledgeable about business. Even if it’s only for a few years, I would definitely recommend working in the nonprofit sector to anyone who is interested.

The post Operations Officer United Methodist Foundation – Chris Jacobs appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a real estate investor, President and founder of many companies from real estate brokerage, to
the leading education company in the northeast, and president of a large management company. I am
a best selling author of 6 books.

How would you describe what you do?

I am passionate about teaching people how to buy real estate. Having purchased over 7000 units
and with over 300 employees working for me in various companies, teaching has always been a passion
of mine.

Of special interest is to help people to reach their goals and teach them the steps to reaching those
goals.

Marketing is one of my passions, and realizing the full effects of correct marketing is very rewarding.

What does your work entail?

My work is to maintain and grow my education company and provide a great working environment for my staff.

What’s a typical work week like?

My day starts out very early in the morning. I have conditioned myself to only open emails certain
times of the day.  I work on tasks that must be completed by the end of the week, so I will put together my top five things I want to complete and go about the steps to making it happen.

How did you get started?

I was a singer in a rock band.  I then went on to owning a large landscaping company, which was lucrative, but only in the spring summer and part of the fall.  It was very seasonal coming from the northeast.

I started to do clean outs for people who were flipping properties, and then went to Home Depot University and learned how do sling a hammer and do what was necessary to flip some small multi family properties.

I bought up the city of Brockton, and when the time was right, sold some of them and bought multi-family properties in emerging markets. I noticed when I bought property in Brockton it was very low and inventory was high, but started to sell the properties when inventory got very low and the prices were very high.

Then my emerging real estate market ideas really exploded and I was able to do a bunch of 1031 exchanges in emerging markets buying larger properties.

What do you like about what you do?

The best part of my position is I have changed many lives, I have given many people hope for their
future. I have given many people a safe place to live and work.

What do you dislike?

I wish there were more of me so I can take advantage of the many opportunities around me. My time is
limited, and family is the most important thing to me.  I do not like missing any family obligations.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I make money with everything I do. I get compensated by closing multi family properties, flipping properties, coaching people, investments, commodities, gold, silver, oil and gas.  I am an entrepreneur.

How much do you make?
$0-25,000 ____
$25k-$35k ____
$50k-75K ____
$75k-100k ____
$100-$200k ____
$200k-$300k ____
$300k+ ____

Additional comments: Short and sweet in one deal, one acquisition fee, was in the range of $650K, I did it and you can do it too. How much money I make doesn’t matter, it is how much money can you make that counts.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

I started out with credit cards.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

I have constantly educated myself throughout the years.  If it will improve my business and I don’t know
it, then I will go and get educated. I went to Northeastern University, studied economics, got a BA
but then went on to the Harvard Business and got my degree. It was a goal I wanted to achieve, and now I am teaching my students what I have learned.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Taking action, getting over the fear of a mistake, building a team.

What is most rewarding?

Hearing of my students successes, helping others, changing lives, and making a difference.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Don’t wait, do it now.

How much time off do you get/take?

As much as I want.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Most people are stuck, they don’t think they can do it. I am no different than they are. I just took action.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

One of my goals is to build orphanage in Ghana and help under priviledged people.
I have traveled to Africa and met with the King and want to help and teach them.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Get educated, because once you have the knowledge and the confidence it will set you free to explode your wealth.

The post Real Estate Investor – Dave Lindahl appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m the website editor and a contributing writer at Ski Racing Magazine (skiracing.com) who has also published a non-fiction book about the unusual luck that has befallen me during travels around the world titled Life Gives Me Lemons: Adventures in Bad Luck and Bold Misfortune.

How would you describe what you do?

I’m a sports journalist who writes, edits, shoots photographs, interviews, rubs elbows, and gets to the bottom of stories that will engage the general public. 

What does your work entail?

I wake up every day and either write or edit someone else’s writing before sourcing complementary photos and videos and posting those completed articles to our website. I promote our content to a wide readership as well as potential advertisers through social media, phone calls, and email. On really cool days, I get to wake up extra early in foreign countries and go to World Cup ski races.

What’s a typical work week like?

In the winter, typical can be anything from flying to Europe and tracking down international ski racing stars to driving around New England interviewing NCAA athletes. The summer is a bit more relaxed, but I still find myself on snowfields in Oregon or at conditioning camps in Vermont.

How did you get started?

I was an athletic coach who started writing freelance articles on the side, and it snowballed from there.

What do you like about what you do?

I appreciate that I have been able to combine two passions, writing and sports, into my profession. When I look around, it seems like there are very few people who are able to pull that off while still earning a living.

What do you dislike?

When I started out writing, I had to spend a few years proving myself to publishers and editors and accepting very low pay for what I brought to the table. Hard work paid off, but it took longer than I imagined it would.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

I’m paid a yearly salary now, but I started out in the industry as a freelancer who was paid per article and/or on contract.

How much do you make as a website editor?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$35k-$50k        __X_

$50k-75K         ____

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

How much money did/do you make starting out?  

When I first started as a freelance sportswriter, I made anywhere from $75-$250 per 700-1000 word article, when I got paid. I had to be willing to write some pieces for free just to get exposure at the very beginning.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

A typical editor or writer has an undergraduate degree in journalism, English, or media studies. I majored in history in undergrad and then obtained a master’s degree with a creative writing concentration in grad school. Aside from being a competent writer, the most important skill sets for journalism these days are technology-based. Can you manage a platform-enabled website? Do you know how to use a DSLR camera? Can you edit video? I was never taught how to do any of these things in a classroom, but I was able to figure them out when my job depended on it.

What is most challenging about what you do?

I travel. A lot. Things don’t always go smoothly, so I need to be able to roll with a lot of last minute changes.

What is most rewarding?

When someone tells me they enjoyed reading an article I wrote, or better yet, learned something from it, that is one of the most rewarding things I can hear.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Study math and get a job in finance if you want to eat well. But if you want to collect unforgettable life experiences and can handle eating peanut butter and jelly sandwiches for a month straight, pursue journalism.

How much time off do you get/take?

I’m never really off since news doesn’t sleep, but covering a mostly seasonal sport means I have more free time in the summer.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Everyone always thinks I’m going on vacation because I travel with ski equipment. It also bothers me when people approach me while I’m writing on a laptop in a ski lodge and say things like, “Leave your work at home!” That happens more frequently than you might imagine. People just have a very narrow view of workspaces.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Right now I’m focused on making skiracing.com the most highly-trafficked site for snowsports competition news while selling as many copies of my book as I can. If that leads to landing an agent and securing more book contracts in the future, I certainly wouldn’t be opposed.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

The writer is never the famous person in the interview; humility goes a long way.

The post Web Editor of SkiRacing.com – Christine Feehan appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a Chef, Consultant, Brand Ambassador, Event Producer and manage my own line of Cookbooks, Artisinal Sauces & Rubs called Dave’s Homemade. So yes, I wear many hats and don’t sleep that often.

How would you describe what you do?

Well it’s very unique and I’ve set myself up that way. I never really liked running other people’s restaurants it’s boring and not my passion- so , I stepped out of that world and I’ve created jobs that I love doing. So, when I’m not consulting for restaurants, then I might be teaching classes at The Culinary Loft, FCI or Stonewall Kitchen and when I’m not doing that I’m representing brands like The Perfect Puree or Ultimat Vodka creating recipes for them or producing events for Johnnie Walker. And when I’m not working on those projects then I am marketing and promoting my own brand, Dave’s Homemade or working with organizations like Let it Flow (I’m on the board) or Impact Network to bring about awareness or help them raise money through various events.

What does your work entail?

It really is a bit of everything from recipe creation to cooking on the kitchen side and all very hands-on as I do all my cooking for every event. On the business side, it’s meetings, calls and putting projects together and negotiating contracts and making things happen for the client. Then in my free time it’s all about networking and following up on all my leads and with folks that I meet out there in order to further the growth of me and my brand.

What’s a typical work week like?

I may fly out of town to cook a dinner for 10 in Dallas and then back in NYC to run a cocktail party for 80 then teach a cooking class dinner party for 25 at The Culinary Loft and have a conference call with London about restaurant consulting for a new hotel, then meet a production company about a new show idea with me as the host, then work on the menu for a new bar/restaurant across the street from my pad in LIC. (this is actually my week this week as I write this out for you, so, yes it’s true and that’s a real week for me).

How did you get started?

My path was unique in that I actually was in the technology sector right out of college and was a recruiter building the infrastructure for firms like AOL, Broadcom, Ericsson and many others and then ran my own firm in the same industry for 5 years before the market crash of 2000. Then, I went back to school- culinary this time around and started my own catering company in the middle of the program and then right into an exec chef role in a small bistro in LA, CA and then Top Chef the move to NYC and then it’s just been craziness and mayhem ever since. All self made and self created by working hard and hustling to create what I want out of life and this industry of food.

What do you like about what you do?

I love the diversity and I think it’s important for anyone pursuing a job in food to realize that there are so many things you can do BESIDES running a restaurant. That is one of the most difficult jobs out there and I respect those who do it but it is NOT for me. So, as you look ahead to build your career try various roles out there and see what you enjoy doing. You do not have to follow the pack and do what everyone else does. If you follow your passion and your dream things may eventually come through for you. It’s not going to happen magically or overnight or maybe it will but I have been busting my hump the last 8 years in NYC to get where I am today and I have another 8 years of busting to keep it all going. I love the challenge, the highs and lows and never knowing where the next great project or deal will come from but as long as I’m out there working and hustling then good things do come back and I believe the same can happen for you but YOU HAVE TO WORK HARD.

What do you dislike?

I dislike some of the same things that I love. As a freelancer and entrepreneur, you never know what will come next ? Will it work out ?

There are many days of doubt and uncertainty but they are overshadowed by the days when things work in your favor. It’s like gambling in Vegas and I’m a big gambler.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I am paid in various ways based on the project, event or program that I am working on or producing. So, with my untraditional job comes an untraditional pay scale but all monies are negotiated up front with signed contracts to protect both parties. The days of getting worked over by crooked restaurant owners are over and I lost several thousands of dollars in those days. But I learned from those mistakes and they do not carry over into my current life and I encourage you to always get everything in writing. The food world is full of con artists and clowns that will take advantage of you every step of the way. So protect yourself because you will always have your best interest at heart.

How much do you make?
$0-25,000 ____
$25k-$35k ____
$50k-75K ____
$75k-100k ____
$100-$200k ____XX
$200k-$300k ____
$300k+ ____

Additional comments:

I’m doing okay but there is always more money to be made and with Dave’s Homemade and all of my new relationships and partnerships. I’m hoping to capture money without having to do as much work as the line starts to take off online this fall with Igourmet, Amazon and OpenSky and then moving to brick and mortar stores.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

Well since I was working 2-3 jobs and now working even more jobs I think I was doing maybe $60-$75k but I was not the norm and a major worker bee- catering, freelance and my own holiday gift basket business.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Well I have a BA Degree along with a Culinary Degree and a whole lot of street smarts from my other career and now from my time in NYC.

What is most challenging about what you do?

It’s all exciting and challenging.  I love that I am pursuing my passion and growing my business and my brand and it’s not just challenging but rewarding, most of the time.

What is most rewarding?

I love cooking for people, teaching people to cook, eating and drinking wine with friends and co-workers and just really enjoying life since it’s food and cooking and it should be fun and put a smile on everyone’s face.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

You better love food and hard work otherwise it’s not gonna work for ya. I eat , sleep and breathe food, wine and spirits and I think what’s helped me to get this far.

How much time off do you get/take?

It varies but usually the first quarter of each year is a slower time, so I try to travel then and enjoy the sunny beaches and tequilas in Cancun.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That because I don’t run a restaurant I’m not successful (so not true as I said before there are more opportunities in the culinary world then just restaurant chefs) or that I have it all made and it’s super easy just because I was on a television show.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Build my brand, my own cooking show (NOT a stupid one) , make more money and just be able to be happy at the end of the day and to share it all with my close friends and family.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

You tell me what else would you like to know ? feel free to reach out to me at chefdavemartin@yahoo.com if you have other questions you’d like to ask. Remember the world is you oyster but it’s up to you to make it happen. …unless you’re just really lucky.

The post Professional Chef – Dave Martin appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living? 

I am a board-certified music therapist who became a professor. I used to do more clinical work, using music to work with people with special needs, all ages and abilities. Now I mainly teach students how to do that, supervise their real-life experiences working with clients during the school year, and research what techniques and approaches work better for music therapists.

What does your work entail?

Most of my work is outside of the classroom, like any college student, really. We may get together twice a week for 50 minutes each (a 2 credit course), but I’m prepping a lecture, experience, or assessment (quiz or test) or grading for a few hours outside of that class. Most professors have teaching as a majority of their contract, but that also includes doing music therapy sessions in the community for free so students can observe and eventually learn to do some of the techniques they see me use with clients/patients. The rest of the time, I am reading research, preparing or conducting a research study, or serving on committees for the university or the American Music Therapy Association at the national or regional level.

What’s a typical work week like?

I like academia because every week is different and flexible. I don’t have to punch in and out on a clock. Obviously, class times are set, and times to see clients are pretty well set in the fall and spring semesters. But I can rearrange meetings outside of those set times, read research whenever I can, write papers, do grading, etc. whenever it fits my schedule, so there is no 9-5 feel to it.

How did you get started?

I was a music performance major and psychology minor. Google “music” and “psychology” and you’ll inevitably see “music therapy” pop up, and the more I learned about it, the more I felt like I could music to do some tangible good for other people who had special needs.

What do you like about what you do?

I see the best potential of people. Someone with Alzheimer’s disease might spend most of their day confused and agitated, but during a music therapy session they can really seem alive again. Kids with autism can be frantic, disengaged, or inattentive, but in music therapy sessions, I can see what they are really capable of.

What do you dislike?

Some people can dismiss the term “music therapy” out of hand, like a foo-foo aromatherapy or rock therapy or any of the thousand other things companies market as “therapy” to make money. It’s not pseudo-science, it’s a social science with a research base.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

As a professor, I’m paid by the university, of course. However, I worked for health care facilities and school districts as a salaried employee or contract worker. However, music therapists may also receive payment from insurance companies who cover individuals that we work with.

How much do you make? 

Music therapy salaries vary by placement. If you work in a school district, you make money like a teacher does: less salary, more benefits, summers off. Work in a hospital, make more money, less benefits, less off time.

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         _x___

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         ____

Additional comments:

How much money did/do you make starting out?   

About $37,000 in year one as a first year music therapist at a nursing home.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Music therapy is a bachelor’s degree entry level profession. Usually four years of coursework, half a year of internship, and passing a board certification exam (www.cbmt.com).

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Shadow a few music therapists and see what their days might be like. Find out what motivates you about working with people with special needs, and volunteer to do that in some capacity while in high school.

How much time off do you get/take?

See above per salaries.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do? 

We conduct drum circles only, that we do therapy only with musicians, or that we just do singalongs to help people feel better.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’d like the profession to double in size, be reimbursed and accepted like physical and occupational therapies are, and I’d personally hope my research can be used to improve many people’s lives.

The post Music Therapist – Andrew Knight appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living? 

I run an editorial services business.

How would you describe what you do?

Simply put, I edit, write, market, and manage for clients. I edit copy for lots of clients, most of whom are businesses. Mostly I copyedit, which entails correcting for grammar, usage, spelling, punctuation, style, and content (awkward constructions, jargon, transitions, etc.). I also write about language and editing for a couple of clients, the most visible of which is Copyediting, a newsletter and online resource for copyeditors. I do social media marketing for myself and a couple of clients and manage freelancers and projects for Copyediting. I also teach copyediting and social media online for UC San Diego, and I speak at events.
What does your work entail?

When I’m editing, I’m reviewing the text several times for the errors I’ve been asked to correct, such as grammar and usage. It means I have to know a lot about English and, just as importantly, how it works. But I also have to know how to look things up. No one can remember everything or know everything. And even when we think we know it, we can often be wrong. So being willing to look things up repeatedly is important.

As an editor, I also negotiate a lot. It’s not my manuscript, and the author may not say things the way I would. That’s OK. It’s not my name on the manuscript. But sometimes I have to help a writer understand why I made the changes I did or coach them through how (and why) to rewrite something. Being edited is like being graded. As an editor, I need to be sensitive to the author’s feelings while still being honest about the work.

What’s a typical work week like?

The lovely thing about running your own business, about being a freelancer, is that you have more control over your schedule. I tend to start early in the morning and stop for periods during the day. I end my day at the end of the traditional workday. Others I know are night owls and work at night. It’s really what works for you–as long as you meet deadlines and are available to clients when they need you.

In a given week, I will edit several documents of varying lengths or edit one book-length manuscript. But I’ve built my client list in a way that means I’m juggling several clients’ projects a week, sometimes a day. I like the variety it gives me, but I have to be a good time manager to make it work.

It’s good to have other activities mixed in with editing. No one can edit for 8 hours straight; you start missing even the most basic errors after a while. If editing is all you do, make sure you take frequent breaks.

I will plan my week’s activities at the beginning of the week and plan daily activities each day. I prioritize tasks based on deadlines and my work routine. The structure helps ensure I meet all my deadlines. You won’t work as an editor long if you don’t meet deadlines.

How did you get started?

I studied literature in college and at that time, all I knew is that I wanted to keep reading. I was good at grammar and writing, and I wanted to keep doing those things. My adviser suggested editing and helped my get my first job out of college, which was proofreading direct mail (aka junk mail) for nonprofits. From there, every time I got bored, I looked for more challenges.

What do you like about what you do?

I love that I’m paid to essentially read all day. I love learning new things, which I get to do every time I take up a new manuscript. I like finding answers to problems, and I enjoy researching those answers. It’s satisfying to see how a manuscript is improved by these small, usually invisible changes that I’ve made. It’s a great feeling when the author appreciates those changes too.
What do you dislike?

The feast-and-famine cycle that freelancing can bring. I work hard to fill my list with clients who can offer me repeat work to help prevent that. I also stay on a tight budget that includes saving money so that I can get through lean times. And I’m constantly marketing, even when I have a full client list.

Clients who don’t respect the fact that I am a business owner. Authors can be passionate about their work, as well they should be. I can be passionate about it, too, but I work to make a living. I can’t work for free. I’m willing to negotiate, but I have my bottom line, just like my clients do. Clients who want something for nothing are not ones I’ll work with.

Clients who don’t respect the fact that I’m a human being. It’s not easy to be edited. One of the best things about being a writer as well is that I’ve had my work edited. It’s humbling. It’s fine to disagree with your editor. It’s fine to reject the changes I’ve made. That’s the author’s right. It’s not OK to verbally abuse me or otherwise treat me unprofessionally. I’ve been lucky that no one’s treated me that way to date, but I have plenty of colleagues who have been. It’s never OK to be treated as less than human, and I am always willing to walk away from a project in which I’m treated less than professionally. (That’s another reason to make sure you always have some savings!)

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Clients pay me to edit, write, manage, and market. I do a lot of tasks to run my business that don’t pay (marketing myself, getting more training, invoicing clients, filing, etc.), but I’m paid only for what I do for my clients. So those billable hours have to cover my nonbillable time as well.

I work with my clients to determine the best pay structure for them. I will do project rates and per-piece rates (e.g., per page, per word, per chapter), which allows clients to know exactly how much they’ll spend. I will also charge an hourly rate; this works well for clients who have an upredictable stream of work to send me.

As a freelancer, I don’t earn bonuses or commissions. Nor will I work for a share of profits (too risky for my taste). However, having a strict budget means I know how much money I need to make each month. After I’ve paid myself and the taxman, anything left over is also mine. My financial adviser calls it “profit,” but I prefer to think of it as capital for running or growing my business.

How much do you make?

$0-25,000 ____

$25k-$35k ____

$50k-75K ___

$75k-100k ____

$100-$200k ____

$200k-$300k ____

$300k+ ____

Additional comments:

I earn a little more than what my father would call “a living wage.” I no longer need a second job, and I can take vacation time and time off for my family. It took me about three years to earn what I had earned at my previous full-time job, where I’d been for 10 years.
How much money you make from editing can vary greatly from industry to industry. Traditional book publishers (esp. academic publishers) and media companies (esp. newspapers) pay notoriously low wages. The editing can be easy (and, as a result, faster) in book publishing. Big companies who hire editors for their marketing or in-house publishing departments pay better. So do niche publishers who need editors with special skills, such as editing ESL copy or medical copy.

How much money you make as a freelancer can vary greatly as well. Not only does it matter which industry you work in but also how you charge. When you charge hourly, you only have so many hours to sell. When you charge by the project or project piece, you can profit from being a fast (but still accurate) editor. Technology offers lots of ways to be more efficient and, thus, faster. Having subject matter expertise can help you be a better editor and can mean a higher pay rate because you offer more to the client.

The Editorial Freelancers Association maintains a chart of standard rates their members charge: http://www.the-efa.org/res/rates.php. That can be a good starting point for setting your own rates.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

My first year freelancing, I probably made less than half my previous salary. I spent more time marketing myself in various ways than actually earning money. It was really important for me to have a savings account to help through those lean times; it’s your business’s start-up capital. I was also willing to work nights and weekends at the mall to bridge the gap. But I kept at it and made more money each year.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

A strong, thorough knowledge of English grammar, usage, and spelling rules is required, as is a working knowledge of a common style guide (that doesn’t mean you memorized the book). Choose a style guide that your desired industry uses. Most media outlets use the AP Stylebook or something similar (e.g., The Wall Street Journal and The New York Times have their own style guides, but they’re based on AP). For books, try The Chicago Manual of Style. For medical texts, The AMA Manual of Style.

Also be familiar with at least one dictionary, again preferably the one your desired industry uses. The AP and other media outlets tend to like Webster’s New World Dictionary, while Chicago and other book-related styles prefer Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate.

Any subject matter knowledge is a real boon for an editor. If you’ve got a degree in biology and have the other skills required for editing, editing biology manuscripts (books, journal articles, etc.) would be a great choice. Hiring editors love a copyeditor with subject matter expertise.

To get the training necessary to be a copyeditor is tougher. There is no formal training required to be a copyeditor, nor are there any industry standards nor licensing/accreditation board, although many would like there to be one.

A college degree is an excellent start, even if it’s not in English or communications (though those are preferable). If your degree is in something else, that could help make you a subject matter expert.

With or without a degree in English, you need to be trained to edit: what to look for, how to fix things, how to explain things to authors, and so forth. Editing is a craft, much like writing. You have to be shown what to do, but it takes practice and feedback to master it. I wrote a three-part series for Copyediting on how individuals can get training to be a copyeditor: http://www.copyediting.com/tip-week-copyeditor-training-part-1. The best way is still to have someone read and critique your edits, but few companies hire untrained editors and then train them anymore.

What is most challenging about what you do?

In the beginning it was finding work. These days, it’s balancing my work with my private life. I enjoy my work and it’s a part of who I am, but it’s only a part. I work to live, not live to work.

What is most rewarding?

That’s a tough one. It’s very rewarding to have written something that helps someone else or to have improved a manuscript so that the author loves it even more. But it’s also rewarding to know that I’m running my own business and earning a living doing it.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Read everything. Read the kind of texts you want to edit. Read about current events, pop culture, and historical events (references pop up everywhere). Read things you enjoy. Read good writing and try to understand what makes it good. Read bad writing and try to understand what makes it bad. Keep reading.

How much time off do you get/take?

When I first started my business, I didn’t take much time off. Just weekends and holidays. But I didn’t have a full list of clients, either, so there was downtime. And although I tried to make the most of it by marketing myself, I also took care of myself as well. A coffee with a friend, a walk with my family, something away from work. There are no paid sickdays for freelancers!

These days, I make enough money to calculate vacation time into the equation. I take 2-3 weeks a year, plus long weekends and holiday weekends. It’s really important to find a way to take time off. No matter what you do or how much you love it, if you don’t take a break, you’ll burn out.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

So many clients come to editors saying “I need this proofread” when what they really need is a copyedit or, sometimes, a major rewrite. It’s great to work with clients who understand publishing, but not all do. You have to educate them about what is involved with the different levels of editing–from developmental, which helps with rewrites and planning, all the way down to proofreading, which is looking for typos and big errors.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

A smaller goal is to write a usage handbook that covers rules that aren’t rules, sometimes known as zombie rules. Rules like “Don’t split an infinitive.” That’s a completely bogus rule created to make English work like Latin. In English the modifier goes next to the word it modifies. I’ve started researching the book and hope to publish it within the next year.

A bigger goal is to expand my business by taking on other freelance editors and writers on a contract basis. I enjoy managing and coaching people, and I like the idea of helping others find work and being someone who will treat them fairly. I’ve just assigned my first subcontract, so we’ll see where that goes.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

There’s this idea that publishing is dying and editors are dying with it. This is simply not true. Publishing is changing–massively–and editing is changing with it.

In some cases, editors are taking on new responsibilities alongside the old. That’s good for job security.

In other cases, people and companies who don’t think of themselves as publishers and who know nothing about publishing are suddenly putting out text and other media for public consumption. They need training in how publishing works: what all the steps are, why they’re important, and how to find the best people to do those steps. Editors who can help their clients understand that will be more successful.

The post Editorial Services Business Owner – Erin Brenner appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Up until 2012 I was primarily a freelance coach for endurance athletes (triathletes, cyclists, mountain bikers,  runners), but I also wrote books (working on #14 now), consulted with the sporting goods industry, spoke at seminars, and provided camps for athletes primarily in Europe. Last year I retired from coaching after 32 years.

How would you describe what you do?

Now I do only the other things listed above. I also am a co-founder and part owner of two businesses – TrainingPeaks.com and TrainingBible Coaching.  Both of these provide services to the endurance athlete market. My role in each of these is rather minor now. My partners run the businesses.  I am just an ornament in them these days.

What does your work entail?

Right now it involves working only when I want to. I do 2 seminars monthly in the winter months, put on 1 or 2 European camps annually, consult on topics I’m interested in, and write books when motivated to learn more (which is nearly all the time).

What’s a typical work week like?

There is no typical work week. Other than training every morning (I still race) and golf every afternoon. When I was in the early stages of my coaching career I would start working at 6am and stop at 9pm with breaks for training.

How did you get started?

I owned a running store in 1980 which became the first triathlon store in the world (I suspect) in 1984 after I bought the bike store next door and took down the wall between them.  Customers would come to the store make a purchase and also find out how to train for a race (they knew I had a masters degree in exercise science and raced). I soon discovered that I enjoyed coaching them more than retail.  So in 1987 I sold the  stores (I now also had a second) and starting coaching. But I had to find a day job until the coaching could pay the bills. That took 5 years. Then I was doing it full time.

What do you like about what you do?

Spending time with athletes of all abilities. They are some of the nicest people on the planet – healthy, goal-oriented, happy, and motivated.

What do you dislike?

The only downside of when I was coaching was that there was never a vacation from it.  The client needs support every day, 24/7/365.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

For coaching I was paid a  monthly fee of $1500 per client.

How much do you make?  

$0-25,000       ____

$25k-$35k       ____

$50k-75K         ____

$75k-100k       ____

$100-$200k    ____

$200k-$300k  ____

$300k+         __X__

Additional comments:

This is for all income streams listed above.

How much money did/do you make starting out?  

When I first started coaching it was $10/week. It then went to $79/month in the late ’80s. My fee continued to rise steadily  after that..

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

I  have a masters in exercise science, but I’ve learned more (99.9%) of  what I know and apply since I graduated. I have been reading research studies daily since the late ’80s. Never let school get in the way of your education.

What is most challenging about what you do?

It the early years it was marketing my services. Freelance coaching was unheard of then. That remained the biggest challenge until the late ’90s. Then it became maintaining contact with my clients. That’s how TrainingPeaks.com came to be.

What is most rewarding?

The success of my clients, especially those who are new to the sport and accomplishing things they at one time thought were impossible for them..

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Get a coaching license from your sport’s federation and then continue to grow as a coach.  Keep your eyes and ears open to what other coaches and athletes are doing that’s successful.

How much time off do you get/take?

Back when I was coaching full time there was never a day off.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That all coaches work for schools and that if you don’t then you aren’t successful and not making any money.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I intend to continue growing my companies. TrainingPeaks.com now has about 50 full-time employees and TTrainingBible Coaching has about 30 U.S. coaches and another office in the U.K. with 5 coaches. I  have also started a third business recently which I am exited about even though it is in the very stages.  It has great potential. I am also working on my 14th book.  This will take me a year or so to finish. I have several others in the back of my mind as well. So little time, so much fun.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Starting is hard work, but if you do a good job it can pay off with the rewards of money and freedom later in life.

The post Endurance Coach and Entrepreneur – Joe Friel appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a contemporary mixed-media artist.

How would you describe what you do?

Both creating original, compelling art as well as running the business of art. I balance my time in the studio with the time required to market and promote myself and my work, exhibit in shows and events, and expand my reach as an artist. This can be very time-consuiming, but there is no way around it. One thing have learned; the more you do it, the better you get at it.

What does your work entail?

When painting or creating sculpture – although most of my work at this time is two-dimensioinal – it requires the mind-prep for the size and feeling of the work; the colors and feel I am working intuitively on. I think everything in your life affects what you express on a canvas. Sometimes you can have the perfect idea and the perfect plan – and see it clearly in your mind. Yet in the execution almost everything changes – at least for me – because everything I create is a bit new from the last. There are some pieces that resemble each other, and if someone loves a piece that is sold I can make another piece similar to their size and specifications. I love working on commission with designers and private clients. But in my studio I am always pushing myself to do something new and different – new and different for me. I don’t keep repeating the same thing.
The continuing thread of my work is the pleasure of working with the form of the horse – a favorite of mine. He seems to be able to embody whatever it is I want to say.

What’s a typical work week like?

Flexible. Generally I do my business work – emails, contacts, photo work, entry to shows, contact, etc – in the a.m., and leave the p.m. for being in the studio. My work day can start at 6 a.m. or 10 a.m., and go to 6 p.m. or 10 p.m.  There is no set time. When in process on a piece with a deadline, you go until it is done. This lifestyle works for me, though it may not be for everyone. You have to be self-regulating, self-starting, self-reliant. You are your own boss of your own company, and I never forget that.  Professionalism and courtesy are key.

How did you get started?

I have drawn and painted horses my entire life.  I have also worked in real estate and publishing during my life. I think this is what gives me a sense of the necessity of the “business of art”. I love both aspects, because I believe that creativity is an essential part of business, too. With a life changing move to Idaho about 10 years ago I picked up my art full time, then started marketing, etc. And I haven’t stopped.

What do you like about what you do?

All of the above. I tend to be a focus, committed person. I love having something in my life that I eat, breathe, sleep. But this is just my process. Someone else could do it entirely differently, and be just as happy and successful. You find your own sense of purpose and process. I do alot of charity work; I contribute my art to causes I believe in, I paint live at events and fundraisers as well. I work with local students trying to find their way in the arts. All these things – and others, I’m sure sure – open up to you when you immerse yourself in something. As they say, if you build it, they will come.

What do you dislike?

Having your work rejected on any level. It’s hard, and yet at the same time you come to know it’s good because you absolutely learn more about what you are doing, how you are doing it, where you belong, and that, sometimes, all of the above just doesn’t matter – and you just keep going.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Per piece generally, i.e. sales of art and commission work. No hourly or salary, as I am an independent artist. There are many jobs for artists who prefer a different lifestyle, i.e. as graphic artists or as freelance in addition to their job, or as an artist for a publishing house, where you create specific art for the company, on staff.

How much do you make? (*optional)

$0-25,000 ____

$25k-$35k ____

$50k-75K ____

$75k-100k ____

$100-$200k ____

$200k-$300k ____

$300k+ ____

Additional comments:

How much money did/do you make starting out?

It’s like driving a fast car.
You go from 0 to ….!

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

I am largely self-taught. I’ve had very few classes. I have worked a bit, and/or observed and talked with artists I have come in contact with whom I admire.
The learning never ends. There is no question I was born with talent and vision. But it takes more. And it doesn’t stop. And neither can you as an artist.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Everyday.

What is most rewarding?

Everyday.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career? 

I think it’s something that chooses you, as silly as that may sound. What I mean is – it is something that you don’t think about and apply for necessarily – it is something you just do. More than likely anyone reading this article is already creating a lot of art, and maybe just looking to re-focus his or her direction, or gain a little insight.

Rather than looking for a job to ‘apply’ for.   But I could be wrong!

That’s the beauty and magic of art.

How much time off do you get/take?

Hard to say as it varies a lot .  I know when I need to get things done and I know when I can take a break.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That it’s easy.  Some people look at a painting on a wall or at a show and I think have no concept of the trials and tribulations, work and detail, it took to get that final piece from inception somewhere in someone’s mind to the finished item on the wall or sculpture stand.  You will be amazed what art will ask of you.

And unless you are in it – like most fields – you cannot fully grasp what it takes.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Continued growth and success. Greater sales, notoriety and respect for my work.

Growth as an artist, and a deepening of my skills and expression.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I wish whoever undertakes this work does it with a sense of real freedom to create, without judging or criticizing themselves too hard, though that will happen. Sorry to be trite, but it is true – you just do it. Sometimes I just have to close myself in the studio until something starts to happen. Process, process. Often, when I work with young people, or a parent with a child is showing them my work and they ask me about it, I love to turn to the child and say, “Do you want to know the secret of art? The real secret of art?” and of course their eyes grow larger and their attention becomes totally focused on me.

And I say, “Just don’t stop. Just keep doing your art, and you will get better and better. That’s it.”

Dora – in the movie, “Nemo”, said it best. “Just keep swimming, just keep swimming.”

The post Contemporary Mixed Media Artist – Donna Bernstein appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a career counselor at a private, liberal arts school.

How would you describe what you do?

I help students and alums with all parts of the career development process.  This could mean assisting first year students who are deciding on what to major in, helping a student learn about the use of social media in the job search,  or helping an alum who graduated 15 years ago make a career transition.

What does your work entail?

I conduct individual career counseling appointments with students/alums, give presentations on various career topics, teach credit-bearing classes on major and career exploration and professional skills, and plan and implement various events throughout the year.

What’s a typical work week like?

My typical workweek is probably 80% individual appointments.  I meet with individuals for an hour to discuss topics such as major decisions, resumes and cover letters,  interviewing, personal branding, networking, job and internship searching, and assessments such as the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator and the Strong Interest Inventory.

The rest of my week is spent planning for events, following up on emails from students, participating in committees, managing our social media accounts, and assisting with other university events.

How did you get started?

I obtained my undergraduate degree in Psychology and my graduate degree in Counseling and Student Personnel Psychology. I had been a behavior therapist in the past and done other various helping/counseling related things during my time in graduate school.  I completed my practicum (advanced internship) in a college career service center and began conducting informational interviews before I graduated.  From there, I was able to land a full-time position at a university as a career counselor.

What do you like about what you do?

I really like being able to provide information to individuals who feel lost or stuck.  Many times people are motivated to take action with their career journey, but just don’t know where to begin.  I love feeling like I’ve made a difference for someone and have been able to help them on their journey.

What do you dislike?

I dislike that students come see me with the wrong expectations of what I do.  Sometimes students expect that I have a job ready and waiting for them or that our office is a placement agency.  My role is to help facilitate the process of career development, not hand over a career.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I am a salaried employee and am paid monthly.  I don’t receive additional bonuses and my check is the same every month.

How much do people in your field make?

Typical salary ranges for career counselors at universities would be upper $30K to mid $40K.  Salaries vary a bit based on where you work (private vs. public).

How much money do you make starting out?

Beginning, I think $38,000-$42,000 is reasonable.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

A Master’s degree in a counseling or related field is necessary.  Skills such as empathy, active listening, good communication, relationship-building, and patience are all important.

What is most challenging about what you do?

What is most challenging about what I do is being able to clearly define my role to others to allow expectations to be met.  If it’s a student’s first time in my office, I will give him/her a brief service overview so they know what to expect.

What is most rewarding?

I love working with individuals who are completely lost in their first appointment and by the time they are done working with me have a lot of clarity!

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Gain some practical experience working 1 on 1 with individuals in a helping-type role.  Know what type of population you want to work with (college students, kids, adults).  Conduct informational interviews with professionals in different settings to really gain a good understanding of the work they do and how it may differ in different settings.

How much time off do you get/take?

I get 10 days of paid vacation and unlimited sick days.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

A common misconception is that I will place individuals I work with into a job or internship.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

One of my goals is to continue to be involved in professional organizations as well as become a better career counselor.  There are always things to learn in my field.  One day I could become an Assistant Director or possibly Director of a career center.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

I have a lot of fun in my job and there’s always ways to make it “new”.  I can try out different counseling strategies or techniques whenever I’d like.  If you’re concerned about monotonous work, I wouldn’t worry about it with this career.

The post Interview with a University Career Counselor – Christine Jensen appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m the public relations specialist at AWeber, the email marketing tool used by over 120,000 small businesses around the world.

How would you describe what you do?

I find creative ways to get AWeber in front of our target audiences, and also foster positive experiences with customers and influencers. This includes evaluating and improving existing communication channels, as well as exploring new avenues for outreach.

What does your work entail?

My role includes getting AWeber mentioned in news articles, writing press releases, planning events, collaborating with the marketing team on product launches, overseeing our social media outreach, identifying strong customer stories, monitoring the media, and building relationships with folks who can help introduce AWeber to new audiences.

Effective PR touches every business function, so these responsibilities require me to collaborate with many departments and roles within AWeber, including customer solutions, engineering, management, business development, and recruiting.

What’s a typical work week like?

My work day is from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m., unless I’m managing an evening event, and I try to occasionally attend networking events in the evening.

One thing I enjoy about PR is how no day or week is the same. If an event is coming up, I’ll spend time promoting it online and coordinating logistics; if we’re approaching a major announcement, I’ll research potential media outlets and prepare the press release and pitches in advance.

My day-to-day constant is email: no matter the project, I’m always corresponding with internal and external folks!

How did you get started?

After graduating from college, I knew I wanted to work in business communication. This was at the very beginning of the economic recession when companies were cutting their marketing budgets, so I struggled to find an entry-level position. Eager to get my foot in the door anywhere, I accepted an unpaid internship with a PR agency, which eventually led to a position with one of the agency’s clients.

What do you like about what you do?

Being analytical, I love the strategy side of PR: looking at a business problem holistically and determining what you want to achieve, who you want to reach, what action you want them to take, and – most importantly – how you’ll go about facilitating that.

What do you dislike?

As many in the industry can attest, it’s challenging to explain my job to someone unfamiliar with PR. It plays a larger role than specific functions (example: writing, tweeting, researching, etc.) so it’s hard to summarize that in concrete, understandable terms. I do find it ironic that the greatest challenge for strategic communicators is conveying what exactly we do!

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I’m a full-time team member at AWeber. Unless you do consulting or freelance work, most PR jobs are salaried positions.

How much do people in your field make?

Income can depend on industry, agency vs. corporate, region, and – of course – level of experience. The Public Relations Society of America (PRSA) offers salary snapshots, which is a good place to start in determining your worth. One great aspect of PR is the unlimited growth potential, with many experienced professionals reaching senior executive positions.

How much money do you make starting out?

Again, this varies based on a wide range of factors, but PRSA’s research can provide clarity in determining salary for entry-level positions.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

A bachelor’s degree is required by most employers. Although many schools offer degrees in PR, I believe the most adept practitioners are ones with diverse educational experiences. PR requires you to quickly size up an industry, company or situation, so natural curiosity and eagerness to learn are imperative.

One of the best things an aspiring pro can do is pursue internships while in college. This will provide training in day-to-day operations (such as building a media list, pitching, creating client reports, etc.) and also help build a network for finding jobs in the future.

What is most challenging about what you do?

It’s easy for businesses to get excited about PR and imagine their announcement on the front page of the New York Times… when really it’s more appropriate for the business section of the local paper. Although it’s inspiring to dream big and shoot for the moon, it’s also challenging to manage expectations among team members to prevent disappointment later on. Comprehensive research at the start of a project helps tremendously with this, along with regular communication along the way.

What is most rewarding?

Nothing quite matches the feeling of a big media win!

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Network, network, network. Try to meet as many professionals as possible; set up informational interviews, take someone out to coffee, ask about their industry, and learn as much as you can.

Also, never underestimate the power of a thank you note. If someone shares their time or advice with you, always express your appreciation afterwards.

How much time off do you get/take?

I’ve been fortunate to work for companies with generous vacation packages, and it seems like business culture is moving toward supporting positive work-life balance. Unfortunately PR never takes a break, so I’ve found myself occasionally addressing issues on holiday weekends or while on vacation – it’s just part of the job!

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Many people assume all PR pros are bubbly extroverts, and that’s simply not true! I’m a textbook introvert, and while PR frequently places me outside my comfort zone (which has helped me grow as a person), my introvert qualities have been a strong asset in my success. PR requires a great deal of analysis, thinking and observation – areas in which many introverts thrive.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

More of the same – just bigger! I truly enjoy working in PR, and look forward to bigger challenges, projects, responsibilities and teams as my career progresses.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

The Public Relations Society of America has been a valuable part of my career development, and I encourage any aspiring PR pro to join. Watch the webinars, read the publications and get involved in your local chapter – the small investment will be worth it.

The post Public Relations Specialist Job Shadow – Liz Cies of Aweber appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living? 

I create website for real estate agents to help them market their expertise in their local market and sell properties for their clients.

How would you describe what you do?

I help people find the home of their dreams — properly advertising a website enables me to get my Realtor clients in front of potential home buyers who are looking to buy a new home in their area.

What does your work entail?

I spend lots of time in front of a computer checking out the competition, seeing the latest trends in web development and also reading up on real estate.  There are trends in each market and staying on top of this is important to understand how to cater to the market.

Follow up question:

Are you saying you check out the competition of other people that build real estate web sites?  Or you are doing keyword research for rankings like ‘Florida Real Estate’ etc.?

It’s a combination of both.  People talk about cool functionality so you never want to not have something other people have.  We just recently redesigned the site to accommodate some new technologies and be able to expand to new markets.  Now we are trying to incorporate more features such as drawing on the map to find properties and also allowing the general public the ability to create their own searches and save them and publish for others to use.

What’s a typical work week like?

There is no typical week. Every day involves checking stats from the prior day and trending them over time and comparing to the competition. It’s always important to read up on industry news and events to see if they create spikes in traffic, etc. Usually earlier in the week, new ideas are hashed out to implement for the weekend or in the event of more complex items, a schedule is developed over the course of a few weeks and extensive testing is performed to make sure there are no issues.

How did you get started?

I built my first website in 1996 back when a 28.8k modem was considered high-speed internet access.  Times have changed — it used to be about text and minimal graphics.  Now it’s completely changed and graphics are ever more popular as internet speeds continue to increase.

What do you like about what you do?

I’m always creating new things. Whether its new advertising opportunities or new websites, email campaigns, etc. It’s always something new and creative.

What do you dislike?

Long hours — it’s no lie, there’s a lot of time involved and staying ahead of the curve isn’t easy.  The more education the better — although traditional schooling isn’t necessarily important but rather specialized training courses and materials, etc.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I get paid by the hour — some clients are on retainer but many pay hourly for services.

How much do people in your field make?

It’s not difficult to make $200k + in this field.  It takes a lot of work to get to that point, but it’s definitely within reach.

How much money do you make starting out?

$40-$60 per hour is not uncommon.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

Being able to browse the internet and perform a search on Google are the start — a continual thirst for knowledge only pushes the envelope further.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Things are constantly changing and keeping up with the trends is most difficult.  Both in an advertising sense but also in a development sense.  As new devices emerge, it can be throw off what has been developed or new software can render your development differently than previously expected.

What is most rewarding?

Getting recognition from your clients and seeing their clients happy.  When your client knows you’ve provided a great service to them and keeps coming back is rewarding in itself.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Get prepared for a fun ride — hard work goes a long way.

How much time off do you get/take?

I take anywhere from 3-6 weeks off.  Depends on holidays, etc.  There are some heavy workloads at times followed by time to regroup and decompress.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That it’s rocket science — not really.  It comes easy with time.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

To build a new go-to place for prospective homebuyers to find their dream home and grow their families.

The post Advertising and Web Development Job Shadow – Michelle Kuzmovich appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I document my journey to become a professional golfer through 10,000 hours of deliberate practice in a website called thedanplan.com. In a sense, I am a golfer, a writer, a documentarian and a researcher. Wearing a number of different hats in order to make what I do possible.

How would you describe what you do?

From 9-6 I practice golf utilizing the ideas of deliberate practice. In the evenings I catch up on emails sent through the day, answer interviews and write blogs about my week.

What does your work entail?

My work is about increasing my skill level in golf. I spend 7 days a week working on my golf game getting it geared up for

The point of The Dan Plan is to demonstrate, by going to the extreme, that it doesn’t take “talent” to make it to the top level in any specific endeavor, rather it’s all about the amount of hard work you put in. Don’t forget about your dreams.

a future in competitive golf. I practice on ranges, putting greens, chipping areas and play plenty of courses around the Portland, OR area.

How did you get started?

I began April 10, 2010. Before that I had never played the sport of golf and knew nothing about it. I started by putting from 1 foot away from the hole and slowly, over the next five months, worked back from the hole to the fringe then added a pitching wedge and over the next year moved away from the green adding clubs as I needed them until I was eventually playing with a full set of clubs on December 29, 2011. Since then I have been fine tuning my skills and learning more about the mental game of golf.

Why did you decide to do this?

Good question. For me, it was simply to try and prove that it’s never too late to give something new a shot. I have known a lot of people in all areas of life who have used “talent” as an excuse to not try something or pursue a dream. I am hoping to demonstrate that with enough passion and hard work anything is possible.

What do you like about what you do?

It is completely mine and everything I put into it is what I get out of it. The harder I work the better my game gets, there is a direct correlation between input and output. Also, I get to make my own schedule and decide when to do what work.

What do you dislike?

Not much, it’s truly an amazing experience and I can’t imagine doing anything else at this point.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Great question. I live off of savings for the most part, although I do raise a bit of money through donations on the website. I also have some cash coming in through ads on the site.

How much do you make?

Barely anything, although I manage to get by and am happier than at any point in my past. I make about $500 a month at this point.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

When I began I made no money. For the first two years I made just a few dollars through donations but those have been picking up over the past year. Sponsorships are right around the corner too, which would add to potential revenue.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

You need to be able to write in order to document the journey. The other skill needed is to be able to stay open minded and learn as much as possible.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Getting over frustrations and accepting setbacks. When you are traveling down a completely new path there will be plenty of wrong turns along the way. It’s important to be able to accept this and to be able to move on without regrets.

What is most rewarding?

Every single day is rewarding. Going out and doing what you want when you want it is the reward. There isn’t much money in what I do at this point, but being able to folow my dreams and spend every day working on improving myself is amazingly rewarding.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Be patient. Leaning something new takes time. Also, when starting it can take a long time for things to take off and you need to remain patient and not lose faith in the process.

How much time off do you get/take?

Technically speaking, I can take off as much time as I would like. However, even on a “day off” I like to get to the course and put in some time.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

There are no misconceptions as I do not know of anyone doing anything remotely similar to what I do. Some people think that it’s all about the end results, but the truth is that it’s just as much about the journey and telling the story as it is about the finality of it all.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

To play on the PGA Tour. That’s the goal and what I aim to achieve.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

It’s never too late to start something new. The point of The Dan Plan is to demonstrate, by going to the extreme, that it doesn’t take “talent” to make it to the top level in any specific endeavor, rather it’s all about the amount of hard work you put in. Don’t forget about your dreams.

The post Aspiring Pro Golfer – Interview with Dan of thedanplan.com appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Legal Assistant

How would you describe what you do?

Completing routine tasks that help the office run smoothly and that allow attorneys to spend their time efficiently.

What does your work entail?

I work at a small law office, so I answer the phone and return messages, call the courts, schedule deadlines and appointments, schedule appointments with clients, proofread legal documents, answer basic legal questions, do filing etc. At a larger office, a secretary would handle more scheduling and phone work, while a legal assistant would focus more on filing, paperwork, keeping clients updated on their case, deadlines, working with the court, filing documents with the court, etc.

What’s a typical work week like?

I work 35-40 hours per week. Some legal assistants are expected to work for as long as the attorneys need them if there’s a deadline or a big case, so many legal assistants work overtime or are salaried.

How did you get started?

I started as a file clerk simply filing paperwork and then took on more tasks until I became a legal assistant.

What do you like about what you do?

I like learning about how attorneys find an angle on a case and craft an argument. Attorneys like challenges and expect everyone to pitch in as a team. In my experience if a mistake has been made, they don’t care who did it, they just want it fixed.

What do you dislike?

It can get monotonous with a lot of paperwork and a lot of phone calls. There is also a fair amount of negativity in law. It is an area focused on making arguments and resolving disputes.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I make about $16/hr

How much do people in your field make?

About $30-40,000/yr, but depending on experience and the area of law, you can make up to $50,000.

How much money do you make starting out?
$12/hr

What education or skills are needed to do this?

Most law offices want someone with a bachelor’s degree, but if you are smart and learn quickly, an AA degree would suffice.

What is most challenging about what you do?

I start to get callous after awhile and forget to be sympathetic. Everyday I hear from clients who have lost their house, lost their job, are getting divorced, have health problems, or are thousands of dollars in debt. These people are often angry and frustrated, but understanding the stress they are under and doing what you can to help makes a big difference.

What is most rewarding?

Feeling like a part of a team that resolves legal issues for our clients.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Ask questions about the legal process. It will help you do your job better and shows your employer that you don’t just clock in and clock out, you take interest in the field. If you are thinking of becoming a paralegal, all attorneys want legal assistant experience, so don’t expect to get a paralegal certificate and jump straight into being a paralegal.

How much time off do you get/take?

2-3 weeks/yr

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

We just shuffle paper.  Also, we never give legal advice. Only attorneys can do that.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Unlike a lot of legal assistants, I don’t want to become an attorney. I like legal assistant work and don’t want to take on the $100,000 investment of law school. There are more graduates coming out of law school than there are positions for attorneys. That being said, becoming a legal assistant is a great way to figure out if the legal field is for you and if you want to become an attorney. You get a good feel for what attorneys do and what their day-to-day schedule is like.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

It’s fast-paced, interesting, and rewarding! You must be detail oriented, and able to focus, re-focus, and multi-task well.

If you’re wondering what the difference between a legal assistant and a paralegal is, basically a paralegal is a more highly skilled legal assistant. They tend to do more legal research and writing and have more in-depth knowledge of the law.

The post Interview with a Legal Assistant appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am an artist who designs and creates art and home décor pieces through the fine art discipline of mosaics.   This is my business.

How would you describe what you do?

To best describe what I do I will say that I take a number of individual materials and arrange them in a way that ends in complete work of art.

What does your work entail?

My job entails a number of duties:  painting, gluing, cutting, designing, and color matching to name a few.

What’s a typical work week like?

A typical work-week for me involves marketing myself and my artwork to potential buyers and then fulfilling orders that come in from my marketing efforts.  I also set aside time for inventory control and bookkeeping.

How did you get started?

My initial introduction to the art of mosaics was from a relative during the time of a death in the family.  She helped me pick out my tools and materials and left me to use my imagination to produce a work or art.  My first project was a set of round coasters.  Family and friends began seeing my projects and requesting them and that was the genesis of my mosaic art business.

What do you like about what you do?

There is so much I love about my mosaic art business.  I love the ability to take nothing and create something.  There is also joy in being able to get the intangible ideas and designs running around in my head out into something visible and tangible.

What do you dislike?

I can’t really think of anything I dislike about my mosaic art business.  I view all that comes along with it as a part of the entrepreneurial process and embrace it as a learning tool.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I collect money whenever someone purchases an item.  This is mainly a direct selling business.

How much do people in your field make?

There is really no set salary for a mosaicist.  Your income is dependent upon a number of factors- a few being your product pricing and business expenditures, whether or not you are putting your money back into your business as opposed to taking money out, and the rate at which you are moving product as a result of sales.

How much money do you make starting out?

Starting out is where you are building up your inventory, testing the market, and learning your customer so regular money is inconsistent.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

No formal education is needed to be a mosaicist. Anyone who has an eye for design and can grasp the technique can become a mosaicist.  I am self-taught in my art.  The rest is instinct.  Never underestimate the power of instinct.

What is most challenging about what you do?

There are a few challenges I face in my line of business.  The first is explaining to people what it is I do and what mosaics are.  There are a lot of people who have not heard of mosaics.  The second is getting across the amount of hard work that goes into completing a work of art and the last is conveying the amount of time that is needed to complete just one piece of work.   When you factor in design, application, and drying time one project can take days to complete.

What is most rewarding?

The most rewarding part of my work is hearing someone say that when they gave an art piece designed and created by me to a loved one or friend, the recipient cried or was so overjoyed by the beauty of the artwork.  Also the fact that my customers say my work brings a sense of tranquility is a blessing.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

If you are considering a career as a mosaicst, you must have patience and tenacity to see a project through from inception to completion.  A project takes days if not weeks to complete.  You must be able to see a project through to the end and have a love for this line of work.

How much time off do you get/take?

Because there is no set work schedule as a mosaicist you can take time off as you please but it is wise to consider that any down time should be dedicated to marketing efforts and building up your inventory/portfolio.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

A very common misconception is that handmade artwork is to be compared to mass-produced work and priced accordingly.  Handmade artwork is never to be compared to mass-produced work.  No price can be put on the nights you wake up from your sleep with designs dancing around in your head and having to capture them in a hurry on paper before the next one comes and goes.  No price can be put on the incomparable gift you have been given to do what you do best.  When you invest in the work of an artist, you get work of a unique quality along with a visual appeal that is a by-product of thought and imagination.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

A dream of mine is to have a brick and mortar gift boutique of special finds with an art gallery in the midst and to teach the wonderful art of mosaics to aspiring mosaicist.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

Performing arts and visual arts have always been a love of mine.  I am so blessed to have an opportunity to do what I love and put a smile on someone’s face.

The post Interview with a Mosaicist appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

My name is Dan Dillon and I am President  and owner of CleanItSupply.com, one of the web’s largest cleaning and janitorial supplies retailers.

How would you describe what you do?

My day-to-day consists of running and operating CleanItSupply.com and my team of employees to ensure that all operations run smoothing and on schedule.

What does your work entail?

Managing people and teams to grow our business while providing the very best online shopping experience that we can offer. We pride ourselves on our knowledgable and friendly customer service.

What’s a typical work week like?

Anywhere from managing teams, to working with distributors, to talking to customers, each week is consistently different. When running a business, you have to be flexible and ready for whatever comes at you.

How did you get started?

CleanItSupply was born after selling a successful family commercial janitorial service in 2005. I’ve always embraced the concept of being an expert in your space.  Be confident in what you do and how you do it. Don’t worry about what your competitors are doing; focus on what you’re doing.  “Stick to what know and you shall succeed,” was the mentality that I followed.  So, janitorial cleaning supplies and products was the vertical that I gravitated to since I probably touched, smelled or used just about every kind of cleaning product or supply under the sun during my 25 years in the commercial janitorial service trenches.

What do you like about what you do?

My employees. This is by far THE most important element in any business.  Here is a really simple fact – in my opinion of course – People build businesses.  A customer service driven business has to have team players on board.  Notice how I didn’t say star players?  I’d rather have an employee that genuinely cares and tries their best than a naturally talented person who thinks they’re the best and that they’re deserving of more time off, higher compensation and pampering themselves just because they “believe” they’re valuable.  I say, “No thank you,” to Mr. or Mrs. Wonderful.

A difficult thing to do while growing our business is know when to hire a new team member.  I always consult with the entire team and discuss this point.  You need to know if and when one of your existing employees is maxed out on workload.  An all company meeting to discuss the topic, will help yield a sure decision.  In the meeting you’ll be able to identify what has gone wrong recently or who’s happy and who’s not.  But you have to approach the whole thing from a team building perspective.

How much do people in your field make?

As a business owner, it will vary. Your income will be dependent upon your dedication and work ethic. Work hard, enjoy what you do, and the money will follow.

How much money do you make starting out?

As a janitor like I did, not much. When starting your own business you will likely not make much money at first. Most entrepreneurs will tell you that. But if you stick with it and work hard, it will pay off in the end.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

Education? Yep did that.  I think so at least…. Just kidding – my mother actually laid the law down to both my dad and I. She demanded that I, “At minimum,” get my associates degree.  Even though I was offered a full ride to a four year college for competitive swimming, Dad and I opted for a local community college so I could continue managing the janitorial service business and help feed the family.  At least that was part of Dad’s sales pitch. Plus, how was I going to make the brand new Corvette car payments at 18 years old while spending 4 years with my head under water swimming in college?  First of all, why the heck did my dad let me buy a brand new 1990 convertible Corvette at 18 years old?  My only guess would be to keep me broke with making car payments so I’d have to keep swinging mops and scrubbing toilets…who knows?  Second, 4 years of prune fingers and straw-like chlorine hair, wasn’t so attractive at the time.  But, who knows, I could have been that Michael Phelps guy 20 years ago.  And, how was I going to meet girls while swimming under water in a pool?  I thought the Corvette had a much faster and easier approach.

On a serious note, I attribute my education to a good work ethic that my dad drilled into me.  College isn’t the only place to learn business or a profession. For the two short years that I attended college, it was helpful for things like accounting and public speaking.  But, learning from skilled professionals during an apprenticeship was more valuable for me personally.  Luckily, I got to do this with my father and the professional group of friends he kept.  Anything I wanted to learn was at my fingertips.  Some people learn from their mistakes.  I’d like to learn from other’s mistakes rather than making my own.  Boy, I wish the internet was around back then because I would have had a whole lot more questions.  Because, I’ve made many mistakes in e-commerce.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Working in ecommerce is incredibly competitive. Always trying to stay one step ahead of the competition is always going to be the most challenging part to running a successful business.

What is most rewarding?

As I mentioned previously, my employees. Working with such a smart, friendly team is my favorite part of the job.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Even if you start out as a janitor, you can make it happen. Just work hard, have a good work ethic. People will notice you.

How much time off do you get/take?

As a business owner, very little. My job is to keep everything running smoothly. Even on vacation I’m always working to make sure things are operating efficiently. When you are responsible for employees and your team, you have to make sure you are doing your very best for them.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

To keep growing CleanItSupply.com and continue to provide the very best online shopping experience and customer service on the web.

The post Janitor to Business Owner – A conversation with Dan Dillon from CleanItSupply.com appeared first on Job Shadow.

I am a speech pathologist.

How would you describe what you do?

I work with adults and geriatrics with cognitive, speech and swallowing disorders.

What does your work entail?

Assessing, planning and administering speech/swallow therapy. Tons of paperwork also!

What’s a typical work week like?

A lot of driving-Seeing 5-6 patients a day in their homes. Researching and planning treatment sessions along with paperwork. You have to write a note every time you see the patient.

How did you get started?

In college I took a “voice & diction class” & from then on I knew I wanted to be an SLP.

What do you like about what you do?

Helping my patients improve and gain more confidence.

What do you dislike?

The paperwork, seeing people who are very sick and at times, the liability.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Pay per visit with benefits and paid time off; also some mileage reimbursement.

How much do people in your field make?

60-90K a year depending on the setting. You can make more money by picking up extra cases on the side or private pay.

How much money do you make starting out?

It depends what population and where. Lower pay in preschools; higher pay in homecare.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

Masters in Speech Language Pathology, a good stomach, patience and a caring heart.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Trying to figure out the best plan for each patient & realizing that you can’t help everyone.

What is most rewarding?

When your patient makes progress and they tell you how great you are!

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Please don’t single out any population. Get experience with all! You never know where there will be a job opening. Also, a lot of jobs are per diem (as needed) or pay per visit. Many do not offer health benefits.

How much time off do you get/take?

If you work in healthcare, not much. If you are per diem (as needed) or pay per visit you usually do not get paid when you take off.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That we only work with lisps or “speech”

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

To be a supervisor or director.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

Sometimes you will feel like a speech pathologist, nurse, social worker, psychologist and special ed teacher all in one.

The post Interview with a Speech Language Pathologist-2 appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a freelance editor and ghostwriter.

How would you describe what you do?

As a ghostwriter, I work with various kinds of clients. Some people are experts in their field but not writers, and others write well but don’t have the time to get their thoughts down in writing. I work with them to create a book (or other written product) that captures their ideas, expertise, and voice.

What does your work entail?

When a client first contacts me, I ask questions about content, desired length, format, and materials the person can provide, such as drafts, outlines, previously written pieces, audio or video files of the author speaking or teaching—anything is helpful, even if the material won’t go in the book, because it helps me get inside the head and voice of the person. Some clients provide nothing at all. Usually, I will get at least a rough outline of the book.

I provide a rough estimate, to be confirmed after review of the materials. If the person is still interested, we have an initial conversation about the book, and I schedule as many interviews as possible in advance. My schedule fills up quickly, so I like to have this time blocked off as much as possible. Scheduling the interviews also helps me estimate the subsequent deadlines (sample chapter, rough draft, final draft).

I then provide a work-for-hire agreement that details the specifics (length, time, fee, cost of work that goes beyond the agreement) as well as stating explicitly that I do not claim any rights or payment (such as royalties) beyond this fee. I send an invoice for the down payment with this agreement. Interviews begin only after I have received this first payment.

I usually set up about an hour per interview, with each interview covering a chapter. Some chapters require several interviews, and often we end up deciding, throughout these conversations, that some chapters need to be combined and others split into two or more. (This is if we are working from an outline. If no outline, then we figure out how to group the content as we go.) I always call the client so that I can use Skype and record the call. (I call the person’s phone number through Skype rather than making a Skype-to-Skype call because this is easiest for most people.) I use the professional version of Pamela for Skype to record, but other third-party recording options are available.

After the last interview, I write a sample chapter, usually completed within a week (although I’ll be working on it throughout the interview process). I charge more if a client wishes to see a sample chapter before the interviews are finished (and I clarify this up front). I prefer to have a sense of the entire book before starting that first chapter because often later interviews will inform the shape of earlier chapters. If I write a sample chapter too soon in the process, I usually end up having to significantly revise it later (even if it is initially approved by the client).

After approval of the sample chapter (which sometimes requires revisions, but usually nothing extensive), I write the rough draft of the entire book. This can take anywhere from a month to several months depending on the book and my schedule. The client reviews the rough draft, and I incorporate changes and corrections and give the manuscript one last read before sending it as final.

What’s a typical work week like?

Typical? I have no idea what that word means. Because I edit as well as write, my work week varies. Some weeks, I spend most of my time editing (copyediting or developmental editing), which means hours at a time at my computer. Other weeks, I am writing more, which also means hours of time at my computer. So yeah, I guess that is typical—hours of screen time, usually in Word—but what I’m doing varies so much that every day feels completely different from the last. When I have interviews, phone calls are sprinkled in throughout the week, but otherwise, I correspond primarily through email with my clients (publishers, authors, etc.).

I work from home, and my kids are home with me, so that adds another dimension of fun to my day (and I mean that seriously and sarcastically). Some days end with all-nighters, and other days, I have the luxury of taking a few hours to run errands, meet someone for lunch, hang outside with the kids, or spend way too much time on the Internet (social networking in particular is both a time suck and a necessity for people who work long hours at home).

How did you get started?

My route was fairly straightforward. I majored in English with an emphasis on creative writing. I took courses in professional editing, interned at a small literary press, then got a job with another small publisher as an editorial assistant. Part of my job there involved some writing (creating various books for kids).

Then my husband and I moved from Minneapolis to Tucson on a bit of a whim. There, I began freelance editing and proofreading. At one point, I worked in-house for one of my clients, a small publisher of pregnancy, parenting, business, health, cooking, and gardening books. This publisher purchased many books from the UK and Australia, so I would rewrite them for a U.S. audience.

This publisher was acquired by a much larger one and moved out of Tucson, so I happily went back to freelancing, this time as an editor and a writer (but still primarily editing). Now I’m back in the Minneapolis area, and ghostwriting work keeps coming my way through referrals, so I’m writing 75% of the time and editing 50% of the time. (Yes, that math is correct. Did I mention the all-nighters?)

What do you like about what you do?

I love working with words in every way, especially how energizing and creative it is to come up with the perfect way of phrasing something or a solid analogy. The more I write, the more ideas pop into my head, and the more connections I see in all areas of my life, and that’s amazing. Being creative begets creativity, and this bursts out into everything I do.

What do you dislike?

I despise the telephone. Despise. Interviews have gotten much easier because we’re on the same page and the other person does most of the talking, so much of what I dislike about talking on the phone is minimized (such as being caught off guard and agreeing to something I shouldn’t or estimating poorly because I will say anything just to get off the devil device). I have learned to almost automatically tell people that I need to think on something and get back to them, which has helped. But again, the interview process isn’t like the usual phone call, and I’ve actually started to enjoy these conversations because of the flow of ideas and how excited my clients get about being understood, coming up with new ways of looking at the familiar, and getting closer to the final product.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

For ghostwriting, I charge a project fee based on the estimated length (give or take 10%). I always discuss length in terms of word count because page count can vary so much depending on margins, type size, font, and so forth. Word count minimizes the potential for misunderstanding. This means that when a client tells me roughly the length of the book he or she wants, I figure out a range of words that should end up, when typeset, being close to that length. Because the process is so lengthy and the fee often high, I break it up into four payments, with 25% due up front, 25% due upon receipt of the sample chapter, 25% due upon receipt of the rough draft, and 25% due upon completion of the final draft.

How much money do Ghostwriters make? 

The fee I charge depends on many factors: length desired; how complicated the topic is, how much material the client can supply up front; whether the book will include art, sidebars, boxes, pullquotes, or other design elements and my role in working with these; and other elements. I usually charge between $20 and $50 per manuscript page (=250 words). Ghostwriters with technical expertise or celebrity projects on their book list can usually charge much more (as in tens of thousands of dollars).

How much money did/do you make starting out? 

Starting out for me was editing more than writing, so I charged my editing rate at first, which back in the day (15+ years ago) was $15/hour. This went up to $25/hour until I realized, Hey, I’m ghostwriting. Then I started looking up what other people were charging and realized I was way underbidding. So I went from charging several hundred or a thousand-plus to charging at least $2,000-$3,000. But even then, I had several projects under my belt.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

I highly recommend taking some writing courses just to get feedback on whether your opinion of how you write matches reality. I personally think editing courses (and editing experience) are invaluable, especially developmental editing, but these aren’t necessary, I suppose. Still, clients will expect the manuscript to be grammatically correct and fairly clean, so being a creative writer alone won’t cut it if you don’t have an excellent command of grammar, syntax, consistency, and so forth.

Having experience with publishers helps immensely because you get a sense of the market, house style, the overall publishing process, and what submissions are routinely rejected and why. This is important even if your client is self-publishing. I can often tell a self-published book within a few minutes of looking at it, which you want to help your client avoid.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Having to be clear and direct throughout the process to minimize misunderstandings. With nearly every client, I add something to my list for next time, such as “Make sure client understands that writing does not include graphic design or e-book coding.” During the interviews, I often paraphrase what the client is telling me to make sure I’ve understood it, which is another way to prevent misunderstandings that could lead me way off track with the writing.

What is most rewarding?

Those moments when what I’m writing or what we’re talking about in an interview leads to further insight or a new way of describing or explaining something that is an aha moment for me and for my client.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Think in terms of how you might get your foot in the door doing something related rather than trying to jump right into ghostwriting without any related experience. For example, write your own books or articles first or go the editing route. You could try copywriting or website writing first, or ghosting someone’s blog, such as if you notice that someone doesn’t post much (perhaps because the person is too busy) and you have a good grasp of the topics and background. Offer to write a guest post and go from there. Simply building your own writing portfolio in any way possible will help give you something to show potential ghostwriting clients (not only to illustrate your abilities but also to give them an idea of whether your style is a match—sometimes it’s not, and you shouldn’t take this personally).

Also, keep in mind that making a living at this requires quite a bit of self-discipline.

Scratch that. It actually requires recognizing that you aren’t self-disciplined (in most cases) and not telling yourself you’ll be better tomorrow. Consciously develop systems and ways of tricking yourself to compensate for the desire to procrastinate or the tendency to get distracted.

How much time off do you get/take?

Ha! In theory, I can take time off anytime I like, but in practice, I’m usually too swamped. That probably has more to do with my work habits than the job itself, although I know it’s a common problem with freelancers in general. Part of it is that I don’t get paid for all my work time, so the time I spend on my own accounting or marketing, for example, is unpaid work. This means scheduling enough work on top of that to meet my financial goals. Still, I can schedule appointments anytime and take random days off whenever I can fit them in, so the flexibility is there, and I love it.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

In general, people think freelancers have all the time in the world. I’ve had to be assertive with people who call during my workday just to talk (which I don’t like to do anyway, so being assertive is easy). That’s an ongoing battle, this sense that my work isn’t “real” work in the same way as an office job, that I can drop everything and go do something anytime or that I spend half my day playing Angry Birds or Words with Friends. (I fight the urge to do just that—don’t get me wrong—but I’d be out of business if I gave in to it.)

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

My main goal is to reach a point where I am not working quite so many hours. I’m actually about to achieve that goal, so after that, my next goal is to be increasingly picky about the jobs I take, doing only work that I absolutely love. I am somewhat selective now, but I have occasional projects that are not exactly exciting to me. Fortunately, though, the occasional project like this is offset by how much of my work I adore.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Take the time to look into all the legal and ethical issues before you begin. I think it’s important for ghostwriting to be an ethical field, and I cringe at the occasional story of a ghostwriter doing something like writing about research for publication to divert attention from the original researcher being on the payroll of a company that profits from the findings, just for example.

Also, understand that you really don’t want any and all ghostwriting work. Make it part of your process to find out if you’re a good fit for the project. Ghostwriting is intensive and time consuming to begin with—it can become a nightmare if on top of this, you have to deal with constant rewrites and misunderstandings that stem from simply not being the best writer for the person or topic.

The post Interview with a Ghost Writer appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am the Vice President of Digital Strategy for W.L. Snook & Associates, Inc.

How would you describe what you do?

I’m responsible for managing all the digital marketing efforts in addition to making technology decisions on how to increase the value of our digital asset portfolio.

What does your work entail?

Data analysis, creative thinking, and a lot of testing. I track user engagement across a portfolio of websites, including eCommerce, informational, consumer reviews, and some others.

I’m on the look-out for trends and anomalies; both the good and the bad. If something is working really well I want to know how we can expand it, and conversely if something is tanking – the sooner I can explore possible solutions to correct the problem, the better.

What’s a typical work week like?

Not typical.

We have operations across a wide variety of markets and are entering new ones almost every quarter. Some days consist of checking in with our content and development teams where others may include meeting with venture partners or domain experts to get council and guidance on how to steer a particular set of projects.

We also have an active investment division that is constantly making new acquisitions and divestitures of digital assets, including but not limited to: websites, software, serialization technology, domains, materials production, and design patents.

How did you get started?

Early in my life I became fascinated with computers and the idea of the internet. I remember being in middle school and thinking that HotBot was the greatest thing since sliced bread (that was an early meta search engine for those of you too young to remember).

At the start of college I really thought I was going to be doing something in the finance world; either with  mutual funds or real estate. So I took an internship at Morgan Stanley and found out pretty quickly that I really wasn’t that interested in office politics and selling my soul to make a living… lucky enough I was given an opportunity to work on one of the first email campaigns at MSDW and the spark grew from there.

I got the entrepreneur bug my sophomore year in school and started my own consulting firm, after about 18 months I had more work than I could handle and started looking for partners. A few months later my first start-up was born, called atomni, and the rest of the story can be read here

What do you like about what you do?

I work with brilliant people who care more about our customers than themselves. My job is exciting and I get to be creative and solve problems on a daily basis.

What do you dislike?

Sometimes the hours can be a bear, not really to me but to my girlfriend and family… they are always telling me I work too much.

I feel like this balancing act is only complicated when you really love what you do. I’ll work from 7am to 10pm some nights and will have a hard time winding down because ideas are still coming at 100 miles per hour. Learning to write things down for later and grab a beer has been one of the most helpful ways of aiding this issue.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I draw a base salary from the company and then am entitled to profit-sharing based on my equity ownership in each venture.

How much money do you make?

I don’t think anyone really likes to talk about this, but my base is mid-six figures and then I’m paid out of the equity shares I own if I do not re-invest them into the business (which I do.)

How much money do you make starting out?

My first real job out of college was as Marketing Manager for a start-up compliance software firm. My starting salary was 55k plus a nice sign-on bonus and variable-compensation package based on sales. I was bumped to 70k within 8 months.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

I’m a bit bias, but I’ve found that most of the finance people I know that choose to go into strategy seem to do it with more ease than others. Having a grip on what the numbers need to look like and paying close attention sales is a big driver of early success in my opinion.

Skills are more characteristic-related than learned, attributes like determination, creativity, and a burning desire to succeed will put you on a good path.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Having to make decisions with large dollar amount attached directly to them.

It’s a double-edged sword. If I make a large investment decision and it goes well than it always seems like an obvious choice after the fact, however, if I commit tens or hundreds of thousands of dollars to a project and the return doesn’t work out, it’s my fault, and it’s my responsibility to make the business whole for the outcome of my decisions.

What is most rewarding?

2 things:

1. For our projects that have customers, like Traffic Safety Store, hearing what a great job we’re doing and how appreciative they are that we genuinely care about their business is the best feeling in the world.

2. Seeing your ideas come to life. If we identify that we need a piece of tech to help us make decisions or provide research data, we can just build it. Having dedicated teams that are talented enough to take abstract ideas and turn them into tools to solve problems used to be reserved for the giants of the tech industry like Microsoft and Apple.

Nowadays with the right resources and culture we are able to build teams of tier-one talent to help build the tools we need.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Find a mentor, participate in local events, and read every scrap of information you can get your hands on.

How much time off do you get/take?

That’s an interesting question to ask in 2013, as outside of big businesses the old model of 2 weeks PTO is changing rapidly. With de-centralized work forces, longer hours, and quicker development cycles, someone in my position could realistically take off for a week every couple of months and not adversely effect their roles productivity.

I generally take off around 4-5 weeks a year, spread out over a lot of the major holidays so I can cram in as much beach/snowboard time as possible.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That it’s all marketing. A LOT of it is strategy related to marketing, but an equal if not larger piece of it is strategy for the business and our investment portfolio.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

To ramp up our new technology division to have our very own suite of products. We have some serious talent and some big ideas, it’s going to be a blast to start putting them out there and see how they do.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

Don’t be afraid to create your own job. Before I came on at W.L. there was no one in my role.. I took initiative to carve out a set of responsibilities and strategic milestones that would move the whole business forward, from there it was aligning my interests with the business and starting on a mutual path toward a more successful business.

Above all else, JFDI.

The post Interview with VP of Digital Strategy Nick Eubanks appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you like about being a cargo pilot?

I love to travel and see the world and I love flying airplanes.  There is a lot of responsibility given to you — the aircraft cost a couple hundred million dollars and the cargo is very expensive.  I get a day or two at most layover locations to travel, eat, and have fun.  I get a lot of time of work.

What do you dislike?

Long flights can be extremely boring and fatiguing.  The cargo can be hazardous.

The post Pros and cons of being a cargo pilot appeared first on Job Shadow.

What does your work entail?

Pre-flight: reviewing lots of paperwork ensuring the official flight documents, crew, and aircraft are legal and safe for flight.  Performing a pre-flight inspection of the various aircraft systems, an external inspection of the aircraft, and reporting any discrepancies to maintenance, the captain, and the flight dispatcher.

In-flight: complete lots of checklists, fly the airplane, monitor aircraft systems, monitor the weather, monitor the performance of the aircraft, and communicate with air traffic control and the company via a myriad of radios, computers, or satellite communications.  Ensure a safe and efficient flight.  Supporting the Pilot In Command (the captain).

Post-flight: complete paperwork, file any regulatory paperwork required by law, file any aircraft maintenance issues in the aircraft’s logbook, conduct a safety review of the flight, and perform aircraft shut-down checks and inspections.  Complete country immigration and customs requirements.

Outside-of-work: maintain a FAA First Class Medical.  Although the requirements are not up to military fighter pilot standards; as a minimum you must keep your blood pressure in check, correctable eyesight to 20/20, and have good hearing and overall decent physical fitness.

The post What does your work entail as a cargo pilot? appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a first officer (pilot) for a cargo/freight company that operates a Part 121 airline.

How would you describe what you do?

I fly a wide-body airplane full of cargo world-wide.

What does your work entail?

Pre-flight: reviewing lots of paperwork ensuring the official flight documents, crew, and aircraft are legal and safe for flight.  Performing a pre-flight inspection of the various aircraft systems, an external inspection of the aircraft, and reporting any discrepancies to maintenance, the captain, and the flight dispatcher.

In-flight: complete lots of checklists, fly the airplane, monitor aircraft systems, monitor the weather, monitor the performance of the aircraft, and communicate with air traffic control and the company via a myriad of radios, computers, or satellite communications.  Ensure a safe and efficient flight.  Supporting the Pilot In Command (the captain).

Post-flight: complete paperwork, file any regulatory paperwork required by law, file any aircraft maintenance issues in the aircraft’s logbook, conduct a safety review of the flight, and perform aircraft shut-down checks and inspections.  Complete country immigration and customs requirements.

Outside-of-work: maintain a FAA First Class Medical.  Although the requirements are not up to military fighter pilot standards; as a minimum you must keep your blood pressure in check, correctable eyesight to 20/20, and have good hearing and overall decent physical fitness.

What’s a typical work week like?

There are many different work weeks depending on company, cargo versus passengers, regional versus major air carrier, and type of airplane flown.  I fly a wide-body long haul aircraft.  Trips are usually 10-14 days long and are always overseas flights transiting many time zones.  A trip starts with a 1hr 30min show at the airport before flight.  Review the paperwork, pre-flight inspect the aircraft.  Then fly 8-16 hours to an international destination. Spend 24 hours up to two days in a hotel.  Then repeat and continue that cycle for the duration of the trip.  The trip may involve you deadheading (prepositioning) as a passenger on a commercial airline to pick up a jet somewhere.  I am off work the remaining days of the month (16-20 days).  Trips do not follow a typical Mon-Fri work week.  You may also be away from home during holidays.

How did you get started?

I attained my flying experience by serving in the United States Air Force for 8 years. There I flew several transport category aircraft and held several rankings such as co-pilot, captain, instructor pilot, and standards check airman.  During the final years of my military career, I took the FAA exams and check rides necessary to receive an Airline Transport Pilot certificate.  I then flew for a major passenger airline before taking this job.

What do you like about what you do?

I love to travel and see the world and I love flying airplanes.  There is a lot of responsibility given to you — the aircraft cost a couple hundred million dollars and the cargo is very expensive.  I get a day or two at most layover locations to travel, eat, and have fun.  I get a lot of time of work.

What do you dislike?

Long flights can be extremely boring and fatiguing.  The cargo can be hazardous.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Compensation in the airline industry varies wildly depending on whether you fly for a regional company or major airline, what type of airplane you fly, and seniority/longevity.  Most pilot ranks are unionized and the negotiated union contract pay dictates dollar per flight hour pay.  Per the FAA, pilots are limited to 100 hours/month and 1000/year.  Pilots are generally paid by the flying hour (whenever the engines are running) and receive per diem for food while on the trip.  The company pays for hotel rooms and taxis to and from the airport.

How much money do you make?

Airline pilots who start at entry level regional airline pilot jobs start at $22,000.  Senior Captains at a major airline can easily clear $300k a year. Right now I am making $150,000/year.

How much money do you make starting out?

$65,000 (Due to my military experience, I was able to start at a major airline and not at an entry level position)

What education or skills are needed to do this?

Most companies require a college degree (technical preferred).  You will need to attain several FAA certificates/ratings.  You must have excellent communication skills, eye/hand coordination, and cognitive/problem solving skills.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Avoiding fatigue which could impact your health or judgement.

What is most rewarding?

The amount of home time.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Don’t pay for the flight training yourself unless you or your parents are money bags rich.  Don’t go to a “aeronautical science” college to get a degree in flying.  At some point during your career, you should expect to be furloughed.  Having a technical degree will allow you to get a real job outside of flying should you get furloughed, lose your medical certificate, or worse lose your certificate.  It is extremely hard to get your wings, but it is very easy to have them taken away!  Find a military Guard or Reserve unit who is willing to send you to military flight school on Uncle Sam’s dime.

How much time off do you get/take?

Trips are usually 10-14 days.  The rest of the month I am off work unless I choose to pick up extra work.  Vacation starts at a minimum of two weeks/year and can be as long as a month or more if you are senior.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

The airplanes fly themselves.  Sure the autopilot is on during cruise flight, but you monitor the autopilot and program it and give it commands via a console or keypad — you’re still flying the jet.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Become a Captain, Instructor Pilot, or Check Airman for my company.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

Don’t jump into this career without doing your homework.  Your job is to travel and you will spend a lot of time away from family/friends.  The industry is cyclical and so you must have a decent education to fall back on in case things don’t work out as planned.

The post Interview with a Cargo Pilot appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you like about what you do?

I help a lot of people. They come back to me and they say, “Thank you for helping me. I feel much better.” “Thank you for helping me. My pain is gone.” “Thank you for taking out my brain tumor.

I have four partners in my group who get along great. I can make my own schedule. I don’t have to work as hard if I don’t want to. One of my partners is much younger and has four younger kids, and he’s able to work less. We’re able to, in a sense, set our own schedules.

What do you dislike?

I dislike dealing with insurance companies who either deny payment for legitimate claims or delay payment for legitimate claims. In Pennsylvania they pay less for certain procedures than the same Blue Cross/Blue Shield company would pay for another city three hours away, like Cleveland or Columbus, which are comparable sized cities to Pittsburgh. The pay is between 50% and 100% higher in Columbus or Cleveland than it is in Pittsburgh. And that’s because Blue Cross/Blue Shield has the overwhelming majority of contracts in Pennsylvania, or at least in Western Pennsylvania, whereas in Ohio, there are lots of competing insurance companies.

The post Pros and cons of being a Neurosurgeon appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you like about what you do?

I like the helping in the community. I like the camaraderie with these guys that I work with. We work 24 hours a day with each other. We spend as much time with these guys as we do with our families, we build friendships, these are guys that you trust and are good friends that you just can’t replace. I also like the work schedule, the ten 24 hour shifts a month, gives me a lot of time to do things with my family kids and wife that a lot of other people can’t do.

What do you dislike?

We go on a lot of calls where we risk people’s lives running across town with our lights and sirens on, we risk our lives doing that just for nothing, most people call fire trucks just for nothing, petty things. It’s just ridiculous for them even to call. But that’s just part of the job, it’s just inherent that way that those kinds of things happen.   Also a lot of times we put in long hours, a lot of times will be here for 24 hours we may not sleep for two hours the whole time. We’ll be up all night doing fighting fires or whatever maybe takes place. That’s just part of the job. If you’re going to talk about dislikes that would be really the only things that I dislike about it. That’s just part of it though, if you can’t do that you don’t need to be doing the job.

The post What are the pros and cons of being a Firefighter appeared first on Job Shadow.

What education or skills are needed to be a general surgeon?

A budding Surgeon must be focused.  In college,  I recommend seeking counsel with your college’s pre-med advisor, who can steer you to the courses you will need to get in med school.  Good grades, not making stupid mistakes out of the classroom (yes, med schools usually do background checks) and hard work help get you into medical school.  General Surgery is a five year residency after medical school.  Yes, it is hard work (total of 25 years of school and training).  Yes, I enjoyed my training and yes, I would do it again!

The post What education or skills are needed to be a general surgeon? appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you like about being a general surgeon?

I like the personal rewards that General Surgery gives me.  I enjoy taking a complex medical problem and figuring out what is wrong  or being able to take a sick patient to the operating room, working hard during the case, and, most of the time, having the patient recover and be better than they were before the surgery.  The majority of my patients appreciate the care they receive by me and my partners, and this in itself is very rewarding.

In my particular practice, I enjoy the variety of diseases I can care for and the cases I can perform.  I would be bonkers if I had to do the same thing every day, like a cataract surgeon (although they are at the bank and golf course hours before me!)

What do you dislike?

I dislike several things:  having to deal with insurance companies and Medicare, both of whom are constantly trying to cheapen my services and talents; getting up at night to take care of folks who are drunk or drugged and are in automobile accidents, hurting themselves or others ; taking care of people who have spent a lifetime not taking care of themselves, and having them expect miracles from my care.

The post Pros and cons of being a General Surgeon appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you like about what you do?

Well, for one, I’m at the golf course every day; whether I get to play or not, I’m still at the golf course every day. And the ability to interact with people on a daily basis different people and be able to share my expertise in something they love. Plus I’m not sitting behind a desk. I’m dealing with people on a social level for a living.

What do you dislike?

I have to deal with people on a social level for a living. The demands as far as time. I work every weekend, I work every holiday. When you’re dealing with the public, you have one policy and it’s there for a reason, and some people aren’t going to agree with it. And it’s the same as everything else, but probably demand on time is the greatest thing I don’t like about it.

The post Pros and Cons of being a PGA Golf Pro appeared first on Job Shadow.

What advice would you offer someone considering becoming a PGA Golf Pro?

If you want to play golf, don’t become a golf professional. And we all say that. I only play about once every two weeks. If you just love the game, and you want to play, just play golf as much as you can, don’t become a golf professional. But if you love the game, and you want to be around it, involved in it, in every different facet of it, then you’d probably be a good candidate.

The post Advice for someone considering becoming a PGA Golf Pro appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you like about being a Registered Nurse?

The best part is seeing patients get better and knowing that I played a small role in that. We get a lot of patients who are in a lot of pain after their surgery which can be pretty stressful trying to get their pain under control.  But once they’re comfortable and smiling it does feel really good to know that I helped them out.

The post What do you like about being Registered Nurse appeared first on Job Shadow.

What advice would you offer someone that’s considering this career?

The best advice I could offer would be to contact a hospital in the area and see if there’s any way that you can shadow a nurse for a full shift because I think that a lot of people watch TV shows and see doctors doing all the work and they think that’s the way things actually are and it’s not like that. Nursing is a very, very physical job. It’s a lot of thinking and it’s a lot of work.  I love it but I’ve met a lot of people who I think if they would have actually seen what it was really like before they went to school that they might have chosen something different.

I don’t want to sound discouraging by any means but I think it’s a good idea to actually shadow someone to see what it will be like.

The post Advice for someone considering becoming a Registered Nurse appeared first on Job Shadow.

What does your work entail as registered nurse?  What does a nurse do?

I’m responsible for making sure that the patient’s pain is under control, that they receive their prescribed medicine on time, that their vital signs are stable, that the doctor’s orders are being followed and I act as a liaison between the doctor and the patient’s family.

Click the link above for the full interview.  

The post What does your work entail as a registered nurse? appeared first on Job Shadow.

In Kansas City it seems like most hospitals for new graduate nurses start around $21 or $22 an hour and then every year the salary goes up by a little bit less than a $1 a year. I’ve been a nurse for 5 years and I’m making $26 an hour.

Hospital nurses tend to make more than other types of nurses. At doctor’s offices they only make like $18 or $19 an hour even if you are a registered nurse. So you definitely get more in the hospital and then hospitals usually pay night shift workers a shift differential which for me is $3 an hour so I get my base pay and then for the night hours I get $3 more an hour and I also get additional pay.  If it’s a weekend you get $2 an hour extra.

The post How much does a registered nurse make? appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you like about what you do?

The best part is seeing patients get better and knowing that I played a small role in that. We get a lot of patients who are in a lot of pain after their surgery which can be pretty stressful trying to get their pain under control.  But once they’re comfortable and smiling it does feel really good to know that I helped them out.

What do you dislike?

I wish I had a lot more time to spend with my patients. There are some busy nights where I’ll run into a room to see something and my patient wants to tell me a joke or a story about her grandkids and it absolutely breaks my heart to have to interrupt them and leave because the patient in the room down the hall is throwing up and another patient is crying in pain and another patient has to go to the bathroom.  So there’s sometimes that there is so much going on that I feel like I can’t give my patients the attention that they desire and that I want to.

The post Pros and cons of being a Registered Nurse appeared first on Job Shadow.

I think that many people have seen a lot of Woody Allen movies and so they think that they would be lying on a couch, talking to somebody that isn’t saying much. And often you have people saying “Oh you’re a shrink? I’m not crazy.” I really don’t think you have to be crazy to see a shrink. I think that life is very challenging and that it can be incredibly helpful to have the outside perspective of somebody that doesn’t have a vested interested in your choices that you make.

The post What is a common misconception people have about psychologists? appeared first on Job Shadow.

First you need to get a high school degree, then a college degree, and then you need to get a graduate degree.  And you need to have a PhD level. So that could be a PhD, a PsyD(Doctor of Psychology), sometimes people work with an EDD(Doctorate of Education), but it’s a doctoral level program. And then you would have to be in a clinical study so that you can be licensed. You have to take a licensing exam in order to work as a licensed psychologist.

The post What education or skills are needed to be a psychologist? appeared first on Job Shadow.

How would you describe what you do?

What does your work entail?

What’s a typical work week like?

How did you get started?

What do you like about what you do?

What do you dislike?

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

How much money do you make?

How much money do you make starting out?

What education or skills are needed to do this?

What is most challenging about what you do?

What is most rewarding?

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

How much time off do you get/take?

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

The post How much do you make starting out as a psychologist? appeared first on Job Shadow.

The salary range for a psychologist is between $70,000 and $200,000. I am sure there are people who are making more and people who are making less.

The post How much money do you make as a psychologist? appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you like about what you do?

I do feel that I am very helpful. I make a tremendous impact on the residents’ lives and I know because they tell me. I like the flexibility of the job. I like the challenges of it. I have an opportunity to be very creative in my approach to handling problems in a community setting.

What do you dislike? 

Usually, being a psychologist, you see people when they’re having trouble and when they’re better they say thank you and then they leave. So one of the challenges is that when people want you and need you they’re having a hard time, so you have to get used to being with people that are having a hard time. I also find it challenging when I see people at the nursing home that are not getting the type of attention or care that they should.  That’s why I’ve been developing my work where I have the opportunity to give people on the staff ideas of how to handle problems in a different way that’s more effective and helpful for the residents.

The post Pros and Cons of being a Psychologist appeared first on Job Shadow.

excerpt from JobShadow Interview with a psychologist.

The post How would you describe what you do as a psychologist? appeared first on Job Shadow.

I may look at the medication in their chart or talk to the doctors or another staff member to try to work out any kind of problems that the resident may be having.  I consult with the psychiatrist and talk with family members to try to create a more pleasant environment for them and help them with any kinds of problems, whether they’re feeling depressed, or they’re having an issue with a roommate, they’re not getting along with the staff member, any kind of problem.

excerpt from JobShadow Interview with a psychologist.

The post What does your work entail as a psychologist? appeared first on Job Shadow.

Rick West-

Josh Clemence-  Josh is a seasoned veteran of the NWA start up scene.  He’s recently struck out on his own as the founder of creative firm BLKBOXLabs.   With his proven knack at creating cool things you’d be hard pressed to find a better partner company.  You can view his complete JobShadow interview here.

Patrick Carter-  Patrick is the President and Owner of NFlight Technologies.  Their cameras and innovations are literally changing the way pilots view their flights.  To read his full Job Shadow interview click here.

Will Collins-  Will is the founding partner of graphic design firm, Archetype Productions.  They’ve bootstrapped their way from designing band posters to doing creative work for Fortune 500 companies (and everything in between).  To read his full JobShadow interview click here.

Mo Elliot-  Mo is the founder of Fayetteville clothing icon Fayettechill.  Fayettechill has succeeded in creating awesome clothing and a brand that exudes relaxation in the Ozarks. To see Mo’s complete Job Shadow interview click here.

Josh Smith-  Josh is the COO and co-founder of Conway, AR based Privacy Star.  Their smartphone privacy technology helps users re-gain control of their devices.  To read Josh’s full JobShadow interview click here.

Yoon Kim–  Yoon is the founder of Blogs for Brands.  Yoon’s company creates content to help outdoor brands standout online and drive profitable traffic to their sites.  You can view Yoon’s complete JobShadow interview here.

The post JobShadow Interviews with 7 Northwest Arkansas Startups appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am the CEO and Co-Founder of Field Agent.

How would you describe what your company does?

We want to change the way the world collects business information.  We create new products founded on progressive mobile technology and a sustainable business model that utilizes Crowdsourcing as our engine.

What is unique about what your company does?

• First app in iTunes to provide cash for completing tasks
• Utilize crowdsourcing to complete work

What does your work at Field Agent entail? (your role personally)

As CEO:

• Set strategic direction for the Company
• Lead change within our Industry
• Charged with telling our Story to the Masses

How did your company get started? 

Our background was with P&G and after leaving Procter we formed a Shopper Research Company (CORE4 research) to meet the needs of CPG Companies.  In 2009, we set out to solve an Industry wide problem:

“how can you get location specific data (i.e. from a retail store or a home) that is accurate, cost effective and the data be available real time”

Current state required high costs in labor and long lead times time to deliver our Customer’s needs for shopper specific data from a retail/home location.

Our answer was to use the power of the iPhone to help us deliver a breakthrough way to gather data via crowdsourcing.

What do you like about owning/being part of a startup?

Autonomy to be able to make a difference in peoples lives both internally and externally to Field Agent.

What do you dislike?

There is never a beginning or ending to your day, week, month.  It really is a 24/7 lifestyle during the start-up days.

How does your company make money?

Our Clients pay us to gather data for a fee.

What are your company gross revenues?

< $10,000,000

How have you funded the company?

Boot Strapping over the past 3 years.

Is there any specific education you received or skills you have that have helped you?

It is really simple:

–       Be someone who listens (no one likes a know it all)

–       Read everything you get your hands on (you can not comprehend the massive amount of data required to do a start-up if    have not been a “reader”)

–       Be inquisitive – be a student of your work and its connections to other industries

What is the most challenging thing facing your company?

Managing Growth with the increasing awareness of our model.

What is your opinion on the startup community and the business climate in NWA?

It is getting better.  The Ark Challenge was a great start to encourage start-ups.  The State and Innovate Arkansas also do a great job incentivizing start-ups and encouraging outside investors to invest in Arkansas based start-ups.

What advice would you offer someone considering starting a business?

Get your family onboard for the adventure.  Being a start-up impacts all facets of your life!

How much time off do you get or take?

I am blessed to have a great family to support me.  Net – Family comes before work.  This being said, when you are in a start-up, your family is integrated into your work life as well.

So I take time when I need it, but I am never far away from my iPhone, iPad or Mac Book…

When I take a week of vacation, I manage my time to ensure that I have quality uninterrupted time with my family during the day and then get back into work early morning and late evenings.

What is a common misconception people have about what you or your company do?

They think that we were two guys in a basement who developed an app.  We are the opposite – we are business professionals that created a solution for the Industry and used technology  (iPhone app) to deliver the solution.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Picture a day when a business professional is able to get information from any country in the world without ever having to leave their office.

What else would you like people to know about your company?

We have a great Team of people that believe in what we do and why we do it.  We know that we do not live in a vacuum so we strive every day to give back to our community and to the world that we interact with each day.

The post Interview with Rick West of Field Agent appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Analyze, Design, Build & Repeat!

To borrow a phrase from one of our advertising partners “We slow up the blow up”. PrivacyStar provides an in-depth suite of services focused on communication control. Today, Smartphones are overwhelmed with inbound traffic. PrivacyStar’s Call Blocking, Text Blocking & Do Not Disturb features allow our users to regain some control over their Smartphones.

PrivacyStar was initially mistaken for an App Development organization. While it may be true that PrivacyStar is an App, make no mistake; we are NOT an App Developer. PrivacyStar as an organization is dedicated to consumer services for today’s mobile devices helping simplify people’s lives in the areas of privacy, protection and preference.

A better question might be: what doesn’t my work entail? Thankfully we’ve grown enough over the past 4 years that trash removal is no longer in the critical path of daily tasks. As Cofounder and COO of PrivacyStar I find myself involved in Operations, Development, Marketing, Sales and community outreach (among other things). Basically whatever it takes to keep growing PrivacyStar into a successful and thriving technology company.

PrivacyStar initially started down the path of a landline based service for filing complaints against Do Not Call violators. Within the first 6 months we came to the realization that selling anything into a landline service package would never happen. From that point we decided to go mobile and never looked back. Initially we began on Blackberry which at the time had over 50% of the mobile market share.

Change is the only guaranteed constant in a startup environment. Being able to make adjustments and learn quickly is very fulfilling to me. We succeed as a team and we fail as a team but we are constantly evolving and growing.

What do you dislike?

Nothing!

Depending on the product suite a carrier selects PrivacyStar can range from $0.99 to $2.99 per month. We made the decision early on to provide a quality service at a cost and avoid monetizing our platform with  ads and sponsored content.

How have you funded the company?

Primarily through Angels and State Incentives

The combination of my training as an analyst for the military and as an architect at Acxiom Corporation really prepared me to thrive in the ever changing and evolving world of a tech startup. The ability to analyze and act on information quickly has been one of the major factors in our success.

Growth and Talent development are a constant challenge. It is critical to find and select the right people with the right skill sets at the appropriate time. Maintaining an environment where each person has the opportunity to expand and grow their skills, while also maintaining a healthy life/work balance, is also critical in retaining a high quality team.

The Startup community in NWA appears to be gaining a lot of momentum and we here in Central Arkansas are watching and hopefully learning from the NWA example, particularly in the area of early stage startups.

Find great partners.  Often times you hear where a founder has outsourced critical components of the business in the early stages – it would make me nervous to not have someone truly “In the Boat” with me.

Never enough! Seriously I try to maintain a healthy life-work balance; a startup doesn’t always lend itself to a set annual vacation plan. But I have found the time is available within the cycles of a startup and that it is in everyone’s best interest to allow time to recharge the batteries.

I look forward to watching PrivacyStar evolve into a nationally recognized consumer privacy services company.

We are more than our product(s). At our core we want to create a healthy thriving technology company that becomes a pillar of our community creating jobs and recognized as a well-respected business partner.

The post Interview with Josh Smith of Privacy Star appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am the Founder and CEO of BLKBOXLabs.

How would you describe what your company does?

We are a full service creative studio.  We build websites, mobile applications, marketing strategies and campaigns, and much more.  Much like a black box in an airplane fully understanding the process of a flight, we great effort and intention into fully understanding and taking part in the events, iterations and decisions that ultimately define our partners and their products.  We do this by actively serving as a creative partner in thinking not simply about today but the future. By understanding the big picture, goals and aspirations of our partners, we are able to effectively take part in the process by which our partners and their products evolve.

What is unique about what your company does? 

We are very intentional about being a close partner with the organizations that we work with.  While we have services that are similar to other creative agencies, our greatest skills are utilized when we are able to apply our creativity to business models, revenue channels, and work closesly with our partners to identify places for improvement, growth, experimentation, etc, all while integrating that into the design of their physical and digital presences.

What does your work at BLKBOXLabs entail?

A little bit or a lot a bit of everything.  Because we are so early on, everyone is responsible for picking up wherever needed.  Everyday I take part in administrative, finances, business development, design, development, strategy and more.  We are a small team and everyone has their strengths, but as CEO I have to be aware and knowledgeable of everything we are doing, setting out to do, and how that impacts our business.

I absolutely love making and creating something from scratch. It is truly amazing what can happen when you start with one idea and through time and execution, that idea evolves into something much more complete and fulfilling than you could have ever imagined.

We feel strongly that how we start this thing will be reflective down the road in our culture and in our success.  We are doing a lot of things today that you would not ordinarily see a 9 week company do, but it is because we are surrounded by great, successful mentors who have taught us a lot and have helped prepare us to build and grow a meaningful company.

How did your company get started?  

My partner and I (Joey Nelson) were at a place in our careers where it was time to really test our skillsets outside the walls of the successful companies we were previously at.  Both being entrepreneurial, we explored how that might happen for quite some time.  A couple of clients asked if either of us had time to do some work for them, timing made sense, and from day one we were busy at work.

What do you like about owning/being part of a startup?

I absolutely love making and creating something from scratch.  It is truly amazing what can happen when you start with one idea and through time and execution, that idea evolves into something much more complete and fulfilling than you could have ever imagined.  That aside, my favorite part of it is building the team, providing jobs and experiences, teaching, all while learning and growing alongside people who have chosen to build something great and meaningful with our company.  That is my favorite part.  With the amazing team we have and are building, it is also an amazing feeling and experience to be able to be so integral in helping to impact or shape someone’s startup, small business, or big corporation through our client relationships.

What do you dislike?

This is the hardest question on here.  I am a strong beleiver in doing what you love.  I am currently doing everything that I love.

How does your company make money?

We make money usually one of three ways:

1. Through an hourly fee for any number of our services.

2. Through a bid, where we anticipate the amount of hours it takes to complete the task at hand.

3. Through a retainer, where our clients pay us a set amount of money, for a set amount of hours over the course of at least 6 months.

What are your company gross revenues?

We are only 9 weeks into BLKBOXLabs so our gross revenue can only be reflected in our first two months of operation.

How have you funded the company?

From day one, we were profitable.  Because of this, there has been no reason to take on any debt or investment.  Our company has grown naturally and we add to the team as we can and as makes the most sense.

Is there any specific education you received or skills you have that have helped you?

Every day of our lives provides an opportunity to learn, to be educated, to gain skills.  Whether its through a traditional means such as university or through trial and error or simple observation, I think that each of these experiences are crucial and are easily applied to every day company operations.  I have been blessed with a great some amazing opportunities and experiences.  I do beleive though, that you have to work really hard to gain those opportunities and experiences, but those opportunities and experiences are what teach you everything that you could never read in a book or learn from a teacher.

What is the most challenging thing facing your company?

Internal Growth

What is your opinion on the startup community and the business climate in NWA?

I have been very, very involved in the startup community for the last three years and its growth since when I first entered it is mind blowing.  While I am not as exposed to all its activity at the time (I have been head down trying to build BLKBOXLabs) I hear a lot about what is going on from time to time and it is simply amazing.  I am very proud to be a part of the community here and am excited about all of the people and organizations who are stepping up to support young entrepreneurs trying to build their future.  It is simply amazing and truly is reflective of the entrepreneurial history of Northwest Arkansas.

Currently, I try to make time to mentor and advise a small number of entrepreneurs regularly, as well as serve as a mentor for the ARK Challenge Accelerator and the Seed Hatchery Accelerator.

What advice would you offer someone considering starting a business?

Do what you love.  If you do what you love, your passion will allow you to do and experience things as well as open opportunities that you could never predict or expect.

How much time off do you get/take?

You get to take time off? Ha, everyone at BLKBOXLabs has the same vacation/time off policy.  Dont abuse it and you can take whatever you need, whenever you need it.

What is a common misconception people have about what you or your company do?

That we just build websites or mobile applications.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I have a thing that I tell people: “Don’t predetermine your future.”  I have a lot of goals and dreams, but I have found that when you set milestones and say I want to be something or go somewhere by this time, a couple things happen: you acheive it and set more or you fail and let it go, but either way, you are likely in tunnel vision to acheive those goals, missing exciting experiences or opportunities along the way, because you were so focused on that dream or goal.

I have no idea where I will be in 4 years.  4 years ago, I was working at an architecture firm about to graduate college.  What I do know is that we are building an amazing team behind a meaningful company and that is all I could ask for and am very proud of that.

What else would you like people to know about your company?

We are a group of young, cross disciplinary, creatives, doing what we love, and caring as much as we can for our partners/clients and our team, trying to build something meaningful for both our team and our partners/clients.  I couldn’t do this without the amazing team we have at BLKBOXLabs: Joey Nelson, Tarah Hill, Bridget Arrington, Mike Green, Jeremy Teff, Chase Hundley, Mac Wiley, Michael Mahler, and Sheriden Foster.  They are amazing people with extraordinary talents that allow us to do amazing things for amazing partners and clients.

The post Interview with Josh Clemence of BLKBOXLabs appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m the President and owner of NFlight Technologies.

How would you describe what your company does?  

We design, manufacturer, and sell camera systems and accessories for aircraft.

What is unique about what your company does? 

We are the only company that currently does what we do in our niche market.

What does your work at NFlight entail?

Everything from cleaning the bathroom to meeting with congressman about legislation that will impact our industry.

How did your company get started?  

Flying has always been my passion.  In an attempt to share my passion I started developing camera systems and realized there was a market for them.  My “dream” job with a fortune 500 company was at threat because of the economic downturn so it made sense to start my own business.

What do you like about owning/being part of a startup?  

I see the direct results of my work everyday, company does well I do well, company does bad I feel that too.

What do you dislike?  

Being a small company I have to do a lot of things that are outside of my skill set and interest, like accounting.  Its necessary but I have to force myself to do it.

How does your company make money?  

We make things and sell them for a profit.

How have you funded the company?  

I started the company with a $500 investment, from there I borrowed small amounts of money from family and friends and maxed out a few credit cards.

Is there any specific education you received or skills you have that have helped you?  

My background as a pilot is key to my role in the company.

What is the most challenging thing facing your company? 

Financing the changes needed to remain competitive.

What is your opinion on the startup community and the business climate in NWA?  

The NWA startup community is the best in the world.  I have worked with start-ups in California and Washington state and Arkansas is by far the most supportive state.

What advice would you offer someone considering starting a business?  

Go do it.

How much time off do you get/take?  

I believe life is work, I’m working all the time but it’s what I want to do.  I don’t count my time off.  The argument can be made that I work 80 hrs a week or that I work 4 depends on how you look at it.

What is a common misconception people have about what you or your company do?  

That its all glamour and adventure, there is a lot of work in any business.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?  

To be a source manufacturer of all of our products and lead the industry in innovation.

What else would you like people to know about NFlight?  

We are embedded in our industry and try to give back as much as possible to the aviation and start up community.

The post Interview with Patrick Carter of NFlight Technologies appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I own & operate Fayettechill Clothing Co.

How would you describe what your company does?

We are an outdoor clothing brand that represents the Ozark Mountains and recreation that is prevalent in the region.

What is unique about what your company does? 

We are the first outdoor brand to represent this region to the nation.  We also have partnered with Non-profits in the region to continue to preserve our natural areas and we sponsor the regions top athletes in Fly-fishing, Mountain Biking, Rock Climbing, & White Water Kayaking.

What does your work at Fayettechill entail?

Progressing the image of our brand and quality of products. Also, making sure we hit our short and longterm milestones that we have set in sales and operations.

How did your company get started?  

Started in college as a brand to represent Fayetteville with a minor Ozark region influence in the brand, we started with just t-shirts and hats.

What do you like about owning/being part of a startup?

Favorite aspect of running Fayettechill is I get to live the brand. What our company represents is what all of our employees & athletes represent which is being active, traveling, & getting outdoors.

What do you dislike?

None.

How does your company make money?

Selling products B2B & Direct to consumer.

What are your company gross revenues?

2012 –  $500,000-$1,000,000

2013-     $1,000,000+

How have you funded the company?

From my high school startup, Mow 2 Mow landscaping.

Is there any specific education you received or skills you have that have helped you?

Connections from University of Arkansas – Walton College of Business & Northwest Arkansas Entrepreneur Alliance have put me on the path where I am today.

What is the most challenging thing facing your company?

Progression of products where we are market leaders in the Specialty Outdoor Market.

What is your opinion on the startup community and the business climate in NWA?

It’s the best it has ever been. I’m always told when I’m traveling or talking to people out of the area that this region is a hidden gem. It’s just a matter of time until it’s widely known. The infrastructure is in place for major area growth.

What advice would you offer someone considering starting a business?

Know the business that your getting into, meet as many industry insiders as possible, & most importantly have a passion for the product or service.

How much time off do you get/take?

As much as I need. The other owners and myself have a great system of being able to run operations and progress the company while on the road.

What is a common misconception people have about what you or your company do?

I think with most operations people tend to over simplify companies. In our case, “just some dudes selling T-shirts.”

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Being the dominant outdoor brand in the mid south – The areas in a 5 hour radius of Fayetteville.

The post Interview with Mo Elliot of Fayettechill appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I run Blogs for Brands. We manage blogs…for brands.

We manage blogs for brands.

We work with about 20 full time freelance outdoor journalists who write for major publications like Outside Mag, Nat Geo, Men’s Journal, etc.

I edit the blogs, work with the writers, and manage the content.

I used to run the Trail’s Edge blog at Acumen, which was discontinued because the store didn’t do so well. The model still worked and is repeatable  I signed up a few brands, have some remarkable results, and here it is now.

The only limitation to my success is myself.

What do you dislike?

Too much travel, and too much office time (like 15 hours a day, 7 days a week). Not enough outside time.

Monthly retainer

How have you funded the company?

Bootstrap. Working other jobs.

Working in magazines for 7 years helps a lot.

Not keeping up with the work that we promise. 

It is getting MUCH better, especially with the guidance of good people.

Plan your route to profitability. Create 3 or 4 scenarios starting with worst case, then disappointing, then realistic, and then slightly better than realistic. But never best case. Let that take you by surprise.

Almost none. One Saturday per 3 months?

People think we’re a blogging agency. We’re really an ecommerce agency with very specific revenue goals.

To reach 75 publications.

We have an Addie Award winning design team.

The post Interview with Yoon Kim of Blogs for Brands appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

My job is to make things look good.  I’m also the founding partner of Archetype Productions.

How would you describe what your company does?

We’re a small-scale and multi-disciplinary design studio with motivation to create admirable brand experiences through web, print, film, and applications.

What is unique about what your company does?

I don’t know whether we’re unique or just strive to practice a good ol’ fashioned American work ethic, but at the end of the day our team takes a personal responsibility to ensure that everything that comes out of our shop is executed flawlessly. We’re all about the detail and this has really been our only business model from day one.

What does your work at Archetype Productions entail?

We’re small, so every piece of every project is more or less worked on by all of us. My favored role is being the creative guy. I’ll help develop a concept and will work to deploy it through my design toolbox. It’s kind of like being handed a bunch of legos from various sets and making something fresh out of a mixed bag of hidden gems.

How did your company get started? 

I had just completed my thesis in 2007 after a semester studying Maori music in New Zealand. I guess I was on track to pursue a doctorate in cultural anthropology but decided to take a semester off and return to Fayetteville to play music. Performing with several groups, I received an expedited crash course in ‘guerilla’ marketing by necessity.

I think most local startups would agree NWA is the place to be for growing a business. There’s unbelievable opportunity here and to me that can be credited to a uniquely southern influenced ecosystem…Organizations like the ARK Challenge and NWAEA are a huge win for us and have been a major contributor to establishing national credibility and bringing a lot of great talent to our backyard.

First of all, to stand out from every other band applying to SXSW you have to be doing something inventive. The music is one thing, how you look on paper and the web is another. So, being broke I started designing posters and websites for bands. I didn’t have any background in marketing, graphic design, or computer science but I really enjoyed the process. I remember my first flyer. It was cobbled together in Photoshop using low-res graphics found on a Google search. I think it was a cutout picture of Fidel Castro’s beard with bold Futura type, “The Fayettecong Trio.” Looking back, everything about that poster was terrible but seeing my bandmates’ faces light up as I handed them a print with their name on it made it well worth it.

I eventually got better and with a quickness. There were a few local ‘Jedi’ designers that were doing some amazing gig art at the time. Making mine look like as good as theirs was the goal and I really learned a lot by studying their composition. Sooner or later, all sorts of bands were asking me to design their posters, album covers, and websites. Within six months I was designing everything from wine labels in California to branding a security validation company in Virginia out of my house in Fayetteville. I had so much work that I couldn’t even keep up with my part time job at the University. So, at the end of that year was working full time under my anthropological inspired company name, Archetype Productions.

Later I moved out of the house and shared office space in downtown Fayetteville with my fiancé and marketing extraordinaire, Jeannette Balleza. I knew if I was going to keep up with the growth of the company I was going to need assistance. I reached out to my long time cohort, Mike Milburn, who left his budding career at a big agency to become part of the team. We took a legal ownership in the company and moved into a bigger facility to accommodate our growth after partnering our efforts with Emily Collins, my sister and founder of Cordial (a PR outfit with roots in the Bay Area). Today we’ve happily served around 200 clients on a national level from local coffee shops to Fortune 500 companies.

What do you like about owning/being part of a startup?

I just like being me and working with the people and clients I love.

What do you dislike?

Working 7 days a week.

How does your company make money?

Although we recently ventured into developing our own products, we are primarily a service driven company.

How have you funded the company?

We’ve bootstrapped Archetype from the ground up. Our assets are minimal and we don’t really have a need to own much fancy stuff. So monetarily speaking, I haven’t funded the company much at all.

Is there any specific education you received or skills you have that have helped you?

Although my background is in anthropology, my job at Archetype is not entirely unrelated. I work with new people everyday and help tell their story. From the technical side I’m completely self taught.

What is the most challenging thing facing your company?

Our biggest challenge is keeping up with our growth. It’s our full intent to deliver quality work to every client both big and small. Too much growth too fast can lead to quality oversight and we want to make sure that doesn’t happen.

What is your opinion on the startup community and the business climate in NWA?

I think most local startups would agree NWA is the place to be for growing a business. There’s unbelievable opportunity here and to me that can be credited to a uniquely southern influenced ecosystem. Yes, we have money, and yes we have Walmart, and those things are good, but I believe most importantly we develop long lasting and strong relationships. Organizations like the ARK Challenge and NWAEA are a huge win for us and have been a major contributor to establishing national credibility and bringing a lot of great talent to our backyard.

What advice would you offer someone considering starting a business?

Don’t forget to eat three meals a day.

How much time off do you get/take?

Sometimes you just have to take a trip and leave the laptop in the bag to recharge. I’ll definitely have those moments throughout the year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you or your company do?

The great thing is there aren’t too many misconceptions about what we do. At least that we’re aware of! Our clients understand the skill needed to produce a great logo or website and leave it to us to ensure it’s done professionally and we understand what they do couldn’t be done by anyone else. That mutual understanding really makes for great partnerships.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I try to just focus on what I can do today improve my business and my personal life and that usually will keep me busy enough. Today I think I would say I would like to release a solo album in the future.

What else would you like people to know about your company?

We have fun and love Fayetteville for so many reasons. Come see us!

The post Interview with Will Collins of Archetype Productions appeared first on Job Shadow.

Read as Candy Treft, RN talks about her career as a Travel Nurse.  Find her at www.thegypsynurse.com and on the Twitter feed in the sidebar of this interview. @TheGypsyNurse

What do you do for a living?

I work as a travel nurse throughout the United States.

As a travel nurse, I contract with a staffing agency to perform staff work duties in hospitals that are in need of temporary staffing.

I work 12 hour shifts/36 hours per week.  I am a night shift nurse.  My work generally starts at/around 7pm and ends at/around 7am.  My schedule is dependent on the hospital/facility needs.  Many times, I will work 3 12 hour shifts in a row then have several days in a row off.  My days off can occur anytime with no regard to weekends or holidays.

I began my nursing career as a single mother of two children.  I needed a stable means to provide for my family.  I had multiple friends/acquaintances that were nurses and they encouraged me to pursue the field due to the high demand, pay and stability in the market.

I love that I can make a difference in some people’s lives (and they in mine).

The post Interview with a Travel Nurse appeared first on Job Shadow.

Rand Fishkin

Aaron Wall-   Aaron is the founder of SEOBook, one of the oldest and most well  respected resources in online marketing.   Read his complete Job Shadow interview here:   JobShadow Interview with Aaron Wall.

Neil Patel- Neil is a well known serial entrepreneur who co-founded Crazy Egg and KISSmetrics.  He is also one of the sharpest SEO minds around.   Read his complete JobShadow interview here:  JobShadow Interview with Neil Patel.

Debra Mastaler-  Debra is a seasoned veteran and sought after speaker in the marketing community.  Read her complete JobShadow Interview here:  JobShadow Interview with Debra Mastaler.

James Agate-  James is the founder of Skyrocket SEO and well respected link builder guest blogging expert.  Read his full JobShadow.com interview here:  JobShadow Interview with James Agate.

Mike Ramsey-  Mike is a local search expert and the founder of Nifty Marketing.  Read his full JobShadow interview here:  JobShadow Interview with Mike Ramsey. 

John Doherty- John is the director of Distilled Agency’s New York branch.  He is a guest speaker in the SEO world and frequent guest blogger at SEOMoz.  Read his full JobShadow interview here:  JobShadow Interview with John Doherty.

Ian Lurie- Ian is the founder and CEO of Portent, Inc.  one of the leading internet marketing firms in North America.   Read his full JobShadow interview here:  JobShadow Interview with Ian Lurie.

Dr. Peter J. Meyers-  Dr. Meyers, of SEOMoz, combines his unique expertise in the fields of psychology and data science and applies it to the online world.  Read his full JobShadow interview here:  JobShadow interview with Dr. Peter J. Meyers.

Jonathon Colman-  Jonathon is an international speaker on all things internet marketing and is the Principal Experience Architect at REI.  Read his full JobShadow interview here:  JobShadow Interview with Jonathon Colman.

Jill Whalen- Jill is the owner of consultancy High Rankings and is one of the long standing voices in SEO.  You can read her full JobShadow interview here:  JobShadow Interview with Jill Whalen.

The post 11 SEO Pros to Virtually Job Shadow appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

 I am a serial entrepreneur. I co-founded Crazy Egg around 6 years ago and these days I spend all of my time on my current startup, KISSmetrics.

How would you describe what you do?

I help companies optimize their site. My software company, KISSmetrics, helps companies understand what causes their revenue to go up or down.

What does your work entail?

I spend the majority of my time marketing the startup. To writing blog posts, to speaking at conferences, to optimizing for conversions, I spend my time on marketing.

What’s a typical work week like?

It’s usually filled with calls and meetings. Here’s what my typical day looks like: http://www.quicksprout.com/2011/06/16/the-day-in-the-life-of-neil-patel/

How did you get started?

I didn’t get a paycheck until my 4th year. From years 0 to 3, I made $0.00 dollars.

When I was 16 I started looking for a job on sites like Career Builder. I then quickly learned how these job boards made millions, so I decided to start my own…AdiceMonkey. My job board failed, but I learned how to market my own site from it. From there I started a marketing agency.

What do you like about what you do?

I love helping other businesses succeed. It’s fun and exciting to see businesses grow and entrepreneurs succeed.

What do you dislike?

It’s a ton of work and a lot of hours. You get used to it after a while… but sometimes you get burned out.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I am compensated through stock and money. As a founder if the company succeeds, I succeed.

How much do you make?

I make enough where I don’t have to work anymore if I didn’t want to, and I don’t have to worry about rent or putting food on the table.

How much money did/do you make starting out? 

I didn’t make any money. I didn’t get a paycheck until my 4^th year. From years 0 to 3, I made $0.00 dollars.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

You need to learn how to be scrappy and hustle. As long as you work hard enough, learn from your mistakes, and you do whatever it takes to succeed, you’re cut out to be an entrepreneur.

Plus you need to learn to never quit.

What is most challenging about what you do?

It takes persistence. You can’t expect to solve a big problem over night or to become rich over night. Anything worth while takes time and energy.

What is most rewarding?

Helping other people out. It puts a smile on my face… which is why I love helping entrepreneurs and people out.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Don’t do it for the money. If you are really passionate about something and want to solve a problem, then you can consider being an entrepreneur. Don’t just become one because you want to be rich… there are a lot easier way to become rich.

How much time off do you get/take?

None. I work 24/7

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Once you start making money, things get easier. Funny enough, the more money you make, the more you find yourself working.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

One day I want to start a non-profit. I don’t know what kind of non-profit I want to start, but I know I want to start one.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Entrepreneurship is time consuming. It’s not an easy path and most entrepreneurs fail.

The post Interview with KISSmetrics co-founder Neil Patel appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am an online marketing consultant with the search marketing agency Distilled. I’m based in New York City, where I am also currently the Director of our office. While I am an online marketing consultant, my specialty and focus for the past few years has been search engine optimization (SEO).

How would you describe what you do?

The short version is that I am the person who gets to choose who shows up first in the search results. The long answer is that I work with websites of all sizes, from small and medium sized businesses to international corporations, to get them more targeted traffic from the search results so that they can build their business more effectively.

What does your work entail?

For my clients, I deal with everything from site architecture to onsite content to offsite content and linkbuilding, as well as how search marketing can and should integrate with the other marketing channels (paid, email, social, etc).

I love how the industry is constantly changing and that Google is always moving the goalposts for SEOs. I find pleasure in successfully executing a marketing campaign, whether it’s a linkbuilding or content campaign, and seeing the needle move for the client.

That’s the consulting section of my job. Internally at Distilled, I also try to be an advocate for the brand by being a public-facing figure that others can recognize. I speak at conferences to raise Distilled’s profile in and outside of the SEO industry. I also blog frequently on the Distilled and SEOmoz websites as well as on my own websites. The goal here is share information with others to teach them how to do their jobs and live their lives better. Finally in my director role in the NY office, I am responsible for overseeing the team (which is easy because my team is incredible) and working with our head of client development to ensure that we have enough of the right clients to keep the wallets and consultants happy.

What’s a typical work week like?

My week is incredibly varied, which makes it quite enjoyable. Mondays are full of meetings for most of the day, Tuesdays and Wednesdays are often reserved for client work, Thursdays I am onsite with clients for at least part of the day and the rest doing client work, and Fridays are usually for writing and administrative duties. In the evenings I will frequently meet up with colleagues or friends in the industry for drinks or dinner and talk shop.

How did you get started?

I got started in web marketing in 2009 when I was running an online book publishing company from Switzerland. I had no clue how to market books, so I started learning. I had to come back to the States in 2010 and I got a full time job as an in-house SEO and copywriter, which quickly went into technical SEO and linkbuilding because of my web development background. I guess you could say that I feel like I was always meant to get into SEO and online marketing because of my technical writing, web development, and blogging background.

What do you like about what you do?

I love how the industry is constantly changing and that Google is always moving the goalposts for SEOs. I find pleasure in successfully executing a marketing campaign, whether it’s a linkbuilding or content campaign, and seeing the needle move for the client.

I also love working with my team in NY and the other Distilled teams in London and Seattle. We have an incredibly smart group of people at Distilled, so being able to work with them and be pushed daily to learn and do more is a great challenge.

What do you dislike?

It’s hard to find much to dislike in my industry. Most people are wonderful and open and willing to share ideas and tips and give advice.

The thing I dislike the most is the trolls, who make everyone’s life a little less enjoyable. I get tired of drama and sometimes just want to get my head down and do work.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I am salaried with Distilled and also do a bit of freelance work on the side to set aside money for travel and vacations, which I like to take around the world. I’ve also learned how to make a bit of money through my own websites that I run, though I’m by no means an affiliate marketer. I make enough to cover my hosting and domain costs, basically, and that’s good enough for me.

How much do you make?

I make a comfortable salary through Distilled. Because we are a smaller agency, I don’t make the huge money that I could (and have been offered) at a large agency, but the ability to be creative with my time, work closely with awesome coworkers and clients, and engage in intrapreneurial projects within Distilled keeps me happy.

In SEO, people are paid anywhere between $30k;$50k as an entry-level analyst (depending on location of course) and then up from there.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

In my first full-time SEO job, I was in the $30k/yr range. It was enough to live on comfortably in Philadelphia in my life configuration at the time. As an example of a starting salary in NYC, check out this NYC SEO Analyst position listing.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

SEO is mostly a self-taught field, but I would say that you need a combination of technical abilities, content creation abilities, and relationship building abilities to truly be successful as an online marketer, and especially in SEO/search. Outside of those skills, which can be learned, I think it helps to have a strong work ethic (we call it “hustle” at Distilled), curiousity about life and how things work, and interests outside of marketing so that you can see your job in creative ways.

What is most challenging about what you do?

There are two challenging parts of my job, one related directly to work and the other related to how work affects life.

The toughest part of my actual job, for me, is project planning and management. I’ve become a good consultant over the year, but project management has always been a challenge for me and is something I am focusing on becoming better at during 2013.

Another challenging part of my job is unplugging from it and enjoying life outside of work. It’s very easy when you work on the Internet to allow it to dominate your life, and it did dominate my life for a few year while I was establishing myself in the industry. Now, however, I am realizing that a need a better work/life integration so I’m trying to prioritize friends, hobbies, and relationships higher than I ever have. I think it’s paying off.

What is most rewarding?

I guess you could say the most rewarding part of consulting is affecting change through the organization and seeing traffic and conversion numbers rise. I have found a lot of reward in turning around marketing programs that are not working well or are downright misguided and unsuccessful. I have a client that has gone from buying a lot of links 2 years ago, before I worked with them, to now engaging in quality content marketing where they are getting links and social shares, and their business is seeing a real impact.

The most rewarding part of the other parts of my job is the satisfaction that comes from a presentation that was delivered well or a new connection made with another person in the industry (usually just a new friend).

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

If you start doing marketing and you love it, learn everything that you can. Experiment with as much as you can and try your hand at all the different parts of online marketing – email, SEO, CRO, PPC, social, affiliate marketing. Once you find what you actually enjoy and are good at, then focus on that.

How much time off do you get/take?

Because Distilled is a UK-based company, I am given 4 weeks of paid vacation every year. That is not typical for most people in the US though, and I fully recognize that. I try to take as much of that as possible. In 2012 I spent 9 days in Switerland, 5 days in Colorado, 10 days in Costa Rica, and 6 days in Virginia. Some of those trips include weekends.

I used to do a bit of work during my vacations, but now I try to unplug as much as possible. I’m lucky to have a great team that can support my clients when I am gone if anything goes wrong, but also try to communicate very frequently and clearly with my clients about when I will be unavailable. This often means pre-loading work, so the week before vacation is always very busy, but this enables me to take time to recharge.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Most people equate SEO with spamming the Internet, or pumping out large quantities of crappy content to build links back to a website. In fact, I try to, and encourage my clients to, add as much value as possible in everything they do online, as this comes back to you in spades with sales, repeat customers/brand advocates, as well as links and social shares.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I have a lot of dreams and goals for the future. I would like to run my own company one day. One of my goals is to found a company that eventually grosses over $10M per year. I plan to keep traveling and speaking and writing, because those are the things that I really enjoy about my industry and career, and it’s an area that if you keep investing you receive so many side benefits.

On a personal level I hope to have a family someday and would love to live in the Western US, most likely in Colorado in the Denver or Boulder area but that’s a few years off. I have unfinished business in New York City!

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Online marketing can be an incredibly fulfilling career, but it’s necessary to realize that your career is not your life, and is not what defines you. You also need activities outside of work to keep you fresh and teach you new skills or ways of thinking that can then effect your job in positive ways. I love Jerry Colonna’s ideas of work/life integration, instead of work/life balance.

The post Interview with John Doherty of Distilled appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I run an online marketing company Skyrocket SEO – we specialise in link building campaigns for digital agencies and major brands. I’m also an investor and advisor to a couple of other companies.

How would you describe what you do?

With great difficulty. As soon as you start talking about “links”, to people outside of the industry they instantly glaze over

That being said, I tell people I work in online marketing and if they show an interest and ask me questions I usually go into a bit more detail. This usually involves an explanation that goes something like… “You know Google, well when you search Google, certain websites come up. We work with those websites to help improve their visibility when you search for the products and services they offer BUT more specifically we do this by acquiring relevant links from other web pages to our clients because one of the main ways Google assesses where to rank a page is based on how many links a page has and the quality and relevance of those links.”

What does your work entail?

My typical day involves clearing my inbox in the morning, having a catchup with team members, providing any training and support as necessary. Then I will probably check through progress of campaigns and discuss with our operations manager. In the afternoon I will sometimes dive into client work myself if I get the time, writing a blog post for our company site, speaking with clients or putting together proposals.

Don’t do it for the money, because it is a seriously consuming career, you have to LOVE it so make sure you do before you commit to a career in it.

In terms of what the work we actually do entails… the life of an SEO building links is pretty varied from sourcing relevant opportunities (other web pages that might be interested in linking), devising pitches, making contact and building relationships. Someone building links for a living needs excellent time management and organisation skills but at the same time needs to be creative and relentless.

What’s a typical work week like?

Skyrocket SEO as a company actually runs 24/7 because we have a cloud-based workforce that are involved in the various pieces of the puzzle that comes with building links for clients. So we have people in every time zone from Sydney to Los Angeles.

This means that for me that my work week running a business of this nature is pretty varied and frequently longer than I’d hope.

I would say that my time divides into the following:

Client contact – 50%
New business generation – 20%
Actual client work – 20%
Business running stuff – 10%
How did you get started?

I started working for a large international company helping them deploy digital in one of their departments (even though, at the time, I was basically just one step ahead of my bosses there in terms of my knowledge of online marketing. I’d be learning it one day then presenting it to them the next day). I started running my own websites experimenting with making money online, enough to quit my full-time job then I picked up a few consulting gigs and Skyrocket grew from there.

What do you like about what you do?

The variety. I know everyone says that about their job but genuinely there are so many nuances to this business that if you get bored with the actual work you probably aren’t pushing yourself enough.

What do you dislike?

Sometimes it can be frustrating needing to change direction or at least amend a particular strategy that you were working towards because the industry goal-posts have shifted – remember we are all at the behest of Google. It can often feel like you don’t control your own destiny in this business.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I get a salary and then take a dividend based on company performance.

How much do you make?

I take a 5-figure salary and then I top up my income with dividends that vary according to how well the company performs.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

Not a great deal, and that is fairly typical because lower-level SEO positions don’t pay particularly well but if you get your head down, connect with others in the industry and more importantly do good work then you can advance fast and find yourself in a position that pays very well when compared with say other people your age, with similar experiences in other industries. My point is that SEO is a pretty lucrative business to be involved with.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

None as such and I guess that’s part of the difficulty. Most agencies want graduates but I personally feel like that’s not a necessity, I myself dropped out of University. If you work hard, you’re ambitious and you’ve got a relentless attitude then you’ll be able to thrive in this business.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Staying abreast of the changing techniques and best practices.

What is most rewarding?

Seeing how we make a difference to businesses whether that be helping to grow revenue or taking the strain off a department by providing an outsourced service. I’d be lying if I said that I’m not motivated by money as well and if you can do a good job then there is decent money to be made in this business.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Don’t do it for the money, because it is a seriously consuming career, you have to LOVE it so make sure you do before you commit to a career in it. Keeping up to date with such a fast paced industry is quite frankly tiring. Also it is likely you’ll become a little “obsessed” with details and experiments to the point where you lose track of where the work week ended and the weekend began.

How much time off do you get/take?

You will also find that the SEO community (in terms of industry peers) is like NOTHING you’ll have experienced. I can honestly say that the people in the business (who are actually competing against you in theory for jobs or clients) are some of the most willing, helpful and down to earth people I have ever come across.

Hmm I’ve not had a completely “switched off” day off for 3 years. Even when I go away for a holiday, the laptop comes and I check emails. To be fair though this is probably more to do with being a business owner than an SEO but that being said, it’s not the kind of industry you jump into if you are just looking for a 9-5.

There are a handful of companies out there that offer extremely generous holiday/vacation time.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That it’s dead easy and anyone can do it.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

To grow a business I’m proud of, achieve an exit and do it all over again in another industry

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Having a sense of humour is really important in SEO – there are definite points where if you don’t laugh it off you’d probably cry

You will also find that the SEO community (in terms of industry peers) is like NOTHING you’ll have experienced. I can honestly say that the people in the business (who are actually competing against you in theory for jobs or clients) are some of the most willing, helpful and down to earth people I have ever come across. Sometimes this is to the downfall of the industry as there is a tendency to spend too much time within our own bubble but if you are looking for an industry where your peers are pretty cool and easy to get along with then look no further.

The post Interview with James Agate of Skyrocket SEO appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Basically, I do SEO consulting and training with companies of all sizes.

How would you describe what you do?

Mainly I review websites and how they’re performing for the company and provide advice, recommendations and training as to how they might do a better job of meeting their targeted traffic goals. My main focus is on increasing their organic Google traffic.

What does your work entail?

For a typical SEO website audit (which is what most of my work is these days), I first read through my client’s questionnaire that I provide them with when they sign on for an audit. This gives me an idea of what their business is about, who their target audience is and what their overall goals are. It also tells me if they’ve been losing Google traffic over time, or if they are mainly just looking to kick things up a notch.

Then I’ll dig into their Google Analytics to see what’s going on there and make note of whether or not they seem to have been hit by any of the Google updates that have happened over the past few years (Panda and Penguin). After that I browse through the client’s website and take notes and make screenshots of possible problem areas. Once I’ve got a good handle on the website, what it has got going for it and where it needs help, I’ll document it all in a site audit report and send it off the to client. After they’ve had a chance to digest the information, they have the opportunity to have a phone consultation to go over it together and have me answer any additional questions.

…if you really want to get involved, you will need to separate yourself from them by really and truly knowing what you’re doing and being able to provide concrete results for your clients…Work for an established agency if you can where you can learn by others who get great results for their clients. If you can’t do that then work for free or for a very low cost to clients so that you can use their sites to practice on. You should also have your own site that you use to test what works and what doesn’t.

If I’m also doing in-house SEO training for the client, I’ll then put together a custom presentation based on my findings from the website audit and spend a day with the marketing, IT and PR teams of the company. This helps them better understand how to implement the recommendations and also provides them with the knowledge and skills to continually keep SEO in the back of their mind when making any changes or adding any content to the website.

What’s a typical work week like?

If it’s a High Rankings Advisor newsletter week (every other week) I have to make time for that. For the newsletter I usually spend most of Tuesday writing it, then send it off to my proofreader by 5:00 pm. Then I post it on my site on Wednesday and send it all out in the newsletter, usually by around noon.

Most weeks I work on just one client’s website audit and/or training. And of course there’s the answering of emails, responding to comments on the newsletter/blog site, and moderating the High Rankings Forum, sending invoices, keeping up with industry news, etc.

I also have a couple of industry friends on IM that I might chat with a bit if I see something interesting or funny on Twitter or Facebook. I typically have Twitter running on one of my screens and glance over at it now and then. If I’m bored or just need a break I might also check out Facebook.

I work from my home office so I’ll usually just eat lunch at my desk while catching up with news. And up until a month or so ago when I hurt my back, I used to take a yoga class on Tuesdays and Thursdays at noon. That was a nice break in the day which helped to energize me. I’m hoping to get back to doing that soon.

How did you get started?

I have been online since the early 1990’s and had a parenting chat room on the old IRC. In about 1993 or so, I figured out how to create a parenting website for the chatroom. I wanted to learn how to get it found in the search engines of the day (Lycos, Infoseek, Excite, etc.) and realized that for the most part in those days it was the words on the page that provided relevance to the search engines. Eventually I started creating websites for some of my parenting friends I had met in the chatroom, and would also offer SEO services to them. (Although it wasn’t called that back then.) I always hired copywriters for the sites and would teach them to simply be more descriptive when they wrote so that the search engines would understand what the site was all about. And thus the SEO copywriting industry was born!

Eventually I stopped designing websites (I wasn’t very good at it) and focused only on the SEO component as that was a good niche at the time. There weren’t very many people doing it in those days and I had made a bit of a name for myself in the latter part of the 1990’s within online marketing circles through many email newsletter lists that I was on. I also started consulting a lot about technical SEO issues, especially during a website redesign as I would see so many business lose their search engine traffic after they went live with a new site.

What do you like about what you do?

First and foremost I like the freedom that working for myself provides me. A few years ago I tried the whole office and employees thing, but it really wasn’t for me. I wasn’t able to be profitable as most of what I do is based on my own knowledge base from so many years of experience. As far as the work goes, I really like reviewing websites. I have a knack for looking at just about any site and knowing pretty quickly what its basic flaws are and the things that they could change which would make it likely to perform better in the search engines.

What do you dislike?

Taxes. I dislike getting all the information together to get them done, and I dislike having to pay so much of my hard earned money to Uncle Sam.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Most of what I do these days are one-off reports or training classes so I get paid for each of those. I insist on payment up front for all my work as I’ve been burned in the past when I didn’t do that. While my prices aren’t the cheapest around, they’re generally low enough that my clients can afford to pay it up front. Most of my clients know me from my newsletter and have a certain level of trust in me already, so having them pay up front isn’t usually a problem. If it is, I tell them I can’t work for them then. You’d be surprised how many somehow find a way to pay up front if they really want to work with me!

How much do you make? 

I typically net in the 6 figures now that I am back to having no overhead. And that’s with me being very picky on which clients I’ll work with.

I’ve been trying to work fewer hours and with fewer clients these days, but with Google constantly putting out new Penguin and Panda updates, many companies to need my services more than ever. I hate to turn them down if I’m pretty sure I can help them. But I wouldn’t expect someone starting out on their own in SEO to make that much until they had many years of experience.

In some ways SEO has become a commodity where it’s hard to charge what it may be worth to the client. It’s really important to build up trust and also a name for yourself if you want to be able to charge enough to make a decent living.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

I think the first year I did some paid work in the 1990’s I made $500

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

It’s hard to say. I didn’t have any education as far as SEO goes because the field didn’t even exist when I went to college. And sadly, from what I understand, even in college marketing courses today they don’t have many courses that involve search marketing.

But I think you can be good at SEO if you have a good understanding of marketing and also some experience with HTML. SEO has two main components, the marketing side and the technical side. If you can understand both of those aspects, you could be very good at it. I find that the best SEOs are both right-brained and left-brained rather than having one be dominant.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Trying to figure out what exactly might have been the cause for a site to lose a good percentage of their Google traffic. It’s kind of like a puzzle and in some ways it can be like going back in time when reviewing Google Analytics from past years.

What is most rewarding?

When my recommendations are implemented and the website in question gains the targeted search engine traffic that they were hoping for.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

It’s a pretty crowded space right now. And it’s also full of snake oil salesmen. So if you really want to get involved, you will need to separate yourself from them by really and truly knowing what you’re doing and being able to provide concrete results for your clients. Do not just do the things that you read about in SEO blogs, but have a real understanding of what is necessary for each website.

They’re all different and they all need different things. Work for an established agency if you can where you can learn by others who get great results for their clients. If you can’t do that then work for free or for a very low cost to clients so that you can use their sites to practice on. You should also have your own site that you use to test what works and what doesn’t.

How much time off do you get/take?

Pretty much as much as I want. I’ll often combine vacations with teaching SEO seminars or speaking at search marketing conferences. But I can also work from anywhere, so I can travel somewhere for fun and still put in a few hours a day if I want to. Because I love what I do, it really doesn’t feel like work most of the time.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

With all the SEO spam that’s out there, people who don’t know what real SEO is will of course assume that I trick the search engines. Which of course is the exact opposite of what I do: Help websites to be the best they can be for people AND search engines.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Because my kids are all adults now, I’m at the point where I’m trying to work less. I’d like to potentially keep doing some SEO training seminars in various cities around the world, especially places where I haven’t been before.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Good SEO is very hard these days. There are no quick fixes for most websites. Anyone who wants to do it as a career needs to understand that. It’s all about making a great, usable site that is better than the competition, which is a lot of work!

Most should probably start out learning just a few aspects of SEO and specializing in those areas rather than trying to know everything. I have always found that becoming an expert in one area is much more satisfying (and can make more money) than knowing a little bit about lots of areas.

The post Interview with Jill Whalen of High Rankings appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a website marketing consultant.

How would you describe what you do?

I work with online business owners to create effective marketing strategies to increase their search engine rankings, drive targeted traffic and build brand.

What does your work entail?

A lot of historical and statistical analysis! Once a client retains my services, I spend a good deal of time researching their website statistics, media influence and competitive intelligence. From there I can create a targeted list of marketing tactics and sources a client can use to drive traffic and search rankings.

What’s a typical work week like?

I am in the office Monday through Friday from 9:00 am until 4:00 pm. I spend several hours reading every day and the remaining time in research and reporting mode. I make a point to visit a number of SEO forums several times a week and participate on the SEOBook forum daily.

How did you get started?

Alliance-Link has been in operation since late 2000, it came about while I owned and operated a directory featuring organic food and clothing. When I started to rank well for a large number of money terms, business owners advertising in my directory asked if I could I help them “optimize” their sites. I had no clue what that meant so I started looking around for information and found the now defunct Rank Write newsletter by Jill Whalen and Heather Lloyd Martin. Jill took the time to explain what I was doing and how SEO influenced a website’s visibility in the search engines and from there, Alliance-Link was born.

Prior to Alliance-Link I spent 15 years in the marketing department of Anheuser-Busch and four years in the Civil Service. Both jobs provided valuable marketing experience in sales, promotions and publicity. It was an invaluable experience and a large part of why I work the way I do today

What do you like about what you do?

I enjoy researching different industries and developing creative and custom marketing plans. I love analyzing numbers and dreaming up ways to drive traffic. I also like the flexibility I have being a sole-proprietor, I usually stick to a Monday through Friday schedule but like the fact I can take a day when I need it and not inconvenience anyone.
What do you dislike?

I dislike being sedentary for long periods of time, I recently purchased a stand-up desk which helps!

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I offer two types of consultations and charge a flat fee for each. Most clients use PayPal although there are some who still prefer to cut checks!

How much do you make?

I am very comfortable and can easily support myself.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

When I started Alliance-Link in 2000 I made less than $10,000 the first year. Suffice to say I’ve come a long way since then.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

The type of consulting I do requires a fair amount of experience in marketing, I think you’d be hard-pressed to develop creative and innovative media relations, promotional, email or sales driven tactics if you didn’t have the experience to draw from. You also need to be organized and a dedicated researcher. You can create fun tactics all day but if you don’t understand the demographic behind a website or how to find them, you can’t develop tactical recommendations.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Keeping up with the constant changes being made at Google, Bing and Yahoo as well as the major social media sites!

What is most rewarding?

When happy clients come back six months later to share their success stories and say “thank you”.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Before you go solo, work for a brand or agency for a couple years to learn the ropes. Focus on learning how the media really works (there is so much more than issuing press releases), how to create and track a promotion and how to build an email list.
Look for established players, watch how they promote themselves and what they’re saying. It is human to develop favorites but don’t discount anyone.

New business won’t come to you initially, you’ll have to work to earn a reputation just like you would in any industry.
Find a forum or online community and get involved, the relationships you make will last a lifetime and you will constantly learn something new.

Once you go solo, invest in good equipment, dual screens are a must. Backup every night.
Budget for at least one industry conference a year. Go, learn, network. Once you’ve done a couple, pitch to speak.

How much time off do you get/take?

I schedule several weeks of vacation a year and have the flexibility to take days when I need them.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

People outside the SEO community hear the word “website marketing consultant and immediately think that’s code for “web designer”.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

To continue with my consulting business and develop my small but growing media company.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

My job is no different than anyone else’s, my compensation and satisfaction are tied to my efforts.

The post Interview with Debra Mastaler of Alliance Link appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a Marketing Scientist for SEOmoz, a marketing analytics company based out of Seattle.

How would you describe what you do?

My slightly made-up title is sort of a compromise to reflect the reality that I’m roughly half marketer and half data scientist. As a marketer, I produce content, including blog posts and more permanent pieces, to grow our brand and attract visitors. As a data scientist, I essentially study Google – I track changes in the underlying algorithm and changes in search features. This research also drives content, so there’s definitely a back-and-forth.

What does your work entail?

A lot of writing, a lot of analysis, a fair amount of programming, and a ton of communication. A data scientist in the business world really has to be able to look at a mountain of information and try to find the story in it.

I’d just encourage people not to think too narrowly about roles and job descriptions. If you only apply to the jobs that get listed, you’ll always end up being defined by someone else’s expectations. You don’t have to start your own company to do something unique – you can forge your own job description even within someone else’s company. It takes time and work, but it’s absolutely worth the effort and risk.

To really be successful, you have to be able to not only find that story, but make it compelling (in an honest way, of course). In many ways, I think of myself as a story-teller – it’s just that my stories are driven by data.

What’s a typical work week like?

My role is somewhat my own invention, so it really varies. I write almost every day (I try to carve out at least 30 minutes), and I collect/analyze data daily. My data collection is driven by engines I’ve designed and built most of myself, so there’s usually some coding (PHP/MySQL, for the most part). I have meetings, but not a ton, since I work remotely (out of Chicago). I always carve out time to learn new skills and just to think about big ideas.

How did you get started?

That’s a bit of a long story. My undergraduate degree was in Computer Science and Psychology, but I graduated in 1992 and a career in comp. sci. was still pretty traditional. So, I went to graduate school and got a Ph.D. in Experimental Psychology. Between those two graduations (1992-1997), the internet really hit the public world, and I went to work as the first employee of a web-based software start-up.

I’ve never regretted taking a short-term risk to do something more worthwhile, enjoyable, and lucrative in the long-term. If you’re terrified to take a step back, you’ll probably ending up moving incrementally through your career.

I helped grow that company to 15 people and just shy of $2M over 8 years, but then decided it was time for a change and went to work for myself for about 6 years. I started working with SEOmoz a couple of years ago as a contractor, and loved the culture and the work. Gradually, I built a role for myself and decided to go full-time late in 2012.

What do you like about what you do?

I love being in a “science” that’s so new. It’s easy to discover things that no one has bothered to dig into, and it’s a bit like the Wild West right now. I’m finding more questions than answers most days, and that’s exciting. I have a ton of flexibility, and I really enjoy writing for a well-read blog. I’m also surrounded by amazing co-workers and peers, which has really upped my game.

What do you dislike?

Working remotely can be challenging, although it’s something I’ve done for quite a while. I have two kids, so I love being home at times, but you really have to work to stay connected to your co-workers. Like any job, there are some tedious aspects to my day, but right now I’m really enjoying 90% of the role.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I’m technically an independent contractor, but I’m full-time.

How much do you make?

I’d rather not get into details, but low six-figures.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

My first year of full-time work? About $30K, if I recall. My first year of working for myself? About $4K, after expenses It’s been a roller coaster, but I’ve never regretted taking a short-term risk to do something more worthwhile, enjoyable, and lucrative in the long-term. If you’re terrified to take a step back, you’ll probably ending up moving incrementally through your career.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

That’s a tough question right now. For search marketing in general, it’s wide open on the education/schooling front. There aren’t a lot of formal programs. Some companies look for college degrees, and some don’t. Technical skills are certainly important. Most companies are more interested in what you’ve done or can show that you’re capable of – putting together your own projects and sites can be a huge advantage. For data science, a formal education is certainly more common – although it could be in a variety of fields.

What is most challenging about what you do?

The difficulty of being on the frontier is that you don’t always have a lot of guidance for whether you’re heading in the right direction. It’s exciting, but I take a lot of missteps. It’s important to work for people who understand that that’s part of the process. The tools to do what I do are being invented as we speak, and so it’s really important to be able to self-learn on a constant basis. I love that, so I’m not sure I’d call it “challenging” in any negative sense, but carving out the time is a challenge.

What is most rewarding?

Discovering something new is the biggest reward for me, especially when it helps people do their jobs better.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Be curious – about how things work, about what makes people tick, about anything, really. Curiosity is probably the driving force behind data science, and it leads to the kind of passion that can also make you a good marketer. Connect with people early and often – don’t want until you’re between jobs to network. Building up relationships takes years, and it’s vital to your long-term career opportunities.

How much time off do you get/take?

Although I’m technically a contractor, I do get paid vacation. It’s about 3 weeks, I think.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

For search marketing, many people still just see the snake oil side. What’s funny is that I actually spent a lot of time on the usability side of the fence, and I got back into search when I saw how much it had evolved. Google is a massive filter for the world’s information, and our job is to try to make our information worth passing through that filter. Done right, that means creating content that people want.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’m really just starting on this leg of the journey, and I’ve always seen my career as more evolutionary than revolutionary. I’d like to do something more philanthropic down the road, but I think even that would involve what I’m learning as a marketer and data scientist. Right now, I’m a bit Google-obsessed, and I’d like to expand that a bit (before I start wearing tinfoil hats). This is a fast-moving industry, though, and it’s hard to say where any of us will be in 5-10 years.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I’d just encourage people not to think too narrowly about roles and job descriptions. If you only apply to the jobs that get listed, you’ll always end up being defined by someone else’s expectations. You don’t have to start your own company to do something unique – you can forge your own job description even within someone else’s company. It takes time and work, but it’s absolutely worth the effort and risk.

The post Interview with Marketing Scientist Dr. Peter J. Meyers appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am the President of Nifty Marketing which focuses on local search marketing for small and large businesses across the country. I also own The Voice which is a free weekly print newspaper delivered to around 17,000 households in Southern Idaho.

How would you describe what you do?

We just moved Nifty Marketing to an awesome new location that has a ton of sidewalk traffic and big open windows. We don’t really work with local businesses in my hometown so we haven’t gotten around to putting signs on our building yet. People will come in the front door (as the building used to be a popular boutique store) and ask what we do and a couple days ago one of my employees said, “We Internet Market Businesses”. Clearly, the statement came out wrong, but it has stuck and we got a marker and wrote that on the outside of our office building windows for passerby’s.

Technically speaking, we work with companies that are looking to gain customers in geographic specific markets. We do this with search engine optimization, paid online advertising, content marketing, social media, and other various channels. I personally think “We Internet Marketing Businesses” works just fine though.

What does your work entail?

That is a hard question to answer as it always changes. I am a startup guy. I have two companies that were bootstrapped so there isn’t much I haven’t done from janitorial duties to bookkeeping. So, instead of talking about everything I will talk about what I consider the most important things I do, and the things I need to spend more time one.

1. I hire talent. This is my hardest job. I live in Burley, Idaho and have to compete against big city markets and it’s hard to attract and keep great team members. So, I have to do whatever is necessary to find and keep people who I can trust.

I have learned the true meaning of wealth. It’s the difference between what you make and what you spend.

2. I study. I am so passionate about search and advertising that I find myself spending a large amount of time studying the industry by ready blogs, case studies, researching, and analyzing. The search industry moves fast enough that if you don’t continue learn and improve, you will fail.

3. I teach. I try to share everything I know to the search community and my employees by blogging and speaking about various topics. This keeps me focused on progressing myself and my team members and it also keeps me in front of the search community.

4. I think. This is the most draining part of the job. I think all the time about how to grow the businesses, how to help clients, how to position ourselves, new opportunities, internal growing pains, competition and a thousand other things. I talk to people about my thoughts. I ask for advice. I give advice. But I think a lot.

What’s a typical work week like?

I used to put in well over 70+ hours a week. I quickly realized that was not sustainable as I came to understand the statement that man shouldn’t run faster than they have been given strength for. This was largely due to me not delegating enough responsibilities and totally burning out ever few months and being sick and worthless for a week or more. So, now, I work 40-60 hours per week. I travel a lot for work (mainly speaking events). I work from my home office which is less than 2 miles from both my business offices about 60% of the time.

I have learned that I am not trying to take my companies public, I don’t need to grow them quickly to pay back investors, and I need to focus on sustainability and the right type of growth. I do this best when I am able to balance my home life that includes 2 kids (with another on a way) and my wonderful wife Hillary with the demands of work. Most things can wait. If you have too many things that can’t wait, then you need more help.

How did you get started?

I was employed as the CMO of a regional pest control company right out of college. I had done door to door sales for them all through my summers in order to pay for school and worked my way up. I had a nice fat contract in place before I graduated with my Business Management degree and I had started to build a house in my hometown of Burley, Idaho as I could work from anywhere. Since the pest control company was making a move to the internet I decided that in my last semester of school I should take a class on internet marketing and another class on html. I loved them both and built a couple of really crappy websites like this one. It was all for fun, but I did learn a lot.

When it came to my job, things changed rapidly and it was clear that I needed to leave the pest control business. At the time, I was building a home that I could no longer afford in a town where there was no job opportunities. On top of that my wife was pregnant with our first child.

I was desperate. I am religious and I prayed. I don’t care whether people believe in God, or believe in themselves but it takes two things to start a business in the situation that I did. Faith, and Foolishness. I had both. I felt very strongly that I needed to start a business and needed to do so in Burley, Idaho. Our town needs businesses that bring in revenue from other areas but can provide local jobs. I dove in 100%. That was 2008.

The newspaper is a much longer and harder story to tell. It started in 2010.

What do you like about what you do?

I love business. I love the strategy behind decision-making. Like my friend from the A-Team… I love it when a plan comes together. I also love teaching. I always wanted to be a teacher. My mom taught Special Education and loved what she did. That inspired me. I also love art. I suck at making it, but I am really good at understanding why certain things look good and why certain things don’t. I appreciate it. Last, I love tech. Shiny new ideas, gadgets, and technologies are as exciting to me as lego’s are to my son. I thought I would have to choose between these but I have been lucky enough to find an industry that includes them all. What more could I ask for?

What do you dislike?

Google. It’s kind of a love/hate relationship that I don’t want to talk about.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Both of my businesses are B2B recurring revenue models. Nifty has a monthly retainer for our services that can range from $500-$50,000 per month. The newspaper signs contracts with businesses for certain ad placement and sizes on a weekly basis.

I love business. I love the strategy behind decision-making….I always wanted to be a teacher. My mom taught Special Education and loved what she did. That inspired me. I also love art…Last, I love tech. Shiny new ideas, gadgets, and technologies are as exciting to me as lego’s are to my son. I thought I would have to choose between these but I have been lucky enough to find an industry that includes them all. What more could I ask for?

How much do you make?

I pay myself $48,000 per year. Everything else stays in the business to grow and start new projects with. Occasionally I will take out more based on specific situations or needs.

My wife and I worked really hard during school to stay out of debt and save money. So, we are currently debt free. We own our cars, our home and have a really low cost of living. It’s actually hard to find things to spend money on in small towns. We are cheap. The only thing I spend money on is Apple products and traveling. I could take a spending wage 3-5x this if I wanted, but I have learned the true meaning of wealth. It’s the difference between what you make and what you spend. Right now, my business is making a lot and spending very little. I do the same. Cash is king and if you have it, you can make the right business decisions at the right time. Especially if you own 100% of your business.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

I didn’t take a dime the first year. I had $50,000 I had saved over the course of college to get up and running with.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Reading, Writing, and Arithmetic. Add passion to that list and you can learn anything. Most of the things being done in the Internet marketing field aren’t taught in a classroom. They are learned in forums, blogs, and private conversations.

What is most challenging about what you do?

The constant change. It’s exciting, but very difficult to stay on top of.

What is most rewarding?

Providing jobs for good people who deserve them in a town where work is hard to come by.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Being willing to learn, share, and change constantly. Be honest in your work to clients, your employees, and employers, and learn to diversify away from Google.

How much time off do you get/take?

In 2012 I was out of town for almost 3 months. I work on the road. I enjoy what I do. I speak at a lot of industry events. I don’t consider it work even though it is. I had one “off the grid” trip this past year. I went to Turkey for a couple weeks.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That is is a bunch of crazy tricks and dirty secrets. Google has done a good job of smearing the SEO industry with one hand and dangling a carrot from the other.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

1. Help people in my community start successful businesses that keep our town growing.
2. Provide many more jobs to good people in Idaho.
3. Serve in my church. I spent two years in England as a missionary and loved it. I want to do something like this again with my wife.

I’m a fairly simple guy. Making and spending money hasn’t ever been the major motivation for me. I have enough to cover my needs and wants. If those needs and wants change I will pay myself more money. Personally, I get more joy out of the journey my businesses are on than I could imagine at a destination. Being an employer can be difficult, but it is extremely rewarding.

The post Interview with Mike Ramsey of Nifty Marketing appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m the Principal Experience Architect for REI, a multi-channel outdoor gear and apparel retailer in the United States. You can find me on my blog, Twitter @jcolman, Google+, and on Slideshare.

How would you describe what you do?

As a content strategist, I work as part of a great, dynamic, cross-functional team help make REI’s web content work better for our customers, which in turn supports our business.

It’s part of a virtuous circle: the more we can support our customers and help them meet their goals, the more they’ll support us, which helps us support them even more.

What does your work entail?

My role involves a mix of business planning and analysis, content strategy, and information architecture.

This means that I help our organization to understand that content is a core business asset that is just as important as the gear we sell, our stores, our staff, and our systems.

It also means that focus on content as an experience (not just as text), and play the role of advocating for better content experiences that match up with what our users need while also supporting the needs of our business.

…if you truly love the experience of producing, managing, and consuming information — not to mention working with the people and systems that make that information work — then content strategy could be in your future…

• What does “better” mean in this context? It means content experiences that are:
• Right for the user, meaning they are useful and usable
• More thoroughly structured to be device-independent (e.g., mobile-ready)
• Connected to similar and related content experiences in ways that make sense for the user
• Consistent with our other online and off-line information
• Future-proofed and Single-sourced
• Discoverable, findable, and shareable through browsing, searching, and other means of wayfinding.
• That means that I work with an orchestra of internal/external systems, workflows, people, publishing venues, and delivery channels in order to make them play in harmony for REI and our customers.

What’s a typical work week like?

Ha, when you’re a content strategist, there’s nothing typical about any work week.

In a given week, I spend my time:

• Doing content inventories and audits
• Discovering new content issues and challenges
• Looking at our competition and analyzing gaps between ours and theirs
• Reviewing taxonomies
• Figuring out how to manage all sorts of information from products to URLs to multimedia
• Helping to set and maintain content standards
• Bringing in other experts (information architects, SEOs and other marketers, IT professionals, etc.) to help solve problems
• Talking with vendors about tools and services
• Analyzing performance of work accomplished and tracking baselines for work yet to be done
• Building business cases

And a plethora of other tasks. I lean on my colleagues a lot for their help, which is why I really appreciate the REI culture, which encourages team work.

How did you get started?

I’ve only been performing in this role since July of 2012, so I’m still getting started!

Prior to that, I was the in-house SEO at REI for three and a half years, during which I showed much interest (and was mentored) in user experience and information architecture disciplines.

Additionally, I entered the University of Washington’s Information School in the fall of 2011, where I further built up my skills and experience information architecture as part of their master’s degree program in information management.

I also help organize the Seattle IA/UX and Content Strategy Meetups along with our local Social Media Club.
This gives me the opportunity to talk and work with with local professionals and experts in several fields of practice. Everyone’s generally open and willing to share their knowledge and experiences. This is also a great way to build your network and knowledge about related disciplines, both of which can help you set (and reach!) your future career goals.

In-person events not your thing? Many content strategists and information architects are active on Twitter, LinkedIn, Slideshare and other social networks!

What do you like about what you do?

As I mentioned above, there is no typical work week. There’s always new problems to solve, new mysteries to analyze, new things to learn, and new tools to use.

What do you dislike?

We can never work as fast as we want to nor do as much for customers as we’d like to. But we try to do as much as we can in the time that we have.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

REI pays me a regular salary along with great benefits, such as health care, retirement savings, profit-sharing, and what can only be described as “Insanely Great” discount on the gear and clothing sold by REI and the various brands that we carry in our stores.

How much do you make?

I’m no where near being part of the 1%, but I do all right. REI has a generous profit-sharing program, so during a successful year, staff can be paid quite a bit more than our base salaries. This is great for our team because it incentivizes us to work hard to help the business reach (and surpass!) its goals. And that translates into better experiences for our customers.

Glassdoor has published a survey of content strategist salaries, but note that there’s not a lot of participants (currently only 28 data points).

How much money did/do you make starting out?

My first job out of school, I made $40K/year as a technical writer for IBM. I was very lucky to make that much in my first job. These were 1997 dollars, mind you, back when you could get a gallon of gas for just $1.

I interned with IBM for six months while I was in college, which helped me to easily land the full-time job after I graduated. I worked with great discipline as an intern, established a reputation for excellence, and tried as hard as I could to be easy to manage. I think that last point went a long way toward IBM asking me to come back after I finished school.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Content strategy is an interesting field, in that it requires at least some knowledge (if not formal education and experience) in all sorts of information-based disciplines. Many content strategists have backgrounds in writing and editing, but just as many (if not more) are designers, developers, technologists, or information managers.

Richard Ingram, a content strategist in the UK, has put together a great visualization of the various approaches to content strategy that shows all the different sorts of skills that can help you become a great content strategist.

What is most challenging about what you do?

It’s all new to me, new to my organization, and a relatively new field in general. Content strategy for the web didn’t really take off as a formal discipline until 2009, making it much, much newer than, say, information architecture, user experience design, or even SEO!

What is most rewarding?

Working as part of a great team and accomplishing things that have an impact on real people. We all look at customer feedback every single day and it feels good to play a role in solving their problems and making things better for them.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Are you anal-retentive about how you organize your music or books at home? What about your e-mail inbox or computer desktop? Do you live in Excel and love bending Google Analytics to your will?

If so, you might just be a great candidate for information science. And if you truly love the experience of producing, managing, and consuming information — not to mention working with the people and systems that make that information work — then content strategy could be in your future, too!

You can get started by reading the books and following the blogs on this epic list of content strategy resources.

How much time off do you get/take?

I get three weeks of paid vacation a year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Two common misunderstandings about content strategy are:

• It’s all about text
• It’s the same as content marketing

Kristina Halvorson of the Brain Traffic agency defines content strategy as a discipline that “plans for the creation, publication, and governance of useful, usable content.”

To me, that obviously involves a lot more than just text. It’s about business analysis and planning, content creation (yes, text, but also design and development – content as experience), content management and publishing systems, and the user experience for both business users and end-users or consumers of content.

Content strategy is not at all the same as content marketing, which involves creating, promoting, sharing content while influencing others to do the same in support of a core business goal, such as generating traffic and sales.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Right now, it’s hard to look beyond my deliverables for next week! But broadly, I’m trying to build progress toward REI’s mission: to inspire, educate and outfit for a lifetime of outdoor adventure and stewardship.

Through great content, systems, workflows, information structures all paired with a great understanding of what our customers need from us, we’ll get there!

Beyond REI, I want to finish up my graduate school program and see if I can take on a larger role in the SEO, information architecture, and content strategy communities. I’d like to work with other professionals to forge stronger links between these disciplines in order to make the web work better for everyone.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I’ve taken a lot of turns and journeys off the path on the road to this new position at REI. I was a Peace Corps Volunteer in Burkina Faso, West Africa for two years. I worked in nonprofits focusing on environmental conservation for nearly a decade.

At one point in the past, I was so introverted that I forced myself to join an improv group so that I could learn better ways to interact with people. By practicing hard and watching other people, I’ve taught myself how to become a better public speaker. Now I get to talk about SEO, content strategy and information architecture in front of thousands of people every year. I’ve spoken at conferences throughout the US as well as in Canada, Australia, and most recently in South Africa.

My point is that these journeys off the path aren’t distractions from your career. They’re not one-offs or throwaways or something you should avoid.

In a way, they’re the only things that really matter.

The post Interview with Jonathon Colman appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m CEO and founder of the digital marketing agency Portent. I started the company in 1995.

How would you describe what you do?

I spend a lot of time curled up in a ball under my desk. We all call that “Ian’s thinking time”…

OK, I’m kidding. Mostly.

I have 3 jobs:

Clarity: Making sure everyone at Portent knows why we’re all here. I believe great marketing can change the world – I really do – and that what we do here therefore matters a lot. I want people working with me who can believe it, too. I also work to get that out beyond Portent’s walls – I blog, speak and teach as much as I can. Every novice we can make into a good marketer becomes a better potential partner for us.

Teaching: I now do 3+ training sessions/week with the various teams at Portent, record training, etc. I also do consulting with clients.

Strategy: I work with the company’s President and directors on Portent’s direction, on new tools, and on research project.

What does your work entail?

My company does search engine optimization, pay per click management, social media, analytics and digital strategy.

…no one succeeds in building an agency alone. From your spouse/partner to the people you hire to the folks who advise you, you’ll get lots of little boosts along the way. Don’t be afraid to reach out for those boosts, and don’t hesitate to give credit where credit is due.

For my part, I do lot of writing and communications of various kinds: Recording videos, sitting down with staff and clients, etc. I also spend almost as much time researching everything from machine learning to what made David Ogilvy’s advertising so great. I’m a perpetual student. I love it!!!

What’s a typical work week like?

I don’t know that I have a ‘typical’ work week. But Mondays and Fridays are usually research and geek-out days – I put a lot of time those days into prepping training and/or noodling with Python, coming up with potential tools for Portent. I also wireframe stuff to hand off to team members.

Tuesday-Thursday I spend a lot of time on client work, either working with Portent folks or doing a really deep dive into strategy for the clients who hire us specifically to work with me. I also do a lot of training with the team those days. I do all the random social media stuff we all talk about, plus I write blog posts and such. I don’t get to do that nearly as often as I’d like – I used to blog 3-4 times a week. But now I’m at 1-2 times if I’m lucky. Sigh.

How did you get started?

It’s a bit complicated, but here goes: I grew up around computers – both my parents are scientists – so I was very comfortable with them. When I was 8 we had a Heathkit at home. I remember being blown away that this computer could guess what I was going to type from the first 2 letters of a word, and then finish the word for me. That got me hooked on computers, but I never studied them in school. I was a history major in college. I loved writing, too.

I went to law school, hated it, graduated and was looking for something to do with my life. In 1993 I went to work for an engineering company in Seattle, doing their technical writing, marketing writing and such. In 1995 I struck out on my own, and Portent was born. I started out with a credit card and a spare room in my house, doing any writing I could find. By mid-1995 I was helping clients do marketing using the internet, AOL and CompuServe (I know, ancient). In 1997 a client asked me how I could help them rank higher on Alta Vista. I was hooked.

What do you like about what you do?

I love the teaching. I love the writing and the nerdy math-and-programming-games of it all. And I really get a charge out of helping other companies win – I’m a ridiculously competitive person and everything about this business appeals to that side of me.

I also like the idea that I’m helping connect people to stuff they’ll value. To me marketing isn’t about driving raw numbers – it’s about making the right connection with the right customer, one customer at a time, at a massive scale.

What do you dislike?

I don’t like dealing with the aftermath of ripoff artists and people who claim to be ‘experts’ but aren’t. We get so many potential clients at Portent who have zero trust, few remaining resources and real business issues because of that. It drives me completely berserk.

I also don’t like dealing with people who refuse to see the value in what I do. I don’t mind that they don’t see it. If you don’t think what Portent does is valuable, that’s OK – don’t hire us. But I fail to understand why so many people think they’ll somehow get a better deal by calling and telling me “I can get what you do for 1/10th the cost!” If you can, go for it!

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Most of our work is retainer-based: Ongoing SEO, PPC management and such. We also do some one-off projects, and very large advertising buys where we get paid a percentage of the overall spend.

We’ve occasionally done performance-based stuff, but at this point I’ll only do it if we have control over the entire distribution chain.

How much do you make? 

I now make $275,000/year. That sounds grand, doesn’t it? Well, keep a few things in mind:
The first 5 years of the company, I made less than $30,000/year.

The second 5 years, I made less than $100,000/year.

I could pay myself more, but end up re-investing a lot of money into Portent. I absolutely have no reservations about it, but if you want a business where you can take most of the company’s earnings for yourself, marketing ain’t the way to go.

So the potential is great, but you need to be willing to reinvest a lot of money in the company, in your people, etc. If you just strip out all the cash to pay yourself, you’ll end up killing the organization.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

See above. Not a heck of a lot. The first year running Portent I made less than I now pay in monthly rent.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Well, I can verify that a history degree works

Seriously, any type of education can work. It’s the skills that matter:

You must be both a left- and right-brained thinker. If you can’t think creatively and analytically, you’ll have a tough time running a digital marketing shop.

You must be a top 1% writer. I don’t mean you can write best selling novels – to me that’s top 1% of the top 1% – but you need to be able to easily write in a clear, succinct manner.

Integrity. If you can’t deal honestly with people, don’t even try going into this business. It’s a small world.

I won’t say you need ‘people skills,’ because I don’t have any. But you must be an empathetic person, while still being able to sometimes lay down the law. The work we do can be pretty stressful on a day-to-day level. It took me years to learn how to deal with the little and big speed bumps without freaking out.

A good example of #4: In 2004 or so I screwed up a project. It cost us $15,000. I screamed. I cursed. I punched things and cracked the hell out of my hand. I thought, “Hey, I’m mad at myself, so this doesn’t affect anyone else.” But of course the rest of the company sits there thinking, “My god, I work for an insane person.” You have to understand that your actions affect those around you far more than you think they can or should. Getting mad is OK. Acting like Mr or Ms Hyde is not.

What is most challenging about what you do?

See above. Doing personal work with personal impact without taking it personally is nearly impossible. Everything we do – yes, even SEO – has some aspect of creativity to it, which means it’s a very personal investment of effort. But almost nothing we do gains unconditional acceptance. Taking criticism that isn’t always carefully delivered can really be a challenge. But you learn a lot, and the result is usually a huge win.

What is most rewarding?

Getting the big, long-term wins for clients. Seeing a company, or a political campaign, or a non-profit really, actually change because of stuff you’ve done. It’s more addictive than chocolate.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

I’m stealing from David Ogilvy, but: Do NOT start an agency until you’re 35 or 40. I scoffed at that when I read Confessions of an Advertising Man. I started mine when I was 28. We limped along until, surprise surprise, I turned 35. Suddenly, I had some semblance of patience and maturity (I won’t say an age appropriate level of maturity – I still don’t have that) and the company took off. When I turned 40 in 2008, that began the huge growth period we’re in now.

Of course, you’re going to go start your agency when you’re 28 anyway. When you do, find a mentor, and listen to them. When you’re sitting there thinking you’ve just bolluxed things up worse than anyone in history, realize that I or someone else you know has done things at least as dunderheaded, and survived, and grew because of it. Learn from them.

Be honest. It’s always easier. White lies to spare a client’s feelings may lead to financial losses for them. Showing integrity after a mistake may win you a long-term client. Dealing with employees in a forthright manner will always pay off.

In 1998 we had what I call The Great Philsophy Massacre. I misspelled ‘Philosophy’ on a client’s print materials (one of the last print pieces we ever did). We printed a ton of them. Then we fond the mistake. I could have forced the client to pay – they had to review the proofs and sign off – but I didn’t, because I felt ridiculous. They worked with us for over 10 years. Was that worth the $2500 printing job? Damn right.

Finally, business is personal. Don’t think you can run any business of your own and just put it away when you go home each night. It’s going to impact you and your family, hopefully for the better in the long run, but starting a business is a decision you need to consider carefully if you have a family.

How much time off do you get/take?

I take 1-2 real weeks off per year. “Real” means I’m only checking e-mail maybe once a day. I do get little mental health breaks – a day here, a day there – but most of those I’m still very connected to the office.

It’s improved a lot in the last 4 years. Before then, I don’t think I had more than a few days truly off per year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That I spam Google. I could write 17 pages about this, but I won’t.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’d like Portent to reach a point where it’ll outlive my career, for one thing. Pay for my kids’ education (I know, pretty mundane). Work on a Presidential campaign (less mundane). Speak at TED (riiiight). Get to the point where I can pedal my bicycle over some of Seattle’s hills without my tongue flapping in my front spokes.

Any two of those, really. I’m easy to please.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Just that no one succeeds in building an agency alone. From your spouse/partner to the people you hire to the folks who advise you, you’ll get lots of little boosts along the way. Don’t be afraid to reach out for those boosts, and don’t hesitate to give credit where credit is due.

The post Interview with Ian Lurie of Portent Inc. appeared first on Job Shadow.

Read as Brian Werner talks about his career as a Vestibular Rehabilitation Physical Therapist.  Find him at www.nomorevertigo.com and on the Twitter feed in the sidebar of this interview. @dizzyPT

What do you do for a living?

I am a physical therapist.

How would you describe what you do? 

I work daily to assess and treat patients with inner ear and balance dysfunction.  I also manage my staff of PTs and assistants for treatment and daily needs.

What does your work entail? 

I am an owner as well as a clinician so I am busy daily with management as well as clinical needs.  Marketing, paying bills, talking to vendors, talking to patients and family, treating patients.

What’s a typical work week like? 

Typically it is very busy but fun – work is usually 50 hrs a week.

How did you get started? 

I found that patients I was seeing when I was an orthopedic therapist were having symptoms of dizziness as well.  I looked into how the dizziness could be causing their orthopedic symptoms and fell into vestibular therapy.

What do you like about what you do? 

I fix problems with patients that often have been to several medical practitioners.

What do you dislike? 

I dislike the uncertainty of the medical system.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated? 

I am primarily compensated through medical insurances, liens, and cash payments.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this? 

You need an undergraduate degree and master’s degree – by 2020 all PTs will have a doctorate to be a physical therapist – currently this is 95% of the PT schools.

What is most challenging about what you do? 

Getting complex patients with very challenging symptoms and getting them better.

What is most rewarding? 

Helping people resolve their dizziness.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career? 

Be open minded and enjoy reading as there is a big learning curve in understanding the balance system.

How much time off do you get/take? 

I get 3 weeks off a year – I take it all.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do? 

That our program is voodoo and not sound science.  The treatment of dizziness and balance has a long history back to World War II when soldiers post concussion were having dizziness.  The treatment of dizziness is used daily in the military with pilots learning to fly by instrument.  We use the same principles.

What are your goals/dreams for the future? 

My goals are to become a center of excellence in the Southwest of the US in the treatment of vestibular disorders.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career? 

It is a great profession being a PT – very rewarding.

The post Interview with a Physical Therapist – 2 appeared first on Job Shadow.

Whether famous or up and coming, learning from real people in the careers themselves is always best.

If you’re interested in a career in food or becoming a chef some day here are some people to follow on Twitter.(in no particular order)

And as always here are some links to JobShadowed Chef interviewees Emily Luchetti, Jamie Kimm, and Christopher Yang.

@AndrewZimmern          Andrew Zimmern
@BFlay                              Bobby Flay
@catcora                           Cat Cora
@GuyFieri                        Guy Fieri
@Emeril                            Emeril Lagasse
@GDeLaurentiis            Giada De Laurentis
@Jamie_Oliver              Jamie Oliver
@offalchris                      Chris Cosentino
@TheDeenBros              Jamie and Bobbie Deen
@TylerFlorence             Tyler Florence
@The_Neelys                 The Neely’s
@CookCarluccio            Antonio Carluccio
@mariobatali                  Mario Batali
@Rick_Bayless               Rick Bayless
@curtis_stone                Curtis Stone
@GrowCookEat             Stephanie Alexander
@Raymond_Blanc        Raymond Blanc
@ChefJenCarroll           Jennifer Carroll
@GordonRamsay01       Gordon Ramsay
@topchefkevin                Kevin Gillespie
@ChefChiarello              Michael Chiarello
@SandraLee                    Sandra Lee
@jacques_pepin            Jacques Pepin
@Ellie_Krieger              Ellie Kieger
@ChefMichaelSmth      Michael Smith
@ChefJohnShields        John Shields
@SeamusMullen            Seamus Mullen
@chef_morimoto          Chef Morimoto
@andrecarmellini          Andrew Carmellini
@chefkennyg37              Kenny Gilbert
@ChefToddEnglish        Todd English
@Bourdain                      Anthony Bourdain
@NapaHospitality         Michael McMillan
@ChefHermes               Chef Hermes
@BobbyChinn               Bobby Chinn
@chefgwen                    Gwen Ashley Walters
@ILTOCCOFOOD        Gabe Bertaccini
@cheftiamcd                  Tia McDonald
@ChefTopple                Steve Topple
@TheFirstCourse         Chef CJ Henry
@ChefLonDenver        Lon Symensma
@Paula Deen                 Paula Deen
@CKostow                      Christoper Kostow
@culinaryu                      Dennis Frazier
@BeckettsTable             Justin Beckett
@chefbeaumac              Beau MacMillan
@ChefGross                   Christoper Gross
@chadatsearocket         Chad White
@greensandbeans         Randy Rucker
@dhenderiks                  Diane Henderiks
@ChefJenDePalma      Jen Depalma
@Wolfgangbuzz           Wolfgang Puck
@chefjohnbesh            John Besh
@Chef_Gregorio         Gregorio Pedroza
@giuseppetentori       Guiseppe Tentori
@SusieSpiceItUp        Susie Jimenez
@CulinaryBadBoy      Chris Nirschel
@marcvetri                    Marc Vetri
@AlonShaya                 Alon Shaya
@Chefjefflive               Jeff Henderson
@ChefBettyFraser      Betty Fraser
@DaLocalChef            Steven Wilson
@nhereford                 Nate Hereford
@chefanneburrell    Anne Burrell
@ChefRogalski          Paul Rogalski
@ChefKirkVan          Kirk Morrison
@altonbrown             Alton Brown
@davidchang               David Chang
@ricardomzarate       Ricardo Zarate
@soulcocina                 Roger Feely
@ChefJoseAdorno     Jose Adorno
@AngeloASosa            Angelo Sosa
@DaleTalde                  Dale Talde
@ChefMCollantes      Michael Collantes
@ChickswKnives         Suzanne Griswold & Rachael Narins
@MikeIsabellaDC       Mike Isabella
@bellachef19                Dena Marino
@Chef_Bosco              Bosco Pereira
@ChefCaseyT               Casey Thompson
@fabioviviani               Fabio Viviani
@chefstevemchugh      Steve McHugh
@DavidMarteau            David Marteau
@TroyGuard                   Troy Guard
@ChefMarkPeel             Mark Peel
@FIGSANTAMONICA  Ray Garcia
@eatatstreet                     Susan Feniger
@mlaiskonis                     Michael Liaskonis
@JoesRestaurant          Joseph Miller
@ericripert                      Eric Ripert
@Chefaymar                   Amar Santana
@josiahcitrin                  Josiah Citrin
@chefadamhorton       Adam Horton
@rachael_ray                Rachael Ray
@canapes45                    Robin White

The post 100 Chefs to follow on Twitter appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I teach strings – violin, viola, cello bass and orchestra to approximately 200 elementary aged students each week.

How would you describe what you do?

Ours is an orchestra program too.  I teach all the skills needed to perform in an orchestra. These include playing the instrument, reading music, following a conductor, shaping the music and ensemble skills.

What does your work entail?

Lots of planning! I like to think of my classes as the performance and all the planning as the rehearsals. I also have had extensive training as a string player (violin) as a strong knowledge base to work with. In addition to classes, there’s lots of emailing to be in touch with classroom teachers and parents. I’d say a bit less paperwork than an elementary classroom teacher, but still some.

What’s a typical work week like?

Monday-Friday are classes from 7:30 – 3:10. These classes are almost non-stop throughout the day (often including my lunch hour) so planning takes place on my own time. There are some evening and professional duties as well.

How did you get started?

I started out as a professional violinist and found that I enjoyed the structure of the school day. This worked especially well for me after I had children. I had a bachelor’s and master’s degree in performance and received a doctorate and licensing later on little by little.

What do you like about what you do?

It’s all about the children! They are deliciously fun and silly at this age so there’s always something fun going on. I love that I get to establish them as players and get them excited about starting this life long pleasure. Then there are always those moments when you get to change their lives by positively addressing some issue. Heaven!

What do you dislike?

The paperwork – so much of what goes on now is just creating paper trails and this robs you of time better spent planning or teaching.  If you have an administrator that is difficult, or for that matter a custodian who is difficult, your job becomes much harder.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I get a salary from my employer and I teach lessons after school and work with a summer chamber music group.

How much money do you make?

I work in Westchester county in NY state which has a high standard of living so salaries are commensurate with this reality. I earn around $118,00.

How much money do you make starting out?

I think starting salaries are around $80,000 in my district.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

Your own training as an instrumentalist is crucial for success and then you need at least a master’s in education to be hired. I also continue to take lessons since I think it’s important as a teacher to always be in the position of a student as well.

What is most challenging about what you do?

How to do the most with the least amount of time.

What is most rewarding?

Making a difference in the lives of my students and sometimes their entire families.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

If you loved school and learning you will love this job. If you didn’t, it might not be for you. If you have difficulties interacting with people or dealing with emotional issues, you will also find this a difficult job. It is harder than it first appears.

How much time off do you get/take?

I am very fortunate to have sick days and I do take them when I need to. I also get a lovely summer break although like most teachers, I spend a large portion of it planning and revitalizing my skills.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Teaching is a profession more than a job. It is not something you leave at the end of the day. It is a lifelong passion.

It is not an easy job and demanding only short hours. Neither is true. Planning, emailing, and keeping up your skills takes lots of time in addition to your classes and you really can’t do the job well without this extra work. This work is expected.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I would like to share the skills I have developed with younger teachers.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

Go for it!

The post Interview with a String Instrument Instructor appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a Clinical Nurse Specialist, specializing in Oncology and Genomics.

How would you describe what you do?

A clinical nurse specialist is a type of advanced practice nurse that usually specializes in certain areas. My focus is mainly on cancer genetic counseling, helping patients and families learn about risk based upon personal and family history, plus facilitating any genetic tests that may be available to help guide their care. My other main focus is on prostate cancer as an oncology nurse navigator, guiding newly diagnosed patients through the process of diagnosis, treatment, and into survivorship care.

As a CNS, I am also asked to use my expertise in various projects where I work, including research studies ongoing, program planning for cancer programs in general, and even writing a blog on cancer for my organization.

What does your work entail?

The overall goal is optimal health care for my patients & families. As clinical nurse specialists, our spheres of influence fall into five groups: clinical excellence, leadership, consultation, research, and education.  I use these to guide my work responsibilities.

Fostering clinical excellence is inherent already as an oncology nurse, but as an advanced practice nurse, I try to keep updated on the latest developments in cancer genetics and prostate cancer, to best serve the people that I most commonly work with, including patients, families, as well as physicians, other nurses, and health care providers.  Given my work in these areas, I am often asked to help define guidelines and protocols, ensuring quality care for our system at large.

My leadership responsibilities include supervising nursing staff at the oncology clinic, but also leading committees, such as our Cancer Patient Advisory Council, where we have gathered a group of cancer survivors, as well as some key clinic staff, to provide input on any developing cancer programs.  We meet at least quarterly, and continue to work on various projects throughout the year by e-mail/teleconferencing.

We commonly think of CNS’s as staff educators, and I do include this in my current role, including in-services for the nurses/physicians, in the traditional sense.  I also think patient education is important, and using online outlets, I can potentially reach a broad, wide audience.  Initially, I was giving input on our own website updates, to provide accurate information and get patients to the right people at the clinic.  Writing a blog is another outlet where I can educate on issues in cancer, and often provides more of a dialogue than a lecture.

The current research projects in which I have a CNS role at my facility revolve around oncology nurse navigation. The list of outcomes measures we are examining is large, and includes clinical outcomes (e.g. post-treatment symptoms over time), patient satisfaction, and various psychosocial aspects (anxiety, decisional conflict). My main day-to-day responsibility in research is recruiting patients, and ensuring that the follow-up surveys (outcomes measures) are completed per protocol.  For the studies that are finished recruiting, the CNS role then focuses upon data analysis and publication.

The consultations that I provide to patients and their families mainly focus upon shared decision making (cancer genetics and prostate cancer are my two areas of consultative expertise).  During these individual meetings, which can range from 30 to 90 minutes, I first gather a personal and family cancer history, and then spend a good amount of time educating them on the clinical aspects of the issue at hand.  The bulk of our discussion then moves to outlining all the possible choices, and the pros/cons of each.  My goal for the patient is to make the best decision, given all the information available. Clinical aspects are important, but we also consider the “non-clinical,” such as qualify of life, psychosocial aspects, family dynamics, and ethics.

What’s a typical work week like?

The consultations provide the skeleton of my schedule, and I have at least 3-4 hour long slots open per day, which can be filled with patients who need help with either cancer genetic counseling or prostate cancer navigation.  Patients are referred by their physicians to see me.

During the time that I am not in consultation, I try to address all the ongoing projects, which can include particular patient cases (e.g. tracking genetic test results, communicating results to patients & referring physicians), and also the broad projects in education and research.

Given all the various responsibilities and the ebb and flow of patient referrals, there is no “typical work week,” but it always seems to be busy….which is a good thing.

Since I work at an outpatient clinic, I have regular weekday business hours.  Some of my CNS colleagues do have responsibilities for several shifts of nurses/patients (includes evenings, nights & weekends), so their role can be a bit more complex.

How did you get started?

I started my career in nursing as a Registered Nurse, after getting my Bachelor’s Degree in Nursing.  After a brief stint in medical-surgical hospital nursing, I became a nurse in Radiation Oncology. Once I decided to pursue my graduate degree to become a Clinical Nurse Specialist, I was able to work part time (although not much!).  When I did graduate, I had the luxury of writing my own CNS job description to create the role at the same facility where I was a radiation oncology nurse.  It was a smooth transition into the role, and I think the relationships that I already had with all the physicians, nurses, and staff, allowed me to build a successful practice here.

What do you like about what you do?

Interacting with patients and families individually is the most rewarding (and sometimes challenging) part of my job.  Not only am I able to spend quality time educating them on issues which many of them have never dealt with before, but also helping them along the pathway, whether it is just for genetic testing, or if they may have cancer themselves. My overall goal is to make the journey as effortless as possible for my patients and their families.

Also, during these visits, patients and families often open up, so we may be exploring all the emotions, fears, and feelings they are having around cancer. When I am able to provide some reassurance or insight, based upon perhaps several other families that I have met in the past with a similar situation, that “aha” moment for my patient in the room is such as great feeling.

What do you dislike?

Because I deal with cancer every day, end-of-life issues can be a concern.  Talking about death and dying is never fun, but speaking frankly is important.  Patients and families really do benefit from straight talk, and focus upon things within their control, while identifying and accepting the things outside of their control.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I am a salaried employee at my clinic, so all of my main responsibilities and projects fall under this umbrella.  If I am asked to speak at conferences or other educational events, or perhaps consult, outside of my clinics, I do often receive a one-time honorarium.

How much do people in your field make? 

In California, the average Clinical Nurse Specialist salary is about $100-120K per year.  This can be higher based upon the area of specialty, plus any administrative responsibilities that are added.  When I first started, I was a registered nurse at the same facility, and I was already supervising several nurses, so the salary negotiations ended up in a higher than average salary. Being in oncology and genomics, as well as in the Silicon Valley, probably played a major part in making my salary in the top 5% of the bell curve.

For speaking engagements and/or consultations outside of my clinic, honorariums can range from $300 to $1500 per event.  I usually only have a handful of these per year.

How much money did/do you make starting out? 

Compared with my hourly salary as a registered nurse, the CNS/APN salary was at least a 15-20% increase right away, then steadily continued to increase over time.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

To be a Clinical Nurse Specialist, a Master’s degree is required.  Experience as a registered nurse is preferable, but not always required to get into a graduate program.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Acting as a change agent is the most challenging, because it usually involves influencing many different key players, which can include physicians, other APN’s/CNS’s, nursing staff, administration, and sometime even our patient population in general.

What is most rewarding?

Hearing back from patients after the fact, and continuing to keep in touch with him.  They are very thankful for the time spent with them.  Although I actually only spent 1-2 hours with them, I was helping them make a potentially life-changing decision, and they never forget that.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

“Spinning plates” is a good analogy for my job.  I am busy in so many different things within my expertise.  It never seems to be slow.  There’s always something that needs improving. In healthcare, the motivation is clear: optimal health care and making it go smoothly for patients & families.  Nurses who want to specialize in a certain area, with a taste for program planning, should consider becoming a Clinical Nurse Specialist.

How much time off do you get/take?

My schedule is very flexible, but I don’t have anyone that can back up all my responsibilities.  I try to take at least one 1-2 week vacation (disconnected!) per year, plus various long weekends (e.g. mental health days!) scattered throughout.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

CNS’s are not just about staff education.  There are so many things that we are asked to do in the healthcare setting.  Given my specialty, I do have the opportunity to see patients; it is not a purely administrative role in my case.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I would like to see my main two programs (oncology nurse navigator and cancer genetic counseling) expand to include multiple providers (CNS’s?) so we can provide services to a broad spectrum of people in need of these services.  My focus today is only on one cancer (prostate) and a handful of genetic tests/cancer syndromes.  In the near future, a program could address multiple cancers and syndromes.  Oncology, especially in genomics, is growing very rapidly.

The post Interview with a Clinical Nurse Specialist appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m the Global Head of Production for DAVID the agency. DAVID is an Advertising Agency founded in Sao Paulo, Brazil with another office in Buenos Aires, Argentina and we are opening an office in New York City soon. My job is to oversee, build and run the Production Department globally in all 3 countries. Production in the sense of Film; anything Film related and sometimes more.

How would you describe what you do?

Magical, we make ideas come alive. It’s a very creative job but also very business focused too – ultimate problem solving.

What does your work entail?

Everything from start to finish in making a creative idea come alive and shown to an audience. My work entails seeking out new talent from Directors, Editors, Visual Effects companies and graphics companies, music companies etc… We do all the bidding for the job once our creative team decides on the talent we want to use for our TV commercial, Web Film, Radio Spot – Digital Campaign – Live Event or Installation. We create the timelines, manage the budget, manage all the talent hired to build the idea for the agency. We take the project from start to finish. We solve problems, find solutions, negotiate – it’s a very personable business – high risk and high stress.

What’s a typical work week like?

This is the fun part. It varies. Today I am in an edit bay in New York cutting revisions to a TV spot, next week I am in Brazil working in an office. The end of October I am in Buenos Aires and speaking at Creative Conference. Last Spring I spent 5 weeks on the road shooting in London, Cape Town & Buenos Aires. We are always with the projects. Get ready to travel and get ready to work wherever from editing bays, to shooting sets, music studios and so on.

How did you get started?

I went to school for Journalism, but I knew I wanted to work in Film – so after school I went to Los Angeles and worked in the Film Industry, I didn’t like it very much – it took forever to get a project off the ground and I didn’t enjoy the people much; it was very fake. I found my way into a company making Industrial videos and literally one day answered an ad for a producer at an Advertising Agency and so I feel like it was a lucky accident

I love the people, I love that I can wear whatever I want and say swear words when I’m mad ;). I love that it is creative and also very numbers focused. I love love to negotiate and solve problems and I love that we make small films in :30 …

What do you dislike?

I dislike that it takes me from my family a lot with all the travel and long hours.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I’m paid a salary.

How much do people in your career make?

At my level – a very good salary so that you can really enjoy your life.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

My first job as an agency producer (Jr. level) I was making $35,000/year.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

The school of LIFE.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Managing the money and all the personalities on a project.

What is most rewarding?

When the end result is beautiful and everyone including yourself are proud.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Do it – it’s the best job ever. See if you can get a job as an intern at an Ad Agency in the Film Production Department.

How much time off do you get/take?

Ha ha ha – I take it when I can but I travel a lot so I see the world.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That I don’t do anything.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I’m founding a charity for Alzheimer’s with some industry people; it’s my heart because my father is suffering from Alzheimer’s.

I’d like to meet a nice man and have a family.

I’d like to get through this new job I have and not screw it up too much

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I’m also the founder of a Producer Network called poolhouse – check it out and follow us on facebook, twitter, linkedin.

Websites:
www.davidtheagency.com
www.thepoolhouse.tv
http://veronicabeach.tumblr.com/

The post Interview with the Global Head of Production at DAVID Advertising Agency appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Simply said, I’m a filmmaker. But really, I’m a storyteller, a conversation maker. I’m lucky to have been able to combine my two passions –technology and filmmaking — to help trigger conversations about important issues of our day.

How would you describe what you do?

My work is very collaborative. I work with a great team that I’ve worked with for years. We use all the new technologies available to push boundaries on the ways that we both communicate, collaborate and participate.

We have a feature documentary Connected that premiered at Sundance and was in theaters last year. We are now making it available to people in many new ways – schools, companies, conferences, and home use.  We love triggering conversations about “connectedness in the 21st century” in new ways.

Right now at my film studio The Moxie Institute, we’ve created a new short film series called Let it Ripple: Mobile Films for Global Change. We started to experiment with a new way of making films by inviting people from all over the world to contribute. We call it Cloud Filmmaking.

Our first step in making a Let it Ripple film – once we’ve chosen the focus – is to send a call-for-submissions to those that follow us on our social networks. For our latest film Brain Power: From Neurons to Networks we asked people from all over to send us artwork and graphics of how they envision the human brain. We also asked to receive video of parents doing their favorite activities with their children and their children running into their arms. My staff and I review all the submissions and edit them into the film we are creating. That includes a lot of original animations and images that we have found from archives — editing them into one film.

We customize our films for nonprofit organizations that want to use them to engage and inspire their supporters. We include a custom call-to-action for each film based on the organizations mission and goals. It’s great and we do this for free for any organization that requests one.

What’s a typical workweek like?

I’m a working mom. I have a film studio in San Francisco right on the water, which is very inspiring. I love going in. Three days a week I work from home and pick my kids up from school. I’ll often schedule back-to-back meetings on one or two days a week so I can squeeze all the work I can into a very focused period of time and environment.

I look at every week like I’m designing a week. I enjoy looking at it in a creative way. I know when I like to have calls and when I don’t. I know that my most focused creative time is in the morning. I schedule my weeks based on those understandings of myself.

I feel so fortunate. I have a lot of flexibility and I really get to be a mother. The Internet was the tool the feminist movement always needed to be able to both be present at the important events for your child and also contribute and participate in society.

How did you get started?

Well, I did a lot of internships, which I always recommend. I have a lot of great interns at our film studio right now. But when I was in college – actually in high school — I did an internship at a technology company, one of the first laptop companies. I also interned at film studios. I was always interested in both technology and filmmaking. The earlier part of my career I worked in technology to pay for my films, and then I was given the opportunity to found the Webby Awards when I was very young. I ran it for nearly a decade of my life.

I enjoyed establishing the Webbys but I always yearned for filmmaking and so in 2005, I founded The Moxie Institute. It was then that I understood that I could combine my love for filmmaking with what had been, a decade before, an amazing new invention called the World Wide Web.

It’s very exciting to finally be making a living doing exactly what I want to do with the people that I love working with on projects I really believe in.

What do you like most about what you do?

I love collaborating. Right now I’m really enjoying giving back. Through our Let it Ripple series, we’re able to make free movies for non-profit organizations all around the world. I feel like we’re filling such a need.  There are so many non-profits doing important work and yet they don’t have media to match the work that they do.

Is there anything that you dislike about your job?

Production can be tough at times. I’ve had a pretty intense production period recently.

How do you make money?

Some of our films are funded through grants and others are made with the support of investors. Each project is different. For my feature documentary Connected, we work with organizations, conferences, and schools around the world to host special screenings of the film for their supporters. Depending on the type of individual or organization (e.g. for-profit, nonprofit), a one-time flat licensing fee is required to screen the film. We also generate revenue from ticket sales of theatrical screenings and the sale of DVD and video on demand purchases. Right now we have a “limited edition” version of the Connected DVD and Home Discussion kit available. I also am paid to speak at events. I have been doing public talks for 20 years now.

What kind of education, schooling or skills are necessary to do what you do?

I think its always important to keep learning. People think when they graduate that’s the end of their formal education, but there are so many opportunities, especially with the Internet, to constantly learn more.

I have a BA from UC Berkeley, but I’m really a lifelong learner. I’ve completed executive education at Harvard. I am a Henry Crown Fellow of the Aspen Institute. And I’m always interested in taking intense new classes. Each time I make a new film actually, I feel like I’m learning about a whole new issue or topic.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Sometimes it can be challenging to articulate the vision I see in my head for a particular film to others. Luckily I work with such a great team and I’ve worked with them for so long that they’re great at picking up my vision and bringing it to life even when I feel that I haven’t communicated it verbally as well as I’d like.

What is most rewarding?

Audience reaction! I truly enjoy hearing someone laugh from a moment in one of my films or to learn that one of my projects has moved someone emotionally or into action. I’m always delighted when we release a new film in our “Let it Ripple: Mobile Films for Global Change” series and the requests for custom versions start to roll in from nonprofits. It lets me know that others see the value in what we do and what we’re providing and that it not only resonates with them, but they think it’s powerful enough to resonate with the individuals, organizations and partners that they work with.

What advice would you give to someone who is interested in pursuing a career in filmmaking or in technology?

There are so many opportunities you just have to find them or make them! For film, interning is so important. I hire a lot of people that start as interns. And I do believe in the intern model because I believe that you can really see a lot of different types of companies.

And then in terms of working in technology again, it’s so easy to be able to just try new technologies and new ways of doing things. So many of the tools are free right now. We can really do a lot with what’s available right now. Have the gumption to try something on your own and show people what you can do.

Are there any misconceptions around technology or filmmaking and working in that field?

I think a lot of people say there’s no money for the arts so you have to really struggle, and I just don’t think that’s the case. I think if you don’t treat filmmaking like a business I think you’re going to struggle. I think a lot of filmmakers don’t realize that any artist needs to also be a businessperson. It’s so important to take that seriously. A business course can help strengthen those skills.

A lot of artists will just throw up their hands that they aren’t supported financially, but they need to present themselves and their projects in a real business-like way to get that kind of support.

How much time do you get/take off? 

I take off every Friday night to Saturday night for what my family calls “technology shabbats.” We turn off mobile phones, the TV, iPads and any other electronic device that could distract us from spending good quality time together. I recently wrote about our Technology Shabbats in our newly released Brain Power: From Neurons to Networks TED Book. An excerpt focused on this can be read at http://www.good.is/posts/connecting-broadly-won-t-replace-the-importance-of-connecting-deeply. I also make sure that my husband and I take a good amount of family trips with our two girls and one romantic trip for just the two of us every 2 months.

What are your goals and dreams for the future?  

My goal is to keep pushing myself creatively and to continue to collaborate with my husband. My dream would be to someday collaborate on a creative project with my children.

Is there anything else that you would like for people to know about you, to know about Let It Ripple, or about pursuing a career in technology or film?

Well, if you’re interested in the kind of work we do,  join our Facebook group or follow me on Twitter (@TiffanyShlain). I engage with my community a lot on experiments and filmmaking projects.

You can also watch all of our films online at www.letitripple.org. Our latest film Brain Power: From Neurons to Networks was released with an accompanying ebook published by TED Books. It’s the first time a TED Book and film have been released together. The ebook features embedded video, graphics, special talks and other multimedia elements that elaborate on the focus of the film.

About Tiffany Shlain

Honored by Newsweek as one of the “Women Shaping the 21st Century,” Tiffany Shlain is a filmmaker, artist, director of the Moxie Institute, founder of The Webby Awards, co-founder of the International Academy of Digital Arts and Sciences and creator of the Let it Ripple: Mobile Films for Global Change short film series. Her films and work have received over 50 awards including a Disruptive Innovation Award from the 2012 Tribeca Film Festival.

Her last four films premiered at Sundance including her feature documentary Connected: An Autoblogography about Love, Death & Technology which The New York Times described as “Examining everything from the Big Bang to twitter.” Connected had a theatrical release last fall and The US State Department recently selected it as one of the films to represent America in the 2012 American Film Showcase. Shlain’s films are a fusion of documentary and narrative and are known for their whimsical yet provocative approach to unraveling complicated subjects like politics, cultural identity, technology and science. For more information, visit www.tiffanyshlain.com. Follow Tiffany on twitter @tiffanyshlain

The post Interview with Filmmaker Tiffany Shlain appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a public relations practitioner. Last June, I went out on my own and launched my own company, Kismet Communications, alongside my sister who’s a graphic designer. We specialize in providing clients with sound strategy, great writing, creative web design and development and really good-looking graphic design.

How would you describe what you do?

The other day my seven-year-old son asked me what I do for a living. I told him, “I help companies tell good stories about themselves.” The stories take a lot of different formats, but that’s pretty much it in a nutshell.

What does your work entail?

I spend a lot of time on the computer… answering e-mail, managing projects, writing strategic communications plans and content for the web and print publications. Then there’s the time I spend on the phone… talking to clients, brainstorming ideas with my sister, coordinating with web developers, or pitching stories to journalists if I’m handling media relations for a client.

The one aspect of my job that always sneaks up on me is new business development. People dream about becoming entrepreneurs and starting their own businesses but they often forget that they’re going to spend a lot of time pursuing leads that never wind up turning into jobs. For us, that means meeting with potential new clients and putting together new business proposals. Sometimes we land the client and sometimes we don’t but it’s always a lot of work behind the scenes.

What’s a typical work week like?

So, the one thing I love about public relations is that it’s a great job to couple with motherhood. Since I work for myself, I have the ability to create this crazy schedule that allows me to be home with my kids after school each day. Basically, I work from 5 to 7 a.m. every day, get the kids off to school, work from 9 a.m. to 3 p.m., hang out with my kids all afternoon and evening and then work for another two hours or so after the kids are in bed. I’m working a 10-hour day lots of days but I’m doing it around my kids’ schedule, which is important to me. It wouldn’t be ideal for everyone but for me—at this time in my life—I feel really lucky that I’ve got a career that I can build around my kids, instead of it being the other way around.

How did you get started?

I studied public relations and art history at the University of South Carolina. I much preferred my art history classes but, not too surprisingly, the public relations classes have been much more useful on the job market:-) Right out of school, I landed a job handling communications for a small non-profit, and I’ve been working in the field ever since.

What do you like about what you do?

I love to write, so for me, that’s always the best part of any job. Some writers like writing for print but don’t enjoy writing web content because websites are iterative and no content remains relevant for very long. Your words might be there one day and be gone the next. I don’t care so much about the format—I just get an odd sense of satisfaction from taking a complicated idea and using good writing to make it easily understood and even interesting.

What do you dislike?

Working with numbers. When you’re billing your services out by the hour, you’ve got to get a very good sense of how much your time is worth and how much time you think it will take to complete particular tasks. There are only so many hours in a week, and the value you place on your time directly affects your bottom line. You want to price yourself competitively but you also don’t want to undervalue yourself. It’s more math than I’d prefer to be doing! Then there’s tracking your income and expenses and… (gulp)… taxes. When you’re in business for yourself, there’s no friendly director of finance with an office down the hall, so you’ve got to decide which things you’re capable of tackling yourself and which things to hire out.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Depending on the client’s needs, there are three ways to potentially handle compensation. For a straightforward project with clear deliverables, we just quote a flat fee for the project. If it’s unclear how much time will be involved in delivering the project because of unknown variables, we give the client an estimated number of hours we think it will take to complete the project and then charge based on the hours it ultimately does take to complete the work. For ongoing work that has no clear end date (let’s say a client wants us to handle regular website updates or social media management or media relations), the client can put us on a retainer. The client pays a set amount per month in return for a set number of hours of work per month. If something big comes up and the client wants us to go over the allotted monthly hours to handle a special assignment or extra workload, we bill accordingly.

How much do people in your career/field make? 

I had a public relations professor in college who said something I’ll never forget. He told us, “Public relations practitioners are underpaid when they’re young and overpaid when they’re old.” I’m somewhere in the middle age-wise, so I feel like I’m hitting it about right. Where I live (in Richmond, Va.), independent PR practitioners and small shops generally charge somewhere between $100 and $150 per hour for their services. Larger agencies might charge up to $250 per hour, depending on the size and scope of the project. Non-profit rates are often available, and firms are good about working with their clients to come up with a payment structure that meets everyone’s needs. Typically, clients get the biggest bang for their buck when they go on a long-term retainer.

How much money did/do you make starting out? 

Usually, not much. But the good news is that, with the right job, it doesn’t take long to gain great experience that can be parlayed into better pay over the long run. Regardless of how long you’ve worked, your pay will vary based on your geographic region and also your industry. For instance, you’ll probably make more working in corporate communications than you will working for an agency.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

There’s a lot of debate about whether to study PR in college. Given my background, I’ll tell you—it can’t hurt. You’ll learn a lot of sound principles that will significantly lessen your learning curve when you land your first job out of college (and it might help you get the job in the first place).

If you are planning on majoring in PR, I would advise you to pair it with another subject. PR classes will teach you how to communicate but you’ll be way more marketable when you graduate if you can communicate about something in particular. For instance, if you pair PR with finance, you’ll have no issues landing an incredible job in investor relations. If you pair it with political science, you might wind up working in public affairs on Capitol Hill. Double up with Spanish and you open yourself up to all kinds of communications agencies that are selling their services to Latino markets. If you can handle science or engineering, just write your own ticket—tons of companies need people who can communicate complicated scientific concepts clearly and concisely.

If you’re at a school that doesn’t offer a public relations degree, never fear. Study journalism, English or maybe rhetoric. Get a really good base in writing and public speaking, and then look for internships that can boost your PR IQ. See if there’s a local chapter of the Public Relations Society of America in your town, and go to their monthly luncheons, which always feature educational speakers. PRSA chapters usually offer lunch to students at reduced rates. Contact your university’s communications office (every university’s got one) and see if they need any student workers. It’s a great way to learn the ropes. Also, visit your school’s career center and they can probably put you in touch with alumni who work in public relations. Don’t be afraid to ask them how they got into the field. They may be all too happy to help you get your foot in the door.

What is most challenging about what you do?

It’s fun to implement a public relations campaign that’s got all these creative tactics but where it gets challenging is tying back each of those creative tactics to a real, measurable business objective. It doesn’t really matter whether I’m doing work for an organization that fundraises or sells widgets or gets out the vote… at the end of the day, I’ve got to demonstrate that public relations had a hand in positively influencing business outcomes. I’m always thinking about how I can prove value.

What is most rewarding?

What I love about PR is that no two jobs (or even two days) are ever the same. I get to learn a lot about a ton of different industries and have met so many really interesting people along the way. I think the variety is what will keep me in the profession over the long run.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Whether you’re enrolled in a collegiate public relations program or learning on the job, I’d advise anyone to take at least one graphic design class. Even though, in most jobs, you won’t be expected to wear that hat, it’s a really good idea to know what good design looks like, what’s involved in achieving it and how to talk intelligently to designers. You’ll be partnering with them throughout your career.

How much time off do you get/take?

I’m probably not a good person to ask! I’m at the point where I’m growing my business, and as a result I’m finding it very difficult to step away from the laptop and smartphone. I took a two-week vacation this past summer that definitely wasn’t without its stressors. This coming summer, I’ve already got a one-week vacation on the books, so we’ll see how I do! If you’re working for a company, you can expect to earn two weeks’ vacation per year as a new hire and bump up to three or four weeks’ vacation as you gain seniority.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

There are a few misconceptions about PR that I’d love to put to rest:

I’m a “People Person” So I Should Go into PR

While there’s a definite upside to having an extroverted personality-type in this profession, the number one thing you need is good writing skills. If you’re a college student who hates writing, I’d honestly advise finding another career field.

PR’s Just Spin

There’s this misperception that all PR practitioners do is take bad stories and polish them until they appear to be good stories, or at least neutral stories. Nothing could be further from the truth. When bad news strikes, PR practitioners advise companies on how to confront the fallout honestly and openly. People call PR practitioners spin doctors but a more appropriate nickname would be the ethics police.

PR and Media Relations Are the Same Thing

There are a lot of people out there who assume, when you say you work in the public relations field, that you sit at a desk and pitch reporters on stories all day long. There certainly are PR practitioners who do that but that’s because they’ve chosen to focus on one aspect of public relations—media relations. The PR profession can encompass a lot of different kinds of work: internal communications, community relations, special event planning, marketing, advertising, reputation management, branding and identity development, issues management and… yes… media relations.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Owning my own business is definitely a dream realized. When I think about my professional goals, I think about what Kismet Communications might look like in the future. I’d like the business to grow with me.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

The Public Relations Society of America is a great resource for people interested in careers in public relations. They also offer a strenuous accreditation process for PR practitioners. If a PR professional has an “APR” after his or her name, it’s noteworthy. APR stands for “Accreditation in Public Relations” and to earn those three little letters, practitioners study all the latest literature, prepare a portfolio of work, defend their work in front of a committee of their peers, and finally sit for a national exam.

The post Interview with a Public Relations Practitioner appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a computer scientist.

How would you describe what you do?

I use information and computation to solve problems and make our lives easier. The bigger picture is that I am trying to make computers as smart as humans by giving them knowledge and context. Knowledge allows them to understand how the world works, and context allows them to understand what you need right now.

What does your work entail?

I think up new algorithms and approaches. I then try those out by running experiments, and I package up the programs and results and give them to the customer or the scientific community.

What’s a typical work week like?

I spend about 20% of my time in meetings talking about problems with other people; about 20% of my time writing programs; about 20% of my time just thinking; about 20% of my time writing down previous results to show other people; and about 20% of my time reading to learn about new approaches and insights.

How did you get started?

I was in my mid 20s standing in my kitchen, and I realized I had no idea how a TV worked. I had never been a technical person, and at that moment I recognized that I had dismissed half of human knowledge. That started me on the path to going back to school to study computer science. Previously, I had studied psychology because I wanted to understand our thought processes, and at the time I was working in information technology, so computer science seemed like a natural choice.

The post Interview with a Computer Scientist appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?      

I live by air, water, food, and love. Ha. As for working, I’d say I make people smile, professionally.

How would you describe what you do?

I create musical compositions for artists. I engineer recording sessions. I mix songs.  I teach bass, piano, and composition (by way of music programming). I offer performances, both live and in studio, on bass, guitar, keys, & voice. Mostly, I talk & and encourage people.

What does your work entail?

My work takes a great deal of ‘people skills’.  I’m always interacting with different personality types & seeing people on good days as well as bad. I use music to lift people’s energy. If it’s a more intimate setting like the studio or my office, it will entail talking, asking serious questions, and making jokes in order to enhance the results of learning or recording. If it’s on stage, it will entail me physically demonstrating through my movements; ‘feeling a song in my bones’ and of course playing as many proper notes as possible to encourage the listener/viewer to be a part of my/our experience on stage.  My work also involves tons of homework, lots practice time, lots of bettering myself to produce better results, & lots of learning about people to evaluate how they intake and hold information. To be optimal, for me, involves sweating and working hard when no one is around so that when it’s game time, there are as few glitches on my part as possible. People expect me to always be on my game; to always deliver excellent results.

What’s a typical work week like?

My week will usually consist of a handful of scheduled lessons and performances booked months out.  It’s typical for my weeks to get full during the week or 2 prior. This means I have to be creative and very flexible with my scheduling. Every week is different. I guess a typical work week for me is atypical. Ha

How did you get started?

Heard and watched a guy RIPPING a white Prince guitar and I thought it looked fun. I got started by having fun on guitar, then using guitar and bass to heal my wounds/find my happy place. Initially, I had NO idea that I could make money playing instruments. To be more specific about the things I do now, I’d say I got started by making friends, networking.

What do you like about what you do?

I like it when people smile because they can easily do something after spending time learning from me that they thought they couldn’t do before. I like watching folks’ faces light up when they hear how great they (or their friend/family member) sounds when we’ve finished recording a song.  I like it when people come up to me and tell me how much they enjoyed watching me perform. That in particular is funny because I spent so much of my time working to do things on instruments that I felt others couldn’t do just to find out people connect more with my love for playing than they do with any of the cool tricks I can do. I like sharing my successes with friends and family. Love seeing them fill up with encouragement, faith in themselves, and a sense of pride for being a part of my success story, my life story. I really like my flexibility. I travel, spend time on friends and family, as I see fit. There are no ‘vacation days’.  I don’t have to answer to anyone when I take time for myself or anyone else. Out of respect and appreciation, of course, I notify my clients and others I work with as to my change in availability.

What do you dislike?

The part of what I do that involves the more glamorized music business can be very tedious. It’s difficult to navigate relationships and to watch my back, and my friends’ backs while making moves in the business. Most folks that I’ve dealt with, however ‘nice’ they may be, tend to lookout for themselves at the expense of anyone they can use.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I get compensated by the hour for my teaching/engineering, by the set for performances, and by song for production and songwriting. Production and songwriting for professional artists (artists signed to record labels/distribution deals) usually entails multiple checks over years from publishing and royalties.

How much do people in your career/field make?

This can vary in the extreme. Successful songwriters or producers can make millions. The average producer/songwriter make very little.  About 1% of people that do music make enough money to provide for themselves and their families. I like to have diversity with finances. I teach, perform, engineer, produce, write. Monthly or ‘steady’ income can range from 2k-5k and earnings from productions/writings can go from 2k to 10k for a song (I’m limiting this number to each song, but also to typical quarterly royalty/publishing also).

How much money did/do you make starting out?

With performing, I started out making $45 plus tips (usually 3-7 dollars) for 4hrs with 2 half hour breaks playing jazz and blues. Teaching was $25/hr and I had one student I saw for a half hour a week so I got $50/month. Beyond that, everything started at free. Haha.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Much of my education was independent as far as music goes. I was formally trained in music theory. I do a lot of different work so it requires all sorts of knowledge. For teaching, it’s understanding how individuals are different; the ability to tailor speech and teaching methods, it’s knowing music theory, being versed in what rhythms, chords and feeling constitutes a specific genre and being able to communicate/instruct these ideas. For performing, it’s being knowledgeable on my instrument in order to effectively learn songs on it, this also involves the same genre understanding/capability, knowing the notes and chords in songs and on my instrument, and basic music theory. For engineering and production, it’s much of those same skills, but amplified, also including basic knowledge of electronics, patching and routing cables for outboard gear, basic math and computing skills, and understanding to deliver a healthy mix of what you consider ‘quality’ while delivering what the clients want.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Scheduling. It takes a whole lot of effort to keep with a schedule that changes and updates daily.

What is most rewarding?

Satisfied clients. Love it! Love seeing the life change and the smiles.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Proceed with caution. Haha. It takes a lot of concentration and effort to sit down and work on something until its finished. It’s good to be able to understand people and to be sensitive to the needs of others. Practice a lot. Network and establish relationships. Even if you get formal training, college training etc., always do your own independent study to better yourself.  This is how many of the truly successful people I know have managed to really set themselves apart from others and carve out their niche.

How much time off do you get/take?

I don’t really say I have ‘off days’. Usually I have days where I’m working from home or have less to do. As for actual downtime, altogether, 3-4 weeks a year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That it’s easy. That I hangout with famous people; which I guess is kinda true, but work with them is more accurate most of the time.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

For one, for my students to fulfill their goals/dreams using some of the tools I shared with them. Outside of that, all the work I do is done in order to make a more free me and more free family. Free to love, free to share my time and creativity, just free.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

It’s not for everybody. There are hard times as well as the good times. If you’re only doing it for money, you should probably find a better reason. There are times when great things aren’t paying and there are times when small things pay a bunch. I find it healthy to approach every project with my love and passion for what I do and the fact that I get to share that with others. Approaching projects solely for money usually makes for a boring, half-hearted waste of time.

The post Interview with a Producer/Writer/Musician appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m the Deputy Director/Chief Operations Officer for the Cleveland Public Library in Cleveland, Ohio.

How would you describe what you do?

I oversee the day-to-day operations of the Library’s 28 branches, mobile services, the Ohio Library for the Blind and Physically Disabled (OLBPD), and the downtown Main Library and Louis Stokes Wing (these two buildings constitute the Library’s “downtown campus.”)

What does your work entail?

The majority of my time is spent on human resources issues, dealing with problems, planning and implementing procedures to make the Library run more effectively and efficiently.  I work very closely with the Executive Director/Chief Executive Officer and oversee initiatives for new programs and services.   I also represent the Library in the community and at the state and national levels.  I am also very involved in any new construction or renovation projects.  The following people report directly to me: Director of Public Services, Director of Human Resources, Director of Technical Services, Director of Property Management, Acting Director of Information Technology, and Acting Director of CLEVNET (the 38 member library consortium that was started by Cleveland Public Library).

Meetings, meetings, and more meetings!  Sometimes back to back without a break.

Like many people who come to the Library profession, my work background is eclectic and I had a variety of jobs in the for-profit world before taking my first job in a library as a children’s librarian.  Previous jobs included working for the phone company (phone repair, service representative, engineering clerk, marketing assistant, and curriculum designer for the training and development department), being a Training Manager for the manufacturing plant in New Jersey that produces the world’s supply of animal crackers, and a several year stint as an independent training and development consultant designing and delivering training for businesses and schools.  After two years of working solo I applied for, and was offered, the job of children’s librarian–to this day the most rewarding and fun job I’ve ever had.

Every day is different and every day brings unexpected problems or crises.  People generally don’t think about libraries as being stressful or fast-paced places in which to work,  but a large urban library in an economically challenged city that is operating with a reduced budget at a time of increasingly fast technological change is overflowing with challenges (and opportunities!).

What do you dislike?

I miss the opportunity for direct contact with the children I used to serve and am always looking for ways to “volunteer” for library programs or activities that involve working with kids.

Only our Executive Director has a contract so I am a full time regular employee of the Library.  I believe I am compensated very fairly for what I do.  Our Library has a very generous benefit plan as well.

Salaries vary widely across the country and depend on the size of the library, number of staff, annual budget, etc.  Annual salary can range from as low as $40,000 for a small town single facility library with a small staff to more than $200,000 for a position as director of a large metropolitan system.

When I started as a children’s librarian (in 1990) I believe I made $27,000.  At the time I accepted that position I took about a 50% cut in pay from my previous position as a Training Manager.  In my first director job (a single building library in a small town) I made $35,000 to start.  As the director of a small county library system with six locations I was making about $54,000 when I left to work for the Cleveland Public Library as Head of Main Library in 2008.  Since I joined the Cleveland Public Library I moved from Head of Main Library to Public Services Administrator to Acting Deputy Director to Deputy Director/Chief Operations Officer.

Again this depends on the size of the library and where it’s located.  Generally speaking, library directors should have a master’s degree in Library and Information Science.  In an academic library there may be a requirement of a second masters and/or doctoral degree as well.  I have an MLS, a Master’s in Public Administration, and a Doctorate in Educational Policy and Leadership with a specialization in organizational training and development.

Juggling multiple projects, removing barriers to employee success, and getting people to work collaboratively in the service of our patrons.

What is most rewarding?

Hearing individual stories from our patrons about how the Library has helped them and having the opportunity to mentor talented staff so they can move up in the organization.

Recognize that the libraries of tomorrow may bear very little resemblance to today’s libraries.  Learn to be very comfortable with change and ambiguity.  Never, ever stop investing in your own personal growth and development.

I get 22 days of paid vacation each year with the ability to carry some over from year to year if I don’t use it all in one calendar year.

That I sit around and read all day at work. Nothing could be further from the truth!  (Although I readily admit to sitting around all day and reading on the weekend and on my days off!)

I’d like to retire within the next six years, travel, and have the time to read all the stacks of books that I’ve been collecting that I haven’t been able to get to yet.

I’m very proud to work in a public library . . . one of the greatest democratic institutions in the world.  Everything libraries do contributes somehow to the greater good–that’s a claim very few other organizations can make.

The post Interview with the Deputy Director and COO of Cleveland Public Library appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a professional speaker.  I speak at conferences and conventions on the topic of how better memory will help you in business.  Things like remembering names and faces, giving speeches without notes, memorizing chapters of books, building relationships with your customers by remembering key (data) about them, that kind of thing.

What does your work entail?

Well, what the customer sees is they see me walk on a stage and give a 60-minute speech and think that’s the product.  And I think that’s what everybody thinks a speaker does but really that’s the easy part.  The main part is the marketing.

I’ve been doing this 21 years now and for the first ten years I was just beating up the telephone, calling companies saying, ‘hey, can I speak to your organization, can I speak for you?’  There was a lot of cold calls and selling for years until I built up a name.

Now these days a lot of it is just getting on that stage and speaking but any person or company that wants to grow can’t just stay there.  So I write a lot of blogs and articles and I continue to keep my name out there.

Overall it’s writing blogs, writing articles, it’s creating new products whether it be CD’s for books and then, of course, giving the speeches which is the fun part.

What’s a typical workweek look like?

Well in December a typical workweek looks like me typing up scripts, writing blogs, articles, creating new products, brainstorming, marketing plans, that kind of stuff because there’s not many speeches in December.  A month like September, October, jam-packed; that looks like me getting on an airplane flying to a speech.

For example, here was how September looked for me.  September the 6^th I gave a speech in Indianapolis.  So on the 5^th I flew up there, woke up in Indianapolis on the 6th, gave my speech and  came home.  The next week I got on an airplane and I flew to New York.  So I arrived the evening of the 11^th and on the 12^th I spoke in New York and then on the 13^th I got on a plane and I headed to Rome, Italy where I spoke in Italy on the 14^th.  Then from Italy I took a train to Germany and I spoke in Germany on the 20^th.  From there I got on an airplane and flew home.  I landed at home on Saturday and then Sunday I flew to Arizona for a speech on Monday.  I got back home on Monday night and then Tuesday I left for Europe.  I gave a speech there and then directly from Europe I left and I went to Africa for a week and gave conferences in Africa and then I came back home again.

In a four-week period I was in the USA for three days and I was home one day.  So it just all depends.  December I’m going to be home the whole month and in September I was in the United States for one day.

The positives about being a speaker are that in that four or five week stretch I got to see Italy and Germany and England and Nigeria and Ghana.  That’s the positive, you get to see the world.  The negative is you’re traveling all the time.

How did you get started in this?

Well I was 18 years old and I took a class because I thought it would help me with my memory.  I liked it and I ended up asking the company if I could go to work for them.

It wasn’t something that I pursued it just was a couple of chance introductions and it sounded interesting to me and so I decided to do it.  Nothing I sought after for sure.

What do you like about what you do?

I like to travel, I like to see the world.  I’ve been to probably 40 or 50 countries now.  I get to do something that comes very natural to me and that’s speaking on a stage in front of people and they pay me for it.

Before I had this job I rolled burritos at Taco Bueno. If you can get up on a stage and you are confident and you are fun you can do this.

That’s enjoyable and the field that I’m in, the field of memory, is a fun challenge.  But even if I wasn’t a memory speaker, if I was speaking about sales, leadership, or motivation I could still enjoy the travel to an extent and I’d still enjoy doing something that is a fun way to make a living.  I’m not doing something that’s dull.

What are some things that you dislike about it?

I dislike the travel, that’s what I love about it but it’s also what I hate about it.  That, I think, can be controlled.  Ten years ago I was just broke in Dallas, Fort Worth, Texas and I told myself, you know what, I’m going to be an international speaker, I’m going to travel the world, see the world and get paid to do it and that’s what I did.

It was by design.  Now I’m trying to design it the other way.  I’m trying to reverse it and go back to just sticking around in Texas.  And I’m not saying I regret all the travel I did I’m just at a different stage in my life.  But the traveling does get to you.  That’s probably the biggest drawback.

How do you make money or how are you compensated in this career?

Well there’s a couple of different ways that you can make money as a speaker.  The first way is how I did it for the first ten years.  And that is I spoke for free.   What I’d do is I’d call local Dallas/Fort Worth companies, car dealerships, real estate offices, mortgage companies and I’d ask them when they had their weekly sales meeting and they’d say Tuesday or Wednesday or whatever and I’d say, “hey, can I come out for 30 minutes and give you a free presentation on how better memory will improve your sales?”

They’d have me out and I’d go speak for free and then at the end sell tickets to a seminar or sell CD’s.  That is a great, great way for a speaker to get their feet wet and start to speaking and making money.  Unfortunately most speakers won’t do it because they don’t see themselves as sales people, they see themselves as speakers.  And that’s why most speakers don’t make it; you are a salesperson.

So that’s the number one way to make a living and I did it for ten years.  As I became a better speaker and became more well-known I was able to start charging for my speeches which, of course, I do now.

I still, depending upon the venue and the speech, will sell CD’s at the end of my speech and sometimes you can go speak at a conference to 500 people and then at the end sell your CD’s or books as well as get paid to speak.  Maybe you’ll get $7000, $10,000 to speak and then you’ll sell your CD’s at the end and sell another $10,000 in CD’s.

Some people who host seminars though have gotten wise to this and they realize, you know what, these speakers need me more than I need them.  There’s a million speakers out there, there’s not many people out there who can put 300 people in a conference room and some of the promoters now say to the speakers, “not only are we not going to pay you to speak, you can sell your CD’s but we’re going to split the sales 50/50”.  And a lot of the speakers, especially the ones who don’t have a good reputation where they can just charge $10,000 to speak, they’re over a barrel and they have to do it.  There are a lot of events like that around now where you’ll go speak at a conference and the promoter will split your sales with you 50/50.

How much money do you make?

Well, again that all depends on the month.  I charge $10,000 a speech.  I don’t always get that.  I recently gave a speech in London where I spoke for free, Donald Trump was a speaker that spoke after me and I sold $25,000 worth of stuff after I spoke for free.

I’ll tell you this, in 2006 I brought in $250,000 and my income has increased every year since 2006.

Essentially I’ll charge $10,000 per speech, some will pay it and some will say that we can’t pay you the full $10,000.  To which I’ll say well how about $7500 but you let me sell CD’s?

It’s a good income opportunity.

How much money did you make starting out?

Oh, it was awful.  I was 18 years old and my first year I made $7000.  I’ll say that again, $7000.  That was my gross income for that year but keep in mind I was 18.  I had no discipline really, I was working three days a week and I was going to college two days a week I saw it more as a part-time job.

With that said, even when I did get serious about it I think for the first seven or eight years I probably never made more than $30,000. $25,000 to $30,000 the first seven years I did this.

What education or skills are required or needed to do this career?

I have no college degree.  Before I had this job I rolled burritos at Taco Bueno.  If you can get up on a stage and you are confident and you are fun you can do this.  But that’s something that people really overlook. They think, I’ve got so much knowledge, so much value to share I’m going to be a speaker.  Well you have to be fun, and this is why I speak so much, my speech is fun.  I’m up there telling jokes, they’re laughing, I say 50% entertainment is in jokes and 50% education and I get more speaking jobs than the people who give 90% education because here’s the sad truth, people want to be entertained more than they want to be educated.  That’s the truth.  But that doesn’t mean I don’t give tremendous value.

Let me go back to your question.  A college education is not required unless you want to go to work for somebody who promotes speakers and they require you to have it but most speakers are self-employed. People are not going to hire you to speak at their conference because you have a degree.  People are going to hire you to speak at their conference if you hold their attention, if you’re fun, and if you give value. And because of that you just you need become an expert on whatever topic you speak about.  If you speak to a leadership or sales or team building or whatever it is, solidify yourself as an expert in that field.  You don’t need certificates or degrees to be an expert you just simply need to know your stuff.

One of the easiest ways to position yourself as an expert is to start writing blogs and to start writing books even if it’s just eBooks.  When I walk into a prospective customer instead of handing them a business card I say, ‘hey, here’s my book consider me for your conference’.  They look at my book and know I must be an authority on what I speak about.

So things like that are more valuable than degrees.

What would you say is most challenging about what you do?

Getting the business, getting the speeches.  That’s without question.  There’s something called the NSA, it’s the National Speakers Association.  The NSA is full of people who are dynamic speakers but they just aren’t good marketers.  The hardest part about this business is being a good marketer, being able to get the speeches.  So you’ve got to learn how to build an email list, how to make cold calls, how to advertise, how to market.  That’s the hardest part of it.

What would you say is most rewarding?

Helping people and educating people, seeing the light bulbs go off in their head is great.  It’s also great to be able to make an income where you can help out your friends and your family if they need help and that’s an awesome feeling.

What advise would you offer to someone considering this career?

I’d say just do it!  Just dive in and start speaking.  I remember I was 27 years old and I was talking to somebody who was in their early 60’s and she said, I want to finish my master’s degree in two years and by the time I’m 65 I want to be out there speaking.  And I looked at her and I said, you know what, I’m 27 and I apologize but I’ve got to go right now because I’ve got a speech in the morning and I don’t have a degree.

And she just looked at me dumbfounded.  It shook her paradigm.  She needed to get a degree, she needed to do this and this and then she was going to be speaking within three years and I was 27 without a degree and I had a speech the next morning.

My advice would be to start writing articles, start writing blogs, start writing eBooks on your topic that you want to speak as to (list) yourself as an expert and then if it’s something that applies to businesses call your local businesses, your car dealerships, your real estate officers, your mortgage companies, your stock brokers and say, hey, do you have a staff meeting or a sales meeting once a week?  Can I come in there for free and give a free 30-minute workshop?

A lot of them are going to tell you, yeah, come on in.  Then my next suggestion is have something to sell at the end even if it’s just a $20, $30, $40 CD/book or package.

But get your feet wet and get started tomorrow.  Write articles, write blogs, put content out there and then at the very least start speaking for free in your local area.

How much time do you take off?

It’s hard to say.  For example, this week is the week of the World Series.  In June, July, August I was getting speaking requests for this week and next week.  I declined all speaking requests.  I was turning down speeches that were going to pay me $7000, $8000 and $9000 but I was declining all of them because this is the week of the World Series and there was a chance the Texas Rangers might be in the World Series.

So I not only chose this week as a week off I lost maybe $10,000 or $15,000 because of my belief in the Rangers. I remember in 2011 I basically did nothing except speak.

A speaker could take off three or four months of the year if they wanted.

What is a common misconception that people have about what you do?

I think a common misconception is that if you’re a good speaker the speeches will just come.

That if you have a good product and you’re a good speaker well then you’re going to be busy.  That’s not the truth.  It’s more important to be a good marketer and a good salesperson.  Marketing and selling is more important than being a good speaker.  If you’re not a marketer or you’re not a salesperson you will fail unless you have a partner or somebody who can do the marketing and sales for you.  But if you’re just a great charismatic speaker you’re going to fail this business without marketing and sales.

What are your goals and dreams for the future?

I want to travel less.  I want to sell more CD’s and DVD’s and books online.  I’d love to walk by my CD’s and books at stores like Barnes & Nobles and stuff like that.  That’s my biggest goal and dream for the future, clear up more of my time where I can still travel but when I do it’s on my terms and for fun.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

It’s very rewarding and you can get paid well.  I’ve been lucky enough to be able to charge $10,000 for about a year now.  You’ve got to put in a lot of work and write blogs and articles and content and putting it out there.  Also being honest will pay dividends in your career.  For example, somebody recently called me, they booked me for a speech and I charged them, I think, $7000 to speak and then two weeks later I was talking to somebody who booked speeches for me and I said, yeah, I just got back from Denver, I spoke to this XYZ company and they said, you’re kidding?  I called XYZ Company and tried to get you there and they said no!

Basically what happens was they hung up the phone with that speaker’s agent, they Googled me, contacted me directly and got a lower fee.  And when I found that out I went home, wrote a check for 25% and took it over to the agent and paid them.  I didn’t have to do that.  The agent was so appreciative and it was just honest and it builds that relationship and that’s going to go a long way in this business.

The post Interview with a Public Speaker(USA Memory Champion Ron White) appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I currently work in the field of Risk Management.

How would you describe what you do?

I help with the success of our organization by helping to identify the risks that we could encounter.  From there I rate the risk to see how often it could happen, and if it happens what effect will it have on our operations.  Once I have identified the risk and what effect it will have, then I look at how we can reduce the risk.  Reducing the risk may encompass transferring the risk, eliminating the risk, or accepting the risk.

What does your work entail?

Risk Management in itself encompasses a number of areas.  Depending on what industry you work in, you might have more or less job functions than what I currently do.  At the present time I am the Senior Risk Management Analyst for the Clark County Nevada Department of Aviation.  Outside this industry the position can be classed as Risk Manager or Senior Risk Manager. This position currently encompasses 5 airports which includes two general aviation airports, an executive (business jets) airport, a sport airport, and McCarran International Airport.  In addition, I also have a Consolidated Rental Car Facility, and our department is one of the largest landlords in Southern Nevada with a number of properties spread out across the County.

For me, the position has me handling the following areas directly:

• Liability incidents, claims, and law suits
• Property damage, and theft incidents, claims and law suits
• The review of insurance language in contracts for vendors, construction projects
• Handling the renewals of our insurance policies
• Review and approval of Certificates of Insurance
• Provide reports and stats on incident, claims and legal activity
• Collect from third parties for damage to Department of Aviation (DOA) property
• Investigate incidents and claims
• Provide information to and work with attorneys on claims in litigation
• Review workers compensation claim activity and provide reports to management
• Review and update as needed the Risk Management manual
• Conduct training classes on Risk Management and Report writing
• Ensure that the incident reporting system is functioning and reports are complete
• Train staff on changes in the Risk Management programs
• Management of the Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) program including maintaining the information required to ensure the program is current and up to date
• Perform risk assessments, and make recommendations on how to reduce risk which can range from an engineering fix, a risk transfer, additional insurance coverage, training, or working with management on awareness programs
• Attend pre-bids for services and activities for the DOA to ensure the successful bidder can meet and provide the DOA with the proper insurance coverages.

In addition to risk management I am also responsible for the management of our fleet operations which has over 800 units that allow us to maintain our airport facilities.

What’s a typical work week like?

One thing about risk management is that it always changes and being flexible is a huge key to being successful. However the typical week starts with Monday morning reviewing what transpired over the weekend.  I review all incident reports and perform any needed follow up to those reports.  In addition I review emails and return phone calls. Generally there are always different things to do such as reports, investigations, insurance reviews, collections activities etc.

Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursdays are generally days that I may be involved in meetings in between the normal day to day activities like Mondays.  Friday is generally a catch up day to wrap up anything that started during the week.

I am also involved in a number of trade associations and attend meetings and conference calls.  Some of the trade associations include but are not limited to: the Risk and Insurance Management Society (RIMS) and the Council on Litigation Management (CLM).

How did you get started?

Years ago not many people had heard of or wanted to be a risk manager.  So most of us older risk managers simply got into the business of risk management by accident.  For me, I was in casino operations at the time and after 17 years in the food and beverage side of the business, there was a posting asking for someone from operations to learn human resource functions in an 18 month temporary position with the primary duties of managing employees.  Well that was the start of a whole new career path that I never thought of or even considered.

Not one time during the interview did any one talk about risk management, safety or work comp programs.

Of the 100 plus people who applied, I was hired for the position.  On my very first day in this new position I was in my new office and some workers delivered a file cabinet and an OSHA log.  I asked what it was and was told workers’ comp.  I had no clue what that was at the time, but it was my start in the risk management field.  Well the temporary position has turned into 25 years of an exciting career that I would not trade with anyone.

What do you like about what you do?

The fact that you never get bored!  Even after so many years in the field, just when you thought you’d heard everything, you find out something new, or see a claim you never even thought about. This position changes all the time.  Insurance changes based on what is happening throughout the world, government regulation changes, risk changes all the time, and incident and claims are always a daily occurrence. So I like and thrive on the ever changing industry.

What do you dislike?

For a long time I took it personally when I would bring something to management and management failed to act on it.  Also I did not like it when we paid on claims when we knew there was no merit to the claim; however I learned two important things.  1. In looking at the big picture management felt that it was worth the risk not to act on something, and 2. When you weigh the cost of fighting something based upon the principle and not what is in the best interest of the company as a whole, in another words would it be cheaper to settle something for a nuisance value then to spend the company’s money to fight something.  It is hard to think in the bigger scheme of things, but to be successful you need to be open minded.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

In this business there are a number of ways you are compensated, however I am paid a salary, and working in a government position our benefit package is great, the time off is great, and the medical insurance is great.

How much do people in your field/career make?

Starting out and depending on what area of risk management you want to practice in, the pay can be an hourly rate of $12 – $18 per hour for clerks to claims examiners at $25-$35K.  General Risk Managers can make $50 – $80K, Directors of Risk Management can make $75 – $120K plus bonus.  There is a senior management position called Chief Risk Officer (CRO) that can make $150-300K plus bonus.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

Back when I got into the business I was working in the casino industry, and the pay back in the day was not a lot of money, however casino benefits were very good, so I cannot give a good comparison, except, to say the my benefits at the time were special parking and even a company vehicle, free meals, laundry service, free shows/drinks etc. free hotel stays, great travel benefits, and the opportunity to travel, as I was on the opening team for a casino in New Zealand for example.  The pay was $40-50K.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Today there are schools and programs for risk management.  Back when I started out there were no resources.  You learned from others, and asked a lot of questions.  A lot was trial and error.  Many resources were with insurance agents, and insurance brokers.

Today, through trade associations and some colleges there are risk management programs.  There are also risk management certifications.  Much of what we do is common sense, doing the right thing.  What you need are general management skills, organizational skills, and the trust to learn from each other.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Many people do not understand what risk management is and what we do.  Risk Managers are to blame for many of this; however a good risk manager will show the Total Cost Of Risk (TCOI), and the Return On Investment (ROI).

The best way to describe this, would be to look at the commercial from Progressive, where Flo is selling insurance and has all these shelves with boxes on them for auto, home and bundles.  The boxes are empty, but people are buying them.  This is called selling the invisible.  There is a book that you can read called by the same title “Selling The Invisible” which every risk manager should read.  It is not an easy read but if you understand the message and apply it, it will help you understand how to sell risk management.  The challenge is getting management to understand that risk management is not a cost of doing business but brings value to the bottom line of the company.

What is most rewarding?

I would have to say that when you can show an ROI to your company it shows your net worth.  For example in the 5 years that I have been in my current position, I have shown an ROI of over six million dollars.  These are real to the company bottom line.  Good claims management, insurance marketing, legal management, collections of damage to company property, reduction of claims and the reduction in the severity of claims.

When management comes to you and tells you for the first time they “get it” and they understand what risk management is all about, is the highest pay back you as a risk manager can get.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Go for it!  Do not be over bearing!  Be flexible! Look for the big picture!  Learn everything you can!  Invest in yourself.

How much time off do you get/take?

I do not take the time off that I am entitled to for the most part, but that is just me.  I earn about three weeks per year, plus every government holiday.  I take the holidays and some time here and there so I do not lose it.  When you enjoy what you’re doing, it does not seem like work, so vacation time is not an issue for me.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

I am an insurance salesman.  I cost the company money.  I hinder people from doing their normal jobs.  All of these are misconceptions that risk managers have to deal with, however a good risk manager can overcome this with the ability to see risk management as a part of a team, and that using risk management is a tool to protect the company, and maximize the company profits.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I dream of teaching others, and mentoring those who want to be successful in risk management and in business as a whole.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

The most important thing about risk management in any company is that you have a part in every area of the company.  There are not many jobs except for the CEO and CFO that someone touches every part of the business.  This is very exciting, and good risk managers will take the time to learn about every facet of the company.  Learn every position within the company.  Become an asset to the company.  Be a team player.  Most importantly,  you have to be flexible.

The post Interview with a Risk Manager appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I provide consulting services in the field of architectural acoustics.

How would you describe what you do?

A consultant is a professional with expertise that advises others.  My field of expertise is architectural acoustics, which is an engineering discipline concerned with sound and vibration in buildings.  Sound and vibration profoundly affect the occupants of buildings.  I help my clients to design or improve buildings to provide a good occupant experience.

What does your work entail?

Most of my work is related to designing new buildings.  Each of these building designs is a different project.  I work on a number of projects simultaneously for different clients.  Each project is usually at a different phase of development.  For each project my work generally follows these four steps in a cycle:

• Review the project documentation (Owner’s requirements, drawings, specifications, etc.)
• Perform acoustical analyses
• Advise design team members on what acoustical criteria should be achieved and how to achieve it
• Coordinate with the design team to implement efficient and effective design solutions

Some of my work is related to testing/measuring existing buildings or future project sites for various acoustical characteristics.  This work requires the use of instrumentation and is performed according to standardized test procedures.  This work also includes analysis of measured sound data to determine the results of the tests.

Some of my work is related to troubleshooting noise or vibration problems in existing buildings.  This work requires me to visit the site, make observations and record sound measurements.  I then determine by analysis and past experience how to correct the problem.

All of the work described above is documented in some form (emails, letters, reports, drawings, specifications, etc.).  In a sense, this documentation is the physical form of my deliverable to my clients.  It records and transmits my advice and recommendations to clients.  Production of this documentation requires a fair amount of time.

What’s a typical work week like?

I work regular business hours.  Sometimes I work early or late to accommodate the schedules of international clients.  I attend meetings with clients (in person or via the internet) and I perform the tasks described above.

How did you get started?

My career started in college.  I obtained bachelor’s and master’s degrees in mechanical engineering.  All of my elective coursework was focused on acoustics and vibration.

Like most college graduates I got a job in my field of study.  Those first few years I spent learning everything I could from experienced engineers about how to apply my theoretical knowledge and how to work with clients.

What do you like about what you do?

I like to solve problems; especially new problems.  I enjoy researching and analyzing.

What do you dislike?

In many ways a consultant, especially a successful consultant, must market their expertise and services.  I am not comfortable with this aspect of my career.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I work for a consulting firm and so I am salaried, like most professionals.

How much money do Acoustical Consultants make?

Average salaries for beginning consultants with a bachelor’s degree and little experience will likely be around $45,000.  Average salaries for senior consultants are likely to be around $85,000.  Senior consultants with management responsibilities will typically have salaries exceeding $100,000.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

I believe I had an annual salary of $45,000.  I make considerably more than that now.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Acoustical consultants have various backgrounds.  Most of them have a degree in physics, engineering or architecture.  There are some university programs in architectural acoustics.  I would recommend seeking one of these programs if you are interested in this profession.  Wikipedia has a current list of programs: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Academic_programs_in_acoustics.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Troubleshooting existing noise and vibration problems is typically the most challenging aspect of my work.  Existing problems have many constraints and some are not practical to modify.  In new building design, conditions are more fluid and problems can be avoided.

What is most rewarding?

These troubleshooting problems are also more rewarding.  Not just because of the challenge, but because I am more intimately involved with the process and witnessing the result.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Get a good education at a university offering a degree in architectural acoustics.  Participate and network in the Acoustical Society of America (ASA) while in college.  Apply to the best acoustical consulting firms in the geography of your choice.

How much time off do you get/take?

At this stage in my career I accumulate 160 hours of vacation time yearly.  A consultant at the beginning of their career will typically accumulate 80 hours of vacation time yearly.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

There are many myths and misunderstandings about acoustics.  Although hearing is an everyday experience for most people, the actual phenomenon of sound is not well understood by most people.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I have been involved with some large international projects in the UAE, Jordan, Saudi Arabia, China and Australia.  I would like to increase the number of projects that I work on in Asia.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

More information about acoustical consulting and architectural acoustics can be found at NCAC and ASA TCAA.

http://www.ncac.com/

http://tcaa.acosoc.org/

The post Interview with an Architectural Acoustics Consultant appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I work with college students to determine all aspects of their career path. I do workshops on resume writing, the job search, and finding a major. I also work with students one-on-one to help them select a major or career path, write their resumes and cover letters, find internships and jobs, and do mock interviews. And to round it out I administer and review two career-based tests, the Strong Interest Inventory and the Myers-Briggs.

How would you describe what you do?

I would describe it as very helpful for the students who take initiative and work with us. We have a huge network for connections and a lot of real world experience. On busy days, it can be hard to keep track of the students I’m meeting with and what we’re discussing, but it’s so rewarding when we’re able to accomplish what they need. I’d also say it’s more administrative than you may think. Although the majority of what I do is interaction with others, I also keep notes on my meetings, send and respond to emails, and do internet research on relevant topics.

What does your work entail?

My work entails a lot of passion and knowledge of the real world. You also need a lot of patience and the ability to problem solve/think outside the box. It helps if you have solid computer skills.

What’s a typical work week like?

I don’t think I have a typical week! My hours are from 8-5, but it’s not uncommon to stay late to catch up on things and prepare for the next day. We also are sometimes required to come to campus on weekends for open houses. I LOVE that every day is different. Some days have student workshops, some days are conferences, and some days are all student appointments.

How did you get started?

I was originally going to be a high school history teacher. As I progressed through my undergrad, I realized I enjoyed working with college students, and student teaching was a rough experience for me. I enrolled in graduate school for Student Affairs in Higher Education and loved the experience. I did internships with Housing, Women’s Services, Career Development, and Study Abroad. I kept in touch with my supervisors, and when a job opened where I did my Career Development internship, it was a perfect fit.

What do you like about what you do?

I like that every day is different, and it’s a chance to help students. Not knowing where you want to go in life is definitely scary, so it’s rewarding to help ease some of that stress.

What do you dislike?

I think what I dislike the most is when students don’t want to be helped. Like when they make an appointment but then never show up for it. It’s hard to know you can make a difference but they aren’t open to it.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

It can be different everywhere you go. I get paid monthly. I also get good benefits and the opportunity to go to conferences for professional development.

How much money do you make?

Again, this can vary depending on where you are. I make about $35,000, but that is starting level. Directors can make upwards of $65,000 depending on the state and type of institution.

How much money do you make starting out?

I started at $35,000, but I know some places can start around $50,000.

What education or skills are needed to do this?

A strong knowledge of the working world is beneficial. Most schools also require a Masters degree in a related field. A lot of my Masters-level classes were counseling based, and I think that is what’s most helpful for me.

What is most challenging about what you do?

The most challenging part is hitting that wall where you don’t know what else you can do to help a student. Either what they want isn’t offered at this school, or they just have so many interests they can’t pick which to really pursue. It’s also challenging to collaborate with faculty sometimes, because we’re on very different schedules.

What is most rewarding?

I really enjoy seeing the proverbial light bulb go off! When they realize “Oh yeah, I really can do that for a job” or “wow, I’m actually pretty good at interviewing.” It’s an incredible boost of confidence for them.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Have a good knowledge of yourself first. You can’t help someone else figure themselves out if you can’t figure your own self out! You also need to keep up on research that’s being done, too.

How much time off do you get/take?

It depends on where you are. I get sick, vacation, and personal time, some of which rolls from year to year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

We can’t place students. We don’t automatically give you jobs. We give you the tools to do it on your own, but we can’t do it for you.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I would love to get more involved on campus and in professional organizations. I also want to become resume and Myers Briggs-certified. And it would be nice to get a Doctor of Education, too!

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

It’s so fun and many students are inspirational! There are also lots of opportunities to continue to learn.

The post College Career Counselor appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I teach NY state-mandated biology to high school students in grades 9 and 10 of a high-needs school saturated with rural poverty.  Some of them choose to learn it.  I also teach an elective I was allowed to create called “Food, Land, and You” about agriculture, health, and cooking.  We are in the process of setting up a student-run farm CSA with real community members.   Most students love this class because I try to cover topics that are relevent to their lives through the lens of sustainability with technology woven into the fabric of everyday instruction.

How would you describe what you do?

Well, I’m a teacher.  Sadly, my job description hasn’t changed much in the last 100 years and neither have schools in general, which is weird because society certainly has and our jobs are technically to prepare students for the future.  I try to teach more 21st Century Skills in class including technology literacy, problem solving, collaboration, and critical thinking.  If answers are a mouse-click away, why should we have to memorize many of the things we ask our students to do?

What does your work entail?

I spend a lot if time setting up and taking down labs, cleaning tables, and picking broken test tube glass out of the sinks.  My school doesn’t give me any more extra time to do this than other-subject teachers get.  Some schools give science teachers an extra free period, some don’t .  Some schools even have a designated lab technician that will do all of this for you.  Some schools require science teachers to move their labs from class to class on a cart!  Science teachers are usually busy with the variety of activities that go along with being a good science teacher and are often perceived as socially-awkward or pompous by their colleagues.

What’s a typical work week like?

The school day starts at 8:05 but I usually come in an hour early to set labs up or clean from the previous day.  I can also enjoy a coffee and check science news to share before the halls are flooded by chatty teenagers.  We have 9-40 minute periods.  I teach 5 periods in addition to a study hall, free period, lunch, and lunch duty.  Every other day a class has a double period lab block.  The day ends at 2:45.  We have alternating “A” and “B” days which allow for changes in the schedule.  Occasionally we have an assembly or special event that breaks up a typical week.

How did you get started?

I’ve always liked science, nature, and teaching.  I knew I wanted to be a science teacher since I was in high school.  My undergrad was strictly environmental/forest biology and I went right to grad school for my teacher prep work.  In New York State all teachers need a Masters degree anyway.

What do you like about what you do?

Teaching science allows you to be creative and to use a variety of approaches for instruction.  Students and colleagues always bring in stuff…dead birds, deer hearts, hawk talons, etc. and businesses and colleges like to give things away to science teachers.  I feel that science teachers are lucky because it is easy to engage students and you often reach some of those students that many other teachers have a hard time developing rapport with.  The BEST part of the job….the clean slate you get at the start of the next year and being able to change things that didn’t work.

What do you dislike?

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

We’re salary…but the range varies widely by state and district’s negotiated contract.  We have a step system that gives us a roughly 3% raise a year.  Eight years in, I’m making about $44K a year.  I think I started at around 38K.  I have a colleague that is finally making $100K this year, but it is his 50th year teaching.  You earn extra if you coach, tutor, chaperone, etc.  There always seems to be these opportunities available to make more.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

This varies by state, drastically.  In NY state you need a masters degree within 5 years of teaching and a bachelor’s degree to start.  There are also all sorts of other requirements like teacher certification exams, child abuse workshops, fingerprinting, 1 year of a foreign language, student observations/teaching,  and misc. program requirements at each university.  Getting certified in NYS is actually a tedious process.  In general, you need to be knowledgeable, patient, flexible, reliable, and have a good personality to be a good teacher.

What is most challenging about what you do?

I could write a lot about this.  I teach in a high-needs, rural school that presents obvious challenges of students that lack supplies and parents that don’t value education but the most frustrating thing to me is teaching in a broken system that hasn’t evolved with the rest of the professions.  Its challenging to get colleagues on board with tech literacy and it’s hard to implement initiatives if administrators aren’t supportive or too bogged down with discipline.  I go to a few conferences each year and find them inspiring and rejuvenating but then I have to return to the broken system with 0% chance of changing things so I end up doing the changes in my own classroom instead.

What is most rewarding?

Students that get inspired by your actions.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Anyone can be a teacher but only a small fraction are exceptional teachers…and it takes time.  I hope to be one someday.  Unfortunately, the pay checks don’t distinguish between the exceptional and the bad.  It’s a fun subject to teach but if you plan on teaching biology or earth science without incorporating evolution into the curriculum, you should probably do the scientific community a favor and teach something else.

How much time off do you get/take?

I get 10 sick days and 3 personal days a year.  I never come close to using them all.  They roll over and accumulate.  We get all major holidays and summers off but a great deal of professional development curriculum work happens then, usually unpaid.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

Teachers are targets by everyone for some reason.  I’ve heard we’re overpaid, underpaid, lazy, underworked, can’t do “real jobs”, and even responsible for state and federal deficit problems.  I feel they’re all caring individuals and are compensated fairly for what they do…I feel the exceptional ones could be compensated more though.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I want to plow through the red tape and create the right kind of learning environment that is FOR students.  Schools seem to be about board meetings, capital improvement projects, taxes, bus drills, custodian needs, etc.  We need to shift it to the students and their needs.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Overall, very rewarding!

The post Interview with a Biology Teacher appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

Senior Executive Director – The Recording Academy ®, Atlanta Chapter since 2000.
http://www.grammy365.com/chapters/atlanta-chapter
http://www.grammy365.com/

How would you describe what you do?

The Recording Academy is a member based organization comprised of musicians, singers/songwriters, producers/engineers and music industry professionals. Everything I am charged with doing is based on serving our members.

What does your work entail?

My job entails varying facets, but in a nutshell: I produce GRAMMY Professional Development events for our members year round. I also secure the sponsorship dollars to underwrite the 12 events we produce each year. I am responsible for making our music community aware of our organizations initiatives, identifying eligible potential members for our organization and retaining the ones we currently have. I run a 35 person Board of Governors that is elected in by our membership and oversee the Chapters committees as well. I am the spokesperson for this particular Chapter and find myself acting as the Chapters publicist, as well. My job also includes interfacing and working with each department within our organization, Members Services, Awards, Advocacy, and our GRAMMY and MusiCares Foundations, etc ….

What’s a typical work week like?

Back to back meetings, conference calls, committee or board meetings … meeting with artists, musicians, producers and music business professionals … speaking to students and so on … attending music industry events, seeing shows … managing an office.

How did you get started?

I was in alternative rock bands in the 80’s and 90’s while I did PR and booked talent for cutting edge nightclubs. A big time concert promoter/artist mgr. hired me right out of a club and taught me BIG PICTURE music industry business .. I credit him for believing in me, giving me a chance and teaching me the biz. That man is Charlie Brusco and he runs Red Light Management Atlanta now …

What do you like about what you do?

I like being a part of an organization with global recognition and such illustrious celebrated appeal. EVERYBODY knows The GRAMMY’s, hard not to ‘like’ that. But most people don’t know the great work The Recording Academy does year round however … our Advocacy work, our GRAMMY professional development, MusiCares, etc. That’s what I like the most …

What I LOVE the most about what I do is being around creative people the majority of the time. Being around amazing talent who are so passionate about their art is infectious and inspiring …. It’s exciting to be around them before they hit the ‘big time’ …

What do you dislike?

I dislike these things:
1) Being around incredible talent who will never make it in this business

2) Being around people who think they are talented (but are not) and will never make it in this business

3) Being around people who have mediocre talent and have made it in this business

I’m not sure I know which is worse to be around …

I can also say it’s hard to like the egos and attitudes that come with this industry. More often than not – it’s the handlers around the artists that have the ego, not always the artist themselves.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I’m a salaried employee of The Recording Academy.

How much do people in your field/career make?

NO CLUE – it varies market to market and based on the expertise you bring to the position (and how well you negotiate) would determine the salary range.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

(Never ask a lady her age, weight or how much money she makes … ha!) I actually can’t remember … let’s just say I made far less than what I spent.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Colleges who offer Music Business programs, certificates and degrees would certainly better prepare you and give you an edge in this business, but it is not mandatory …

What is most challenging about what you do?

Raising sponsorship dollars in a compromised economy.

What is most rewarding?

Securing sponsorship dollars in a compromised economy (regardless).

No, no – while that IS rewarding, the most rewarding aspect of this job are the relationships you make over the years …

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Learn everything you can about this industry – go to college for this, if you can. Do internships – work HARD, BE NICE, lose the attitude and sense of entitlement. Just be willing to learn and have a positive attitude!

Remember there is a line of people waiting to work in this industry twice as hard for half the pay….

How much time off do you get/take?

I’m given 4 weeks paid vacation time a year – but have not been able to take that much time off due to the workload yet …

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That you actually work hard and have to be accountable. It’s not a party …

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

Be careful what you wish for in life …sometimes you actually might get it, be ready.

My goals? (with that thought in mind ..) is to find the perfect balance between career and personal life, it’s harder than you think… I’m still trying.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

That I did not design this path and that I have been extremely fortunate to be led this way none the less. The advantages young people have today are endless however – it’s all opportunity the way I see it. In an ever changing music industry model, you can write your own ticket on how to be successful …. Dare to color outside the lines, that’s really what we’re all looking for ….do something different !!! and GOOD LUCK!

The post Interview with Senior Executive Director of The Recording Academy appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a massage therapist. My clients are a combination of desk jockeys, weekend warriors and pregnant women.

How would you describe what you do?

I run a small service business providing massage. I see clients in my office for 30, 60 or 90 minute sessions. I provide mostly relaxation massage and also employ some pain-relieving techniques for people dealing with various health issues.

What does your work entail?

I’ve got all the responsibilities of running an office, like keeping the office clean and organized and stocked up on basic supplies.  Massage businesses involve record keeping and filing. I create intake forms and a chart for each new client and then update and write treatment notes with each visit. Most states have security and storage requirements, for example I’m required to keep all client records in a locked cabinet and keep for a minimum of seven years from the clients last visit. I’m responsible for making sure those regulations are followed.

I answer my own phone and emails from clients and handle all scheduling myself. (I use an online booking system that automatically sends email reminders to clients the day before their appointment. That’s pretty awesome.)

I handle all my own marketing. I hired a designer to create my website, but I update my site and blog regularly on my own. I create email newsletters monthly and send to clients. I also use email to tell clients about last minute open appointments when they occur.

Then there’s the actual massage! I speak with each client before their appointment and determine their needs and goals for the session. Is it total relaxation? Relieving that nagging sciatic pain or tight hamstrings? I integrate a variety of techniques, including relaxation massage, deep tissue manipulation and stretching  to create a treatment specifically for that client’s needs for that day.

I perform the massage then the client pays me, usually schedules another appointment and leaves much more relaxed and happy than when they came in!

What’s a typical work week like?

It varies greatly. I see clients five to six days a week (because I prefer to have a flexible schedule). I take most Sundays off and alternate Mondays and Wednesdays off, too. I typically see four to five clients each on the days I work, and average of 18-22 clients a week. I plan 30 minutes between clients to allow time to chat after appointments and get the massage room ready for the next client. I spend about 4 to 5 hours a week doing non-massage work like the record keeping, marketing, bringing laundry back and forth to the laundromat (I have it done by the staff there), making bank deposits and running other errands.

How did you get started?

I worked in retail pharmacy for 7 years and I was burnt out. I knew I wanted to work with people in a health and wellness setting, but without the confines of insurance billing. I got a few massages, took a liking to it and spoke with several massage therapists. I researched a few massage schools in my area and spoke to graduates of each. I visited a local school and applied the next day. I interned at a chiropractic office and when I graduated, immediately started renting a room there to see massage clients.

What do you like about what you do?

The clients. I love that clients come into my office happy to see me and get a massage. I love that my clients like paying for massage, and truly value the service I provide, because it helps them feel great.

What do you dislike?

Sometimes running a one-person business is exhausting, and a little lonely.  I’ve created a great local network of massage therapists and we meet often to help each other through the tougher business tasks and just serve as sounding boards for each other.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

My clients pay me directly at the time they receive a massage.

How much do people in your career/field make?

Massage therapists can make as little as nothing and as much as $200K a year (or more). The average full-time therapist will take home $35-$55K a year. Those who work part time will make much less, and many will expand their businesses to include other therapists and services and earn much more.  According to a recent industry report (http://www.amtamassage.org/articles/2/PressRelease/detail/2545)  “In 2011, the average annual income for a massage therapist (including tips) was estimated to be $21,028.” Considering that 53% of the respondents also hold jobs in other industries, I feel this is an accurate estimate.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

In the first calendar year, I netted about $12,000. Nowadays, after 7 years in business, I net about $45,000 from my massage business, seeing about 18 clients a week.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Education requirements vary from state to state. Most states require completion of a program from an accredited school. Programs can vary from 250 hours to 1500 hours of schooling, or more. Many (but not all) states require that a massage therapists pass a standardized exam before a license is granted. There’s a great resource on state requirements here http://www.massagemag.com/Resources/massage-laws-legislation.php

My training was 822 hours at a massage-specific school. The curriculum included Anatomy and Physiology as well as hands-on massage classes teaching a variety of techniques. There was also a public clinic, which was the best way to truly get ready for  a career in massage.

What is most challenging about what you do?

It seemed like when I started up, everything had a steep learning curve. From creating a filing system to deciding which oil washed out of sheets easier to getting over being shy so I could promote my business more effectively, it was all scary.  It seemed overwhelming at first, and having a solo business can be very lonely. Feeling alone and overwhelmed was not fun. After I created a network of massage therapists and business owners, that changed. Having friends to collaborate and plan with makes every part of business ownership and the actual massage practice much better.

What is most rewarding?

Massage can change a person’s life. The change can be as profound as a decrease in pain that has been debilitating, so the client can return to normal activities. Or the change can be as slight as relieving someone’s stress so they have a better day and a good night’s sleep. I have a client I’ve been working with since he was nine. He’s got some sensory integration issues related to Aspergers Syndrome and really struggled with touch and anxiety. After several months of regular massage and practicing relaxation techniques, he began to hug his mom.  He wrestles with his little brother. That’s huge, and it is extremely rewarding.

I also love the autonomy of running my own business. I get to choose my schedule and keep it flexible. I am accountable to my clients and myself, I like not having to report to a supervisor.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Be very cautious about the massage program you attend. Visit all the schools you are considering. Ask questions like, “What percentage of your graduates are practicing massage 3 to 5 years after graduation,” and, “how do you help recent graduates find job placements.” Look for a school that devotes part of the curriculum to business classes and has a strong alumni support structure.

Seek out a graduate of the school, someone who’s been out for at least a few years, to interview before you make any decisions. Be sure to ask them what they felt was  good and bad about the program, and if they feel there were any gaps in their education.

How much time off do you get/take?

I spend about 36-42 hours at my office on any given week, but I can break that up however I choose. In the summer I make every other weekend a 3 day weekend, and I’ll take a full 5 to 7 days off as well. I also take a week away from the office every fall to attend a massage convention, and 3 to 4 days off every March for the same reason. In theory, I can take as much vacation time as I want, whenever I want. Of course, I don’t make any money when I’m not working.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

People think that the $80/hour I charge for massage goes directly into my pocket. In reality, after taxes, rent, supplies and other expenses, my net income on a massage is about $40.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I started out renting a tiny room in a chiropractor’s office, and 3 years ago moved to my own office with a second room that I rent out to another therapist. I have a full schedule and only accept new clients on a limited basis. I feel like I’ve achieved my goals, business-wise. I would like to begin working more with community service projects to bring massage to more people, specifically to children with special needs.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

Massage can take you anywhere. This field is incredibly diverse and exciting. There are massage therapists in physical therapy clinics, oncology wards and neonatal intensive care units. Massage therapists are working in schools, spas, and out of RV’s renovated to provide onsite spa treatments. If you want to travel with musicians or provide massage to elite athletes, you can make that happen. If there’s a population you want to work with, there’s likely a way to integrate massage into that setting.

The post Interview with a Massage Therapist 2 appeared first on Job Shadow.

Read as Rene Banglesdorf talks about her career as an Aircraft Broker.  Find her at www.wepushtin.com and on the Twitter feed in the sidebar of this interview.

What do you do for a living?

I run a company that buys and sells aircraft.

I help people all over the world buy and sell aircraft—or just buy trips on private planes.

Working with aircraft owners, buyers, the FAA and other civil aviation authorities, attorneys and maintenance centers to make sure that aircraft transactions are equitable and run smoothly.

Lots of phone and email work, some travel.

I got started by doing marketing for a similar company.

I love that my job is different every day and that I meet people from all over the world.

What do you dislike?

I don’t like how much my industry is affected by the economy.

100% commission.

How much money do aircraft brokers make?

This is a very high-risk, high-reward job. You can live off of peanut butter and jelly one month and lobster the next. It’s important to be careful how you spend because you can’t plan when you’ll get a big commission check.

About $24,000 per year.

Lots of tenacity, people skills, and the thick skin to hear no two thousand times before one yes.

The sales cycle can be several years.

What is most rewarding?

Hearing about how people’s lives have changed using private aviation, like rescuing people stranded by earthquakes or flying a cancer patient to treatment.

Have some other sales experience first.

Even when I go on vacation I work, since I own the business. I work about 50 hours a week normally—more when there are lots of sales going on.

People think that only rich people fly in private planes. The fact is that many owners of aircraft are small and mid-sized businesses that use them as a competitive differentiator to grow their businesses and create more jobs.

Being one of the biggest and the best—beating my competitors.

The post Interview with an Aircraft Broker appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I’m a woman of many trades. Primarily, I am a dancer and choreographer, as well as a dance teacher. My teaching takes me literally all over the world! I also sing and write music, act, and have my own clothing line as well as a signature lipgloss. Lots… I know!

How would you describe what you do?

Well, all of the aspects of my work are different. But there is a common thread in that they are all things that I love and am very passionate about.

What does your work entail?

Always something different.

What’s a typical work week like?

There is nothing typical about what I do! Every day and week brings something new. Sometimes I spend a week on set for a TV show, sometimes, I’m having meetings, teaching class, recording music, working on designs… Generally I do travel on weekends to teach at dance conventions. I do about 20 cities a year.

How did you get started?

My whole life I have been creating and performing. My professional performance career began in my home town when I was 15 years old and has had ups and downs, but has been pretty much growing ever since! I took drama classes, dance, etc. when I was younger.

What do you like about what you do?

I love to create. I love being a source of inspiration to people all over the world. I enjoy that it’s always something different. Meeting new people is so great. And being able to work with people who are so gifted and learning all the time. It’s so cool to both inspire and be inspired simultaneously. I also love being able to use my voice to help others in need!

What do you dislike?

When I first moved to LA, it was very difficult to get consistent work. I was doing so many side jobs just trying to get by. And when you’re trying to make a name for yourself, and getting callback all the time, but barely booking jobs, it can be discouraging… Currently, I have a hard time seeing that the industry can have a tendency toward being ego driven. But, I do believe that there are plenty of incredibly aware and thoughtful human beings in the industry as well. The travel can also be draining and hard on the body. But I’ll gladly take it all to do what I love!

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

Again, it’s different with each gig. But technically, I am my own business.

How much money do professional choreographers make? 

There is such a range in the amount of money that each individual choreographer makes!! It IS possible to make a very healthy living as a choreographer, but it takes a LOT of hard work to build. I’ll just leave it at that!

How much money did/do you make starting out?

It was tough at first… My first year living in LA, I probably only made ten thousand dollars the whole year!..

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

Again, various for each thing. It’s important to train and learn as often as possible in your craft and never stop.

What is most challenging about what you do?

What is most rewarding?

I think those last 2 are pretty much answered in the likes and dislikes!.. I will say along with the stuff I talked about above, juggling everything can be a challenge. But I have a great manager who really really helps!

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Make sure that you really truly love it! And that you are confident in yourself. It will take time, and hard work, and you will be rejected and will hit road bumps. Perseverance is key!

How much time off do you get/take?

Not much!

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

People think that it is so glamorous. And it can be, but there is sooooo much blood, sweat and tears that go into creating that “glamour’!

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

As long as I am creating and doing things that I love, and making a healthy living doing so… I am happy! I would definitely like to star in a movie musical or TV show/film where I can dance, sing and act soon!

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I think you can visit my website for more info! www.ginastarbuck.com

The post Interview with Dancer and Choreographer Gina Starbuck appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am a Birth Doula.

How would you describe what you do?

I offer emotional and physical support, education, resources, and advocacy for women during labor and childbirth.

What does your work entail?

I offer consultations prenatally where I discuss the birth process and educate about birth options and interventions. At a specific point in a woman’s pregnancy, I go on-call, which means being accessible by phone 24 hours a day, 7 days per week until she goes into labor. When she is in labor, I go to her home or meet her at the hospital and offer her support (massage, verbal guidance, advocacy, suggest good labor positions, etc.) to help her progress through labor and birth her baby.

What’s a typical work week like?

I have prenatal consultations 2 days per week, 10 hours per day. I also have a second and third job that fills up the other 3 “work” days. However, if I have a client in labor (which can happen on weekends too!), I rearrange my schedule in whatever way I need to so that I am available to the laboring woman because at any given point she may need me to come to her. In birth work, there really is no such thing as a typical work week.

How did you get started?

I had a baby. Actually, it took me a couple of years after my daughter’s birth before I decided that this was something I wanted to get into. My ultimate goal is to become a home birth midwife, but part of that education is to become a Doula first. Being a Doula gives you an idea of how birth works, what it is like to be on-call and have to schedule your life 9 months out, and what birth looks like in the hospital. So, once my mentors told me that I needed to become a Doula, I did some research to find different trainings. I went through a training, did the required reading and other certifying requirements, and then started taking clients.

What do you like about what you do?

I love supporting women and watching them transform into mothers. I love educating women about their bodies and the birth process. I love giving support to a woman so that she feels empowered in her decisions and birth, instead of traumatized. I love that there is always something new to learn, no matter how many births you have been to. Birth is unpredictable, so it’s different every time, which keeps you on your toes. And, I’d be lying if I said I didn’t love watching a new human come into the world!

What do you dislike?

Sometimes, the hours. Some births take a very long time and you might be with a woman for 24+ hours. Mostly, I dislike when I give tons of great support and a baby still won’t come out so a mom has to have surgery. That is rough. It’s hard on everyone, even me, because I put a lot of emotional energy into my clients and I hate when we have a bad outcome like a cesarean.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

My clients pay me directly. My services are not covered by insurance, so it is self-pay. However, some insurance companies reimburse for my services, which is nice for those clients to get some of that money back, especially because my services can make a huge difference in the cost of someone’s overall hospital stay.

How much do people in your career/field make? 

In Columbus, where I live, Doula services are about $600 per birth. This is a flat rate. For me, I can take a maximum of 4 clients per month, due to my schedule and my ability to truly give good support without getting burnt out, so that’s a total of $2400/month. However, I give $100 from every birth to my office to pay for rent and our office manager’s salary. So my take home salary could be $2000/month. If you divide that by the number of prenatal appointments you do per month, the number of hours you spend with any given client, wear and tear to your car (and you might go to a client’s home 2 or more times, plus driving to the hospital), and any tools you might want to have for physical support, it sometimes can break down to about $10/hour or less (based on a 40-hour work week). It really depends on the month and how the births go. Sometimes, it is more like $25/hour. I’ve been to births where I am there for longer than 24 hours and I’ve already put in 24 hours at my other jobs, plus 20 hours on the 2 prenatal days. So, it really depends on the month and the birth. If you want to make a lot of money, you do not get into birth work. This is truly a calling.

How much money did/do you make starting out?

In my first year, I had maybe 6 clients total, so I made about $3000.00. I had a part-time job working somewhere else for $10 an hour. It was the only way that I could continue to make ends meet while I built up my clientele. This is not a field of lots of repeat customers. You might have repeat clients, but only once every few years because you can only have a baby so often. It takes a while to get your name out there and get referrals from other professionals and from your own satisfied clients. It all depends on how well you market yourself too.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

You don’t have to go to school to be a Doula. You do need to be familiar with the birth process, so that you know what is normal and what is not. There are various training programs that teach you the basic skills, but the real learning comes from going out there and doing it. I do suggest reading a lot about birth so that you can speak intelligently about birth and really educate your clients prenatally. This provides a good foundation so that when they are in labor, they are much more likely to be successful in attaining their birth goals. I did complete midwifery school as part of my training to become a home birth midwife, but I think it has helped in my role as a Doula too.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Becoming invested in a client and the outcome of their birth and not having it turn out the way they planned. Having a client go back to the OR for a cesarean, when their goal is to have an unmedicated vaginal birth, can be heartbreaking.

What is most rewarding?

Watching a woman have her second baby, unmedicated, after a traumatic first birth that was full of interventions. It is pretty awesome to watch a woman face her fears head on and accomplish a major goal. Plus, who doesn’t love to see a squishy new baby?!

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Get into this job if you feel called to do it. It is emotional, it is physical, it is rewarding, and it is hard. If you feel called to this line of work, find a good mentor and shadow a few births so that you know what you are getting into before you start taking your own clients. Don’t get into this job if you like to know exactly when you have to be at work. Don’t get into this job if you don’t like unpredictability. Don’t get into this job if you want to make a lot of money and have benefits like health insurance and a 401K.

How much time off do you get/take?

I take July off, to attend a conference. Otherwise, I work the rest of the year. This year, I took half of July and am taking all of December, because I felt like I needed an extra break. In order to take an entire month off, I have to save during the rest of the year to meet my expenses of that month off. If you don’t work, you don’t get paid-there is no built-in salary in this job. Also, in birth work, because of the large window that a woman can have her baby, if you want to take a week off, you have to plan to take more like 3-4 weeks off or have really good back up coverage because your client might deliver while you are off that week. Most of us plan our vacations 9-12 months in advance so that we have time to save money, as well as making sure that we don’t take clients during the time that we want to be on vacation.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

I hate to sound so negative, but the common misconception about what I do is that it is all glamorous. The reality is that this is an amazing job and very rewarding. But it also is hard work. Even when I am with a client for only a few hours, I am exhausted when I come home because of the energy that I have put into supporting a family.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I am continuing on my path to becoming a home birth midwife. I am also training to be an International Board Certified Lactation Consultant so that I can offer true continuity of care to my clients, no matter where they choose to give birth. My overall dreams, though, are a future in which all women have good support and freedom to birth where they feel safest, whether at home or in the hospital, and they don’t have to fight to have the birth that they desire.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

I was a lost soul before I found my job as a Doula. I had no idea what I wanted to be when I “grew up” and I was constantly itching to run away to somewhere where the grass is greener because I knew that I wanted to do something meaningful but didn’t think I could do that here. Being a Doula has grounded me. It has given me roots. It has provided me with an outlet to truly make a difference in other people’s lives. It is truly an amazing experience!

The post Interview with a Birth Doula appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am the Director of Financial Operations for the Amazon Conservation Team (ACT), a nonprofit organization that works in partnership with indigenous people in Amazon, specifically in Colombia and Suriname.

How would you describe what you do?

My works entails, the oversight of the financial and fiscal aspects of the organization, providing leadership and coordination in accounting, human resources, administrative, business planning and budgeting processes, supervise and liaise with the finance departments of our country programs offices.

What does your work entail?

Participating in strategic and operational decision-making processes of the organization, evaluating the internal controls, constant monitoring of effectiveness and efficiency, and determining where improvements and streamlining in financial procedures can be implemented.

An important part of my job is to provide support to the President and the rest of the Executive team, because many decisions involving the organization are based on financial conditions. As the Director of Financial Operations you are expected to have an understanding of what is going on at all the levels of the organization.

What’s a typical work week like?

What I like about working for ACT is that I don’t have a typical work week. As a small nonprofit organization, we all have to wear many hats and there is always a lot going on, usually the work is very dynamic.

I normally get to the office at 9 am and leave around 6 pm, and depending on the deadlines or how the day developed, I will have to stay later.

During a regular week, I would say that 25% of my time is devoted to internal planning and follow-up meetings, 15% of the time working with our country program offices, 50% monitoring the finances and the other 10% is designated to administrative and human resources activities.

How did you get started?

My accounting career started in the audit division of Ernst & Young (EYI), one of the “big four” accounting firms in the world. I was still a senior in college when I began working with EYI. This was a very valuable experience because it gave me a real understanding of the accounting work and its meaning. Then after a few years in the consulting and auditing industry, I was hired by a nonprofit organization as an accounting assistant.  Nonprofits are very unique for accounting professionals. Indeed despite my experience, I had to learn many of the activities and guidelines that regulate this type of organization. I gradually moved up until I became a Director of Finance.

What do you like about what you do?

I enjoy working with people and helping them achieve success. In small organizations such as mine, finance executives must take on broader roles. I lead the finance department in our headquarters, but I am also responsible for the finance operations in our two offices located in Colombia and Suriname.  Learning from their culture and even their business rules is a challenge I take every day.

My nonprofit gives financial assistance and leadership support to indigenous communities in South America; watching these communities  grow and succeed with our efforts and the programs we have in place is a priceless feeling.

What do you dislike?

Under some circumstances, this job sometimes could get very mentally stressful. I am not only responsible for having an organized accounting department. I have to make sure that our organization is financially healthy and that we keep a growing source of revenue (donors).  And, when times are difficult like the past two years, I am responsible for making sure that our organization remains financially stable. Sometimes this means taking on tough decisions.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

My compensation comes from a set salary, which is established by the President of the organization and approved by the Board of Directors.

How much do people in your field/career make? 

The salary for a Director of Finance will depend on the industry, the location and experience. In the nonprofit sector, the salaries are typically lower than in for profit companies. Depending on the size of the organization, some surveys suggest anywhere from $70K to $140K for the DC Metro area.

How much money did/do you make starting out? 

When I started working in the United Stated as an accounting assistant back in 2003, I was probably making less than $45K. However, this figure should be higher now.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

A degree in finance or accounting would be ideal. I have a bachelor’s degree in accounting and I am a CPA candidate. 

What is most challenging about what you do?

Having to manage a multicultural team is very challenging, especially when you are working with people that are geographically dispersed in 3 countries with different languages, multi-currency and different local regulations.

On the other hand, since we depend on the generosity of our donors, most of the nonprofit organizations have suffered enormously with the weak economy. This means that our future always remains unpredictable. More than ever, having to manage the resources with extreme efficiency is a challenge.

Finally, making sure that we keep a low overhead to ensure that the majority of the resources we received are invested in the communities we serve is the biggest challenge of all.

What is most rewarding?

For me being part of a team of people that cares about the mission of the organization and the indigenous communities in the Amazon is very rewarding.

However, what I love the most about my current job is the diversity of the people and the fact that one day I can be in a meeting with the President of the organization or the Board of Directors, and next day just sitting down and talking to the most interesting indigenous women of the Colombian Amazon learning about their culture and needs. Having the opportunity to be exposed to all these experiences is incredibly fulfilling for me.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

The finance field offers lots of possibilities and opportunities, but you will also need to be prepared to work under pressure and strict deadlines. At the beginning of your career, you will have to be very flexible with your time and expect to work long hours. In addition, I personally believe that a good strength for people seeking to work in this career is to be detail oriented.

How much time off do you get/take?

I get 4 weeks of vacation per year; if you have been at the organization for less than two years then you are eligible for only 3 weeks per year. And I also get two personal days per year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

People think that if you are in the finance field you will always have to work endless hours every day including weekends.  Certainly, this job demands a lot of time especially at the beginning of your career, but as you move up, if you are organized in managing your tasks and maintaining a balanced workload throughout the week/month/year, you will get the weekends off.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

My short/medium term goal is to help this organization to keep growing and making sure it is positioned to work in the always “challenging” times, especially for the nonprofit sector.  In addition, that ACT remains strong and prepared for those times when things are not as prosperous as we would like. Finally, everyday I try to work really hard and prepare myself to keep advancing up in my career.

What else would you like people to know about your job/career?

In general, I think that Finance is an excellent profession to be in. I feel very fortunate to be doing what I absolutely love, especially having a career in the nonprofit sector.  Although, the compensation is definitely less, to me the satisfaction of contributing to a cause that I believe in is the most important and rewarding aspect of my job.

The post Interview with a Director of Financial Operations (Amazon Conservation Team) appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am an RN in a newborn or sometimes called well baby nursery in a large urban hospital.

How would you describe what you do?

I care for well newborns immediately after birth and throughout their hospital stay.  I teach the mother and father how to care for their newborn.  I also administer antibiotics via IV to newborns that might have become infected with a bacteria through the birth process.  I administer other medications as ordered by the attending physician.  Further, I assist mothers with breastfeeding.  I also assist the OBGYN physician in minor surgical procedures on some newborn males.

What does your work entail?

My work entails attending to the newborn after birth and carrying out doctors orders to ensure the newborn is treated for any problem that might have arisen.  I am also responsible for teaching the parents all about their baby.

What’s a typical work week like?

I have my choice of four hour, eight hour or twelve hour shifts.  Our hospital self schedules, meaning you enter the hours you want to work into the computer.  Generally we get what we want as everyone has different scheduling needs.  Sometimes my schedule gets adjusted to meet department staffing needs, but not often.  One can expect to work some of the major holidays.

How did you get started?

I lost my job in business when the company I worked for moved to another state.  I decided that I did not want that to ever happen again so I enrolled in a nursing program.

What do you like about what you do?

I enjoy the babies.  I also enjoy teaching the parents about their newborn.  My job usually revolves around the happiest, most joyous time for a family.

What do you dislike?

Mostly I dislike the fact that nurses are not listened to as much as they should be when departmental decisions or changes are being made.  I think administrators should get input from nurses more often.

How do you make money/or how are you compensated?

I make $27.50 per hour plus another $4.50 per hour because I work the 3pm to 11pm shift.  The extra $4.50 is called shift differential.  All totaled I make $32.00 per hour.

How much money do you make?

$32.00 per hour.

How much money do you make starting out?

About $20.00 per hour

What education or skills are needed to do this?

I went to three years of nursing school. Prior to that I took classes at a local university to get the prerequisite college classes completed.  The classes were anatomy and physiology, microbiology, chemistry.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Working with teen mothers, some as young as 14 or 15 years old, this is especially true if the young mother has a poor support network. Also, when the neo-natal intensive care unit (NICU) is in need of additional staff, we occasionally work there as well.

What is most rewarding?

Being a part of such a joyous occasion.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

Love the sciences and technology.  The job is always evolving.  Being computer competent and having the ability to learn new technology quickly is important.

How much time off do you get/take?  

We accumulate hours of vacation time called Paid Time Off,  we accumulate this time quite easily based on how much we work.  Usually the nurses in our department take about 4 weeks off per year.

What is a common misconception people have about what you do?

That is is easy. People usually say  “you are so lucky to get to rock and feed babies all day”.  The work is sometimes difficult and certainly fast paced.

What are your goals/dreams for the future?

I would like to continue my education, working toward a nurse practitioner license one day.

What else would you like people to know about what you do?

You have to develop a good working relationship with the Labor and Delivery unit nurses, OBGYN physicians, pediatricians, and the neo-natal intensive care unit (NICU).

The post Registered Nurse ( Newborn Nursery) appeared first on Job Shadow.

What do you do for a living?

I am the founder, president & CEO of the leading worldwide in-place pipe rehabilitation company for buildings’ inside infrastructure.

How would you describe what you do?

I am in charge of Nu Flow’s global image and marketing strategy. I develop and improve our reach into other countries, further expanding our presence and dominance in our industry.

What does your work entail?

First and foremost, knowledge of the industry and technology is imperative. You need to have the ambition, drive and stubborn determination to lead a company and continuously try to bump it up to the next level. There is a lot of big-picture planning, idea brainstorming and presentation preparation.

What’s a typical work week like?

If I’m not traveling, I am in our San Diego headquarters office having meetings with prospective international partners, investors or prestigious customers. I provide strategy insight and training to our technicians, share ideas with the marketing team and work closely with the COO. I also update our marketing and PR team with the latest company news to make sure the word gets out.

How did you get started?

In the 1990s, I was a trenchless pipe lining technology for drain lines, but it was limited to large-diameter municipal pipe projects. The technology was inefficient and hard to use. I saw an untapped market for lateral pipes connected to the sewer mains, so I developed a trenchless solution for small diameter pipes that can be used inside buildings. I founded Nu Flow in Toronto in 1998, followed by the establishment of Nu Flow America in 2005 in the U.S.

What do you like about what you do?

It’s tough but fun. I get to do something that I love to do and I get to see my ideas grow around the world. Being the CEO of a startup, I get to create plans and ideas that mature in front of my eyes.

What do you dislike?

Dealing with the Peter Principle is the toughest part of my job. I don’t like to see people not reach their maximum potential and instead fall short of what I believe they can be or do.

How do you make money?

I am paid a salary plus stock in the company.

How much do people in your career make?

Most CEOs of innovative companies make more than $100k/yr.

What education, schooling, or skills are needed to do this?

You must have common sense and on-the-job training. You must understand the actual plumbing community before you move up.

What is most challenging about what you do?

Dealing with different personalities is challenging. Also, it’s more political than most people think.

What is most rewarding?

Winning a large contract and watching our products installed. It’s exciting to take our work to new feats and then have a happy customer. Also, to watch my ideas and dreams affect so many is extremely rewarding.

What advice would you offer someone considering this career?

It takes a lot of sacrifice, time, and a lot of energy. You must have competent people around you in order to be successful. It’s equally important that these people are trained correctly so that the product is what you made it out to be and everything is consistent. Always be afraid, yet never afraid of what’s around the corner.

How much time off do you get/take?